TEMPORARY DOMESTIC BAGGAGE CLAIM

HALL

VOLUME-II
SPECIFICATIONS

August, 2010

NATIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES PAKISTAN (PVT.) LTD

13th Floor, N.I.C. Building, Abbasi Shaheed Road, Karachi, Tel: 021-99090000, Fax: 021-35651994.
SIALKOT INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
LIMITED
CONSTRUCTION OF SIALKOT INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT,TEMPORARY DOMESTIC BAGGAGE
CLAIM HALL

SPECIFICATIONS - VOLUME II

TABLE OF CONTENT
CIVIL WORKS

SEC.NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

0120 Contractor’s Camp 0120-1

0130 Stake-out Survey 0130-1 to 02

1100 Earthworks 1100-1 to 07

1330 Stone Soling 1330-1 to 02

2100 Formwork 2100-1 to 05

2200 Reinforcement 2200-1 to 04

2300 Plain and Reinforced Concrete 2300-1 to 31

2410 Aggregate Sub-Base & Aggregate

Base Course 2410-1 to 08

2510 Precast Concrete Paving Ties/Blocks 2510-1 to 05

4200 Brick Masonry 4200-1 to 05

6220 Aluminium Works 6220-1 to 06

6250 Glazing 6250-1 to 03

6411 Water Proofing & Built-up Roofing 6411-1 to 06

6521 Cement Plaster 6521-1 to 05

6600 Floor and Wall Finishes 6600-1 to 08

6700 Painting 6700-1 to 05

6720 Illuminated Signs 6720-1 to 13

ELECTRICALL WORKS

SEC.NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

8001 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

ELECTRICAL WORKS 8001-1 TO 8001-11

8132 LT SWITCHBOARDS & SUB MAIN

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 8132-1 TO 8132-07

8133 LT DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 8133-1 TO 8133-05

8150 LIGHT FIXTURES 8150-1 TO 8150-06

8212 LOW TENSION CABLES 8212-1 TO 8212-06

8220 WIRING ACCESSORIES 8220-1 TO 8220-04

8230 CONDUITS AND PIPES 8230-1 TO 8230-06

8240 EARTHING 8240-1 TO 8240-05

8250 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 8250-1 TO 8250-05

8290 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 8290-1 TO 8290-11

8312 STRUCTURED CABLING 8312-1 TO 8312-13

8331 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 8331-1 TO 8331-06

8335 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM 8335-1 TO 8335-04

8341 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 8341-1 TO 8341-05

8371 CABLE ANTENNA TV SYSTEM 8371-1 TO 8371-03

HVAC WORKS

8810 Special Provision-HVAC Works 8810-1 TO 09

8965 Technical Specifications-HVAC Works 8965-1 TO 20

MECHNICALC WORKS
8560 Baggage Handling Facilities 8560-1 TO 09
CIVIL
 0120-1

SECTION - 0120

CONTRACTOR'S CAMP

1. SCOPE

The work to be done under this item consists of construction, erection, installation and
maintenance of the Contractor's Project Site Offices or main camp and the Contractor's
sub-camps or temporary camps, if any, and shall include all offices, shops, warehouses,
and other operational buildings; all housing and related facilities including
accommodations for the Contractor's personnel.

2. GENERAL

The location of the Contractor's camps, including all buildings, utilities and facilities
therefor, and of the camps or establishments of all persons/parties in the vicinity operating
or associated with the Contractor shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

The work to be done under this item will terminate upon the actual Completion Date.
However, if directed by the Engineer or the Employer, the Contractor shall continue such
work to the extent required by the Contractor's personnel during the period of
maintenance. No compensation shall be paid for the continued operation and
maintenance of the Contractor's Camps during the period of maintenance.

Upon completion of the Works, or at such time within the period of maintenance as
directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all buildings utilities and other
facilities from the Site and restore all camp areas to a neat and clean condition.

Contractor shall protect the environmental interests and HSE regulations at camp and
works sites during execution of the contractual work.

3. CODES AND STANDARD

The construction, operation and maintenance of all camps of the Contractor shall comply
with all applicable provisions of current Pakistan Labour Camp Rules.

4. MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall furnish, make arrangements for, and carry out proper and adequate
maintenance of the Contractor’s Camp areas at such camp to provide a neat, well-kept
camp in all respects with pleasant and healthy surroundings and conditions for all
occupants of their camp.

Adequately equipped and properly staffed portable first aid stations or dispensaries shall
be provided by the Contractor at camps and other strategic locations to administer first aid
treatment at any time required and free of charge to all persons on the Site, including
employees of the Engineer and the Employer.

5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No payment shall be made for the works involved within the scope of this section of
specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein. The
cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of other items
of the Bill of Quantities.
 0130-1

SECTION - 0130

STAKE-OUT SURVEY

1. SCOPE

Under this item the Contractor shall make the stakeout survey for construction purposes
with competently qualified men, consistent with the current practices. The work shall
proceed immediately upon the award of the contract and shall be expeditiously
progressed to completion in a manner and at a rate satisfactory to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall keep the Engineer fully informed as to the progress of the stakeout
survey. The scope of this section of specifications is covered by detailed specifications
as laid down herein.

2. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

All instruments, equipment, stakes and other material necessary to perform all work
shall be provided by the Contractor. These instruments and equipment shall be
available to Engineer at all times for the purpose of checking the work of the Contract.

All stakes used shall be of a type approved by the Engineer, clearly and permanently
marked so as to be legible at all times. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
maintain these stakes in their proper position and location at all times. Any existing
stakes or markers defining property lines and survey monuments which may be
disturbed during construction shall be properly tied into fixed reference point before
being disturbed and accurately reset in their proper position upon completion of the
work.

3. CONSTRUCTION

The Contractor shall trim trees, bushes and other interfering objects, not consistent with
the plan, from survey lines in advance of all survey work to permit accurate and
unimpeded work by his stake-out survey crews and the Engineer's survey crews. The
exact position of all work shall be established from control points, which are shown on
the plans or modified by the Engineer. Any error, apparent discrepancy in or absence of
data shown or required for accurately accomplishing the stakeout survey shall be
referred to the Engineer for interpretation or furnishing when such is observed or
required.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of his work and shall maintain all
reference points, stakes, etc. throughout the life of the contract. Damaged, destroyed or
inaccessible reference points, bench marks or stakes shall be replaced by the
Contractor. Existing or new control points that will be or are destroyed during
construction shall be re-established and all reference ties recorded thereon shall be
furnished to the Engineer. All stakeout survey work shall be referenced to the
centerlines shown on the Plans. All computations necessary to establish the exact
position of the work from control points shall be made and preserved by the Contractor.
All computations, survey notes and other records necessary to accomplish the work
shall be kept neatly and made available to the Engineer upon request and furnished to
the Employer upon Contract completion.

The Engineer may check all or any portion of the stakeout survey work or notes made
by the Contractor and any necessary correction to the work shall be immediately made.
Such checking by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities for the accuracy or completeness of his work.
 0130-2

Reference points, base lines, stakes and benchmarks for borrow pits shall be
established by the Contractor.

All required right-of-way and easement limits shall be established, staked and
referenced by the Contractor concurrent with the construction stakeout survey.

The Contractor shall place at least two offset stakes or references at each centre lines
station and at such intermediate stations as the Engineer may direct. From
computations and measurements made by the Contractor, these stakes shall be clearly
marked with the correct centre line, station number, offset and cut or fill so as to permit
the establishment of the true centre line location during construction. He shall locate
and place all cut, fill, slope, line grade or other stakes and points as the Engineer may
direct to be necessary for the proper progress of the work.

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No payment shall be made for the works involved within the scope of this section of
specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein. The
cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of other
items of the Bill of Quantities.
 1100-1

SECTION – 1100

EARTHWORKS

1. SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in connection with
earthworks of all underground services and structural units, stock piling of suitable
excavated material, disposal of unsuitable and surplus excavated material in
accordance with this section of specifications, the applicable drawings and subject to
terms and conditions of the Contract.

2. GENERAL

2.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have made local and independent inquires
as to, and shall take the whole risk of, the nature of the ground subsoil or
material to be excavated or penetrated and the Contractor shall not be entitled
to receive an extra or additional payment nor to be relieved from any of his
obligations by reasons of the nature of such ground subsoil or material.

2.2 All excavations, cut and fills shall be constructed to the lines, levels and
gradients specified with any necessary allowance for consolidation, settlement
and drainage so that at the end of the Period of Maintenance the ground shall
be at the required lines, levels and gradients. During the course of the Contract
and during the Period of Maintenance any damage or defects in cuts and fills, in
structures and other works, caused by slips, falls of wash-ins or any other
ground movement due to the Contractor's negligence shall be made good by
the contractor at his own cost.

3. SITE PREPARATION

3.1 The Contractor shall set out the works and shall be responsible for true and
perfect setting out of the same and for correctness of the positions, levels,
dimensions and alignments of all parts thereof. If at any time any error in this
respect shall appear during the progress of the works, the Contractor shall at his
own expense rectify such error, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.2 The Contractor shall construct and maintain accurate bench marks so that the
Lines and Levels can be easily checked by the Engineer.

3.3 The Contractor shall perform a joint survey with the Engineer's Representative,
of the area where earth work is required, plot the ground levels on the drawings
and obtain approval from the Engineer before starting the earth work and shall
supply a copy to the Employer duly checked, signed and authenticated by the
Engineer before start of work.

4. EXCAVATIONS

4.1 Excavation shall include the removal of all material of every name and nature.

It is expected that rock and other hard material will be encountered during
excavation. The rate of excavation shall include the removal of all sub-surface
 1100-2

material of every name and nature and no classification of sub-surface material

shall be made nor any additional payment shall be made.

4.2 The major portion of excavations shall be carried out by mechanical excavators
and excavated materials disposed off to stock on spoil as directed by the
Engineer. The excavation may be done by normal means. Unless otherwise
specified by the Engineer, leveling, trimming and finishing to the required levels
and dimensions shall be done manually. The material suitable for fill and backfill
if approved by the Engineer shall be stockpiled within the limits of whole of the
Site as directed by the Engineer.

Excavated material unsuitable for use as fill and backfill shall be disposed off by
the Contractor at locations approved by the Engineer within specified free
haulage limit.

4.3 The Contractor shall give reasonable notice that he intends to commence any
excavation and he shall submit to the Engineer full details of his proposals. The
Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility with
respect to such work.

4.4 The Contractor shall preserve the completed excavation from damage due to
slips and earth movements, ingress of water from any source whatsoever and
deterioration by exposure to the sun and the effects of the weather.

All excavations shall be kept free of water and shall be maintained dry to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Prevent surface water and sub-surface water and
sub surface ground water from flowing into the excavation and flooding the
project site and surroundings.

Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations, remove water from

excavations to present softening of foundation bottoms, under cutting footings
and soil changes determined to the stability of sub-grades and foundations.
Provide and discharge lives necessary to convey the water away from the
excavations convey water removed from excavation and rain water to outside
the limits in manner that no damages is caused to the surrounding services
properties.

4.5 Excavation for pits, cable trenches, equipment-foundations and other structures
shall be taken out to the levels and dimensions shown on Drawings or such
other levels and dimensions as the Engineer may direct.

4.6 Excavation shall extend to adequate distance from walls and footings to allow
for placing and removal of forms, installations of services and for inspection,
except where the concrete for walls and footings is authorized to be deposited
directly against excavated surfaces. Undercutting will not be permitted. The
additional excavation for placing and removal of forms, installation of services,
for inspection and generally for working area on slopes for stability shall not be
measured for payment and shall be deemed to be included in the rates for
excavation as measured net.

4.7 All excavations in foundations shall be taken to 6 inch above the final excavation
elevations shown on the drawings and the last 6-inch shall be trimmed carefully
to a smooth and level surface. Immediately after trimming to the final elevation,
a layer of blinding concrete shall be placed to the thickness shown on the
drawings. All excavations for foundations which have been trimmed and
 1100-3

disturbed shall be compacted and covered by lean concrete by the end of the
day.

4.8 No excavation shall be refilled nor any permanent work commenced until the
foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and his permission to proceed is
given.

4.9 If excavation for sub-structures are carried below the required level, as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, the surplus depth shall be filled
in with concrete of same grade as of blinding concrete at the sole cost of the
Contractor.

4.10 All excavation shall be performed in the dry. The placing of blinding concrete,
placing of reinforcement and casting of the permanent works in the excavation
shall be carried out in the dry.

4.11 Shoring, where required during excavation, shall be installed to protect workmen
and the bank, adjacent paving, structures and utilities. The term shoring shall
also be deemed to cover whatever methods the Contractor elects to adopt, with
prior approval of the Engineer, for upholding the sides of excavation and also for
planking and strutting to excavation against the side of roadways and adjoining
properties in existing hardcore of any other material. The Contractor will be held
responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and no claim for additional
excavation, concrete or other material will be considered in this respect.

4.12 Existing utility lines that are shown on the drawings or the locations of which are
made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and that are to be retained, as
well as utility lines constructed during excavation and backfilling, and if
damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. Any existing
utility lines which are not known to the Contractor in sufficient time to avoid
damage, if inadvertently damaged during excavation, shall be repaired by the
Contractor and adjustment in payment will be made as approved by the
Engineer. When utility lines which are to be removed, are encountered within
the area of operations the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in ample time for
the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of the service.

4.13 Where applicable the excavation work shall include the excavation in above
water table and excavation below water table. The Contractor shall provide all
plant, equipment, pumps, sheeting, well points as required to keep the water
table 3.0 feet below the deepest foundation as shown on the drawings till the
completion of foundation works.

4.14 Before starting the excavation for pipelines, the Contractor shall ensure the
correct alignment of the pipeline on the ground the depth and width of
excavation of the trench, all in accordance with the Drawings and instructions of
the Engineer. The Contractor shall make profile with cement concrete pillars.

Excavation shall be carried out true to lines, levels, grades and widths as shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer ensuring proper laying of the
pipe line, the bedding fill, construction of chambers for appurtenances and any
other structures. The trench bottom shall be graded to provide even and
substantial bearing over the specified bedding and of the structure.

Without the written permission of the Engineer, not more than 600 feet of the
trench shall be opened in advance of the completed pipeline.
 1100-4

4.15 The Engineer may require the Contractor to excavate below the elevations
shown on the drawings or he may order him to stop above the elevations shown
depending upon the suitable foundation material encountered.

4.16 If for any reason, the levels, grades or profiles of the excavations are changed
adversely by the Contractor, the Contractor shall at his own cost, be liable to
bring the excavations to the required levels and profiles as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

5. EXCAVATION TOLERANCES

Excavation shall be performed within the tolerances for excavation limits indicated on
the drawings. Where no tolerance limits are indicated excavation shall be performed to
tolerances established by the Engineer as acceptable for the design and type of work
involved.

6. FILL AND BACKFILL

6.1 The backfilling shall include filling under the floors, around the foundation
trenches, pipes, conduits, ducts and channels.

The backfilling shall include loading, unloading, transporting, placing, stacking,

spreading of earth, watering, rolling, ramming and compacting, etc., complete as
specified herein.

6.2 The excavated material if found suitable shall be stockpiled within the free
haulage limit of the Project Boundary. This material shall be used for filling/back-
filling if approved by the Engineer and shall be transported by the Contractor
anywhere required for the purpose of filling/back-filling work in this Contract.

6.3 The Contractor shall provide the approved quality of backfill and fill material
required to complete the fill and back- filling work from the places /borrow areas
as designated by the Engineer. All necessary permissions from any authority for
excavation within Borrow areas/ designated places shall be of contractor’s
responsibility.
Deep filling shall be predominantly granular material and free from slurry mud,
organic or other unsuitable matter and capable of compaction by ordinary
means.

6.4 Material for backfilling shall be as approved by the Engineer and shall be placed
in layers not exceeding 6 inches measured as compacted material with
sufficient water and compacted to produce in-situ density not less than 95% of
the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content.

Depending on the depth of fill the Engineer may instruct increased thickness of
successive layers to be placed. The filling shall be compacted by mechanical
means as approved by the Engineer.

6.5 Filling around pipes and cables shall be carefully placed with fine material to
cover the pipe or cable completely before the normal fill is placed.
 1100-5

6.6 Backfilling of trenches/foundations shall be carried out only after the pipe
line/structural works within the excavations have been inspected, tested and
approved by the Engineer.

6.7 Fill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to approval by the
Engineer. Fill shall be brought up evenly on each side of the walls as far as
practicable. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting the fill shall not be
operated closer to the wall than a distance equal to the height of the fill above
the top of footing.

6.8 Before the start of fill and backfill, the Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
levels and slopes of the fills and backfill shown on the Drawings, the
requirements of compaction, the possibility of settlement & all other particulars
whatsoever in connection with the filling works.

6.9 All filled areas shall be left neat, smooth and well compacted, the top surface
consisting of the normal site surface soil, unless otherwise directed.

7. TOLERANCES

The stabilization of compacted backfill/fill surface shall be smooth and even and shall
not vary more than 3/8 inch in 10 feet from true profile and shall not be more than 1/2
inch from true elevation.

8. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL

8.1 The rejected unsuitable material and surplus excavated material shall be
disposed off at designated place or as directed by the Engineer. No
compensation of any lead/lift is admissible and rates quoted shall be deemed to
include the same.

8.2 The disposal of surplus/unsuitable excavated material shall include loading,

unloading, transporting, stacking, spreading and leveling as directed by the
Engineer.

9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

9.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or else where in the Contract Documents, no

measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned works related
to the relevant BOQ items. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.

9.1.1 Timber shoring, planking, strutting and providing slope for upholding the
sides of excavations.

9.1.2 Any fill with approved material necessitated by over excavation due to
fault or convenience of the Contractor except under structural members.
 1100-6

9.1.3 Stockpiling the excavated material at approved location within free

haulage limit of the Project Boundary and transporting back suitable
material to places requiring fill or backfill.

9.1.4 Specified foundation bed preparation.

9.1.5 Excavation involved in providing adequate working space around sides

of foundation and service line trenches.

9.1.6 Providing approved quality fill/backfill material obtained from excavated

material as designated by the Engineer.

9.1.7 Rolling, leveling, watering & compacting the fill and backfill to required
density.

9.1.8 All laboratory and field tests stipulated in these specifications.

9.1.9 Disposal of rejected surplus and unsuitable excavated material at

designated place or as directed by the Engineer. No compensation of
any lead/lift is admissible and rates quoted shall be deemed to include
the same.

9.1.10 De-watering to keep the foundations dry during construction.

9.1.11 All cost inclusive of borrow area’s royalty charges

9.2 Excavation

9.2.1 Measurement

Quantities of excavation shall be calculated/measured from the pre-work

levels of leveled and graded ground taken jointly by the Contractor and
the Engineer before commencement of the work.

The quantities set out for excavation and its subsequent disposal shall
be deemed to be the bulk quantity before excavating and no allowance
shall be made for any subsequent variations in bulk or for any extra
excavation.

Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings quantities of excavation shall

be measured of acceptably completed works on the basis of vertical
excavations required in accordance with lines of concrete.

Quantities of excavation for laying service line trenches shall be

measured for payment on the basis of vertical excavation faces for the
specified width for the trench as shown on the drawings.

Measurement for acceptably completed excavation works shall be made

on the basis of number of cubic meter of material excavated for
foundation and service trenches as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
 1100-7

9.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptably measured quantity of excavation

on the basis of unit rate per cubic meter quoted in the Bills of Quantities
and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the
item, including but not limiting to back filling.

9.3 Backfill/Fills

9.3.1 Measurement

Measurement for acceptably completed backfill/fill works will be made on

the basis of number of cubic meter of compacted backfill/fill in position in
accordance with the lines, levels and grade as shown on Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.

9.3.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptably measured quantity of backfill/fill on

the basis of unit rate per cubic meter quoted in the Bills of Quantities and
shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the item.
 1330-1

SECTION - 1330

STONE SOLING

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performance of all operations required in
connection with the construction of stone soling, in strict accordance with the
specifications and Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. The scope of this
section of specifications is covered with detailed specifications as laid down herein.

2. MATERIAL

Material shall be of approved quality. It shall be comprise strong, hard, durable stone of
the approved size free from impurities, quarry sap, dust, dirt and solubility characteristics.
The stone shall be obtained from approved quarries and shall be sound, free from
laminations and weak cleavages.

3. QUALITY CONTROL

The quality of material used in stone soling shall conform to the following:

- Maximum Los Angeles Abrasion value 30% determined as per ASTM C-535-81.

- Soundness 5 cycles with Sodium Sulphate determined as per ASTM C-88-8

- Specific Gravity shall be not less than 2.5 determined as per ASTM C-127-84.

- Water Absorption - shall not be more then 1.5%.

4. CONSTRUCTION

4.1 Preparation of sub-grade

Sub-grade shall be formed of suitable materials free of clods, sod, roots, stumps,
brush or other objectionable material.

Sub-grade material shall be placed in successive layers not exceeding 150mm in

thickness loose measure, and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted to give
the specified density.

The sub-grade shall be compacted at optimum moisture content and loose

pockets, if any, cut-out and refilled with selected materials in layers not more
than 150 mm thick and formed to levels and grades shown on the drawings.

Compaction shall be done by approved methods consistent with the soil/material

to be compacted.

The minimum dry weight density of the sub-grade shall not be less than 95% of
the Modified AASHTO requirements.

Maximum density is defined as the maximum dry weight density as determined

by ASTM Designation D-1557 (MOD-AASHTO).
 1330-2

4.2 Stone Soling

The stone ballast shall be well graded and broken hard stone of 50mm mesh
obtained from an approved quarry. The soling stone shall be 150mm in size from
an approved quarry.

The stone shall be laid and packed to even grades and well rolled using vibratory
roller to a consolidated thickness of not less than 150mm as shown on the
drawings.

The whole of the surface of the compacted stone soling shall be blinded with
moorum or any other approved gritty material. After the interstices have been
filled with smaller size stones so as to effectively fill in the voids and crevices, the
soling area may be watered, if necessary and again thoroughly rolled with the
same roller to produce a smooth and even surface free from irregularities
and true to line and level.

Care shall be taken to prevent any damage to existing structures, mains or pipes
while rolling operation is in progress. In places inaccessible for a roller,
compaction shall be done by hand tampers weighing not less than 9 kg or power
rammers as directed by the Engineer.

5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

5.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents no

measurement and payment will be made for the Under- mentioned specified
works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall
be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items
of the Bill of Quantities.

5.1.1 Any losses of material which may result from shrinkage, compaction,
waste, overflow, erosion, etc.

5.1.2 Specified sub-grade preparation.

5.1.3 Ballast material of approved quality.

5.1.4 Compaction of sub-grade and stone.

5.2 Stone Soling

5.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of stone soling will be

made on the basis of actual area in square meter of compacted soling in
position as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

5.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of compacted

stone soling on the basis of unit rate per square meter quoted in the Bill
of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the works
related to the items.
 2100-1

SECTION - 2100

FORMWORK

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all
plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of formwork for the
purpose of shuttering in concreting work complete in strict accordance with this
section of the specifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the
terms and conditions of the Contract.

2. GENERAL

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform the work by engaging

well trained and experienced staff or by the Sub-Contractor who shall have
enough number of well trained and experienced staff to coordinate his activities
with the other operations. However the Contractor shall be responsible for the
quality of work performed by the Sub-Contractor as per the requirements of these
specifications.

3. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following are applicable to these specifications, as and

where required:

ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

ACI 347R Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

In addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistani Standards, British
Standards, American Concrete Institute Standards, American Institute of Steel
Construction Standards, American Society for Testing and Materials Standards
and other Standards as may be specified by the Engineer for Special Materials
and Construction are also relevant.

4. MATERIALS

All materials shall conform to the requirements of ACI 347R.

Forms shall be of timber, steel, plywood or other suitable materials as approved

by the Engineer. Forms where used shall give the required finish to the concrete
surface. Wooden forms shall be free from loose knots and shall be well
seasoned.
 2100-2

5. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

5.1 Transportation

Care shall be taken during transportation to avoid damage to formwork

materials.

5.2 Storage

Materials shall be stored in such a manner that access to all different

materials is available. Used formwork shall be stored after cleaning and
preparing for reuse.

Materials shall be stored in appropriate building or under covers and

shade.

6. WORKMANSHIP

6.1 Formwork shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as shown on
the drawings. Form shall have sufficient strength to withstand the
pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete and shall
have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. Formwork shall
be tight enough to prevent loss of liquid from concrete.

6.2 Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces of reinforced
concrete work unless permitted by the Engineer.

6.3 The Design and Engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction,
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Where necessary, to
maintain the specified tolerances, the formwork shall be cambered to
compensate for anticipated deflections in the formwork due to the weight
and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to construction loads.

6.4 The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition

and until final completion and acceptance of the Project, sufficient control
points and bench marks to be used as references for checking upon
tolerances.

6.5 Where natural plywood-form-finish, grout-cleaned-finish, smooth-rubbed-

finish, scrubbed-finish, or sand-floated-finish is required, forms shall be
smooth (faced with plywood, liner sheets, or pre-fabricated panels) and
true to line, in order that the surfaces produced will require little dressing
to arrive at true surfaces. Where any as-cast finish is required, no
dressing shall be permitted in the finishing operation.

6.6 Forms shall not be reused if there is any evidence of surface wear and
tear or defect which would impair the quality of the surface finish. Forms
shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared before reuse.
 2100-3

6.7 Positive means such as wedges or jacks for accurate adjustment and for
proper removal of shores and struts shall be provided and all settlement
shall be monitored during concrete placing operation. Forms shall be
securely braced against lateral deflections.

6.8 Form ties shall be constructed so that the ends or end fasteners can be
removed without causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the
concrete. After the ends or end fasteners of form ties have been
removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminate not less than 2
diameter or twice the minimum dimension of the tie from the formed faces
of concrete to be permanently exposed to view and in no case shall this
distance be less than 20 mm. When the formed face of the concrete is
not to be permanently exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush with
the formed surfaces.

Through bolts may be permitted provided that they are greased to allow
for easy withdrawal and the holes subsequently made good. Through
bolts are not to be used on water-retaining structures.

6.9 At construction joints contact surface of the form sheathing for flush
surfaces exposed to view shall overlap the hardened concrete in the
previous placement by no less than 25 mm. The forms shall be held
against the hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at the
construction joint so as to maintain a true surface.

6.10 Wedges used for final adjustment of the forms prior to concrete
placement shall be fastened in position after the final check.

6.11 Formwork shall be so anchored to shores or to other supporting surfaces

or members that upward or lateral movement of any part of the formwork
system during concrete placement will not occur.

6.12 Runways or planks for moving labour and equipment shall be provided
with struts or legs and shall be supported directly on the formwork or
upon the structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel.

6.13 All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any
accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other
foreign material before placing fresh concrete.

6.14 Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage of the wood shall be
removed and replaced. Plywood and other wood surfaces not subject to
shrinkage shall be sealed against absorption of moisture from the
concrete by either (1) a field applied, approved form oil or sealer, or (2) a
factory applied non-absorptive liner. When forms are coated to prevent
bond with concrete, it shall be done prior to placing of the reinforcing
steel. Excess coating material shall not be allowed to stand in puddles in
the forms nor allowed to come in contact with the concrete against which
fresh concrete will be placed. Care shall be taken that such approved
composition is kept out of contact with the reinforcement. Where as-cast
finishes are required, materials, which will impart a stain to the concrete
shall not be applied to the form surfaces. Where the finished surface is
required to be painted, the material applied to form surfaces shall be
compatible with the type of paint to be used.
 2100-4

6.15 For reinforced concrete, in no circumstances shall forms be struck until

the concrete attains a strength of at least twice the stress to which the
concrete may be exposed at the time of striking.

The strength referred to shall be that of concrete using the same cement
and aggregates, with the same proportions, and cured under conditions of
temperature and moisture similar to those obtaining in the work. Where
possible, the formwork should be left for longer time as it would assist the
curing.

In normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 10

degree C and where ordinary Portland cement is used, forms may be
struck after expiry of the following periods:

- Walls, footing, columns, sides of beams and slab, 48 hours or as

may be decided by the Engineer.

- Slab Bottom 14 days.

- Beams Bottom 21 days.

6.16 The shoring system, wherever required, shall have a capacity sufficient to
resist the anticipated loads.

6.17 It is generally desirable to give forms for reinforced concrete an upward

camber to ensure that the beams or slabs (specially cantilever slabs) do
not have a sag when they have taken up their deflection, but this should
not be done unless permitted by the Engineer.

6.18 No loads, other than man and light plant required in connection with the
actual work in hand, shall be allowed until 28 days after concreting where
ordinary Portland Cement is used and 14 days when rapid hardening
Portland Cement is used.

6.19 All joints between formwork boards and/or panels shall be flush and tight.
Internal ties shall be used as few as possible and shall, when
unavoidable, be in steel, located at such positions which will not disturb
the reinforcement or prestressing steel. The use of spacer blocks for the
reinforcement shall be prohibited whenever the same effect can be
achieved by properly dimensioned spacer rings mounted directly on the
reinforcement. All spacer blocks and rings shall be of the same strength
as the concrete in which they are embedded and shall be adequately
cured before use.

6.20 The form oil or release agent shall not react with concrete to affect the
strength nor shall it give any colour. It shall be applied in such a manner
as not to contaminate the reinforcement and other fixtures to be
embedded in concrete.

6.21 Prior to placing concrete, all forms shall be inspected and all debris and
extraneous matter removed.
 2100-5

7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No payment will be made for the works involved within the scope of this section
of the specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities
or herein.

The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate
of relevant items of the Bills of Quantities.
 2200-1

SECTION - 2200

REINFORCEMENT

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing, cutting,

fabricating, bending and placing steel reinforcement in concrete structures or
elsewhere as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The scope
of this section of specification is covered with detailed specifications as laid down
herein.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British and ASTM Standards are
relevant to these specifications wherever applicable.

British Standard

B.S 4449 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.

B.S 4466 Specifications for bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for
the reinforcement of concrete.

ACI Standard

ACI 315 Details and detailing of concrete reinforcement.

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and

commentary.

ASTM Standard

A 82 Cold – Drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.

A 305 Minimum requirement for the deformations of deformed steel bars

for concrete reinforcement.

A 615 Deformed Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

In addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistan Standards, British
standards, American Concrete Institute Standards, American Society for Testing
and Materials Standards and other standard as may be specified by the Engineer
for Special Material and construction are also relevant.

3. MATERIAL

3.1 Unless otherwise specified, all steel bars for reinforcement of concrete
shall be conforming to BS 4449, cold worked billet steel bars with
specified characteristic strength of not less than 460Mpa.
 2200-2

3.2 Reinforcement shall be free from all loose or flaky rust and mill scale, or
coating, including ice, and any other substance that would reduce or
destroy the bond.

4. COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS

The Contractor shall submit certificates of compliance from the manufacturer

stating that the supplied reinforcement conforms to the specifications. In addition,
wherever and as directed by the Engineer, conformance of the supplied
reinforcing bars with the specifications shall be demonstrated by the Contractor
through laboratory tests, in accordance with the relevant standards.

5. DELIVERY & STORAGE

5.1 Delivery

Steel reinforcement bars shall be kept in bundles firmly secured and

tagged. Each bar or bundle of bars shall be identified by marks as per
relevant BS standards.

5.2 Storage

The method of storage shall be approved by the Engineer. Reinforcing

bars shall be stored in racks or platforms above the surface of ground and
shall be protected against scaling, rusting, oiling, coatings, damage,
contamination and structural defects prior to placement in works. Bars of
different diameters and grades shall be so labelled and kept separately.

6. BAR BENDING SCHEDULES

The Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules of all the reinforcing steel
bars and these bar bending schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the bar bending schedules
before starting actual bar bending works.

The Engineer's approval, however, will not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility in this regard.

7. FABRICATING, BENDING & PLACING

7.1 Reinforcement is to be accurately placed as shown in the drawings, and

secured against displacement by using 16 gauge G.I wire ties or suitable
slips at intersections and supported from the formwork by using concrete,
metal or plastic chairs and spacers or hangers of an approved pattern.
Where concrete blocks are used for ensuring the cover, they shall be
made of mortar not leaner than 1 part of cement to 2 parts of sand.

Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in the

finished structure, the portions of all accessories in contact with the form
work shall be galvanized or shall be made of plastic.

7.2 Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance

with the dimensions shown in the bar bending schedule approved by the
Engineer.
 2200-3

7.3 The cutting tolerance for all bars shall be + 25 mm

7.4 Fabrication tolerances shall be as per ACI-315

7.5 Placing tolerances shall be as per ACI-318 & 317.

7.6 Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other

reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more
than one bar diameter or enough to exceed the above tolerances, the
resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval of Engineer.

7.7 Vertical bars in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter at
lapped splices. To ensure proper placement, templates shall be
furnished for all columns dowels.

7.8 Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will

injure the material.

No bars shall be bent twice in the same place, nor shall they be
straightened after bending.

Unless permitted by Engineer, reinforcement shall not be bent after being

partially embedded in hardened concrete.

7.9 No splice of reinforcement shall be made, except as shown on the

working drawings.

7.10 Welding of reinforcement shall not be done unless permitted and

approved by the Engineer.

7.11 Exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions is to

be effectively protected from corrosion. Protection is also to be provided
to reinforcement partly built into concrete where the exposed part is to
be built into later concrete.

7.12 No concreting is to be carried out until the reinforcement has been

checked and approved by the Engineer.

7.13 All detailing shall be done as per ACI-315, ACI-318 and ACI-350R, as
and where required.

7.14 Standard or actual weight whichever is lesser shall be used for calculation
of weight.

8. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT

8.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents,

no measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned
specified works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The
cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit
rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.
 2200-4

8.1.1 Providing and installing chairs, supports, hooks, hangars,

spacers, binding wires, corrosion protection and laps not shown
on Drawings including wastage and rolling margin.

8.1.2 Testing of mild and deformed steel bars.

8.2 Reinforcing Bars

8.2.1 Measurement

Measurement for acceptably completed works of reinforcement

bars shall be made by weight according to bar bending schedules
approved by the Engineer.

8.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

reinforcement on the basis of unit rate per metric ton quoted in the
Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the item.
 2300-1

SECTION 2300

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the specification consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in
connection with the supply and installation of plain and reinforced concrete
work complete, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the
applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

2. GENERAL

2.1 Full co-operation shall be given to trades like electrical, mechanical and
other services.

2.2 Suitable templates shall be provided for setting out items not placed in the
forms. Embedded items and other materials for other operations shall be
completed, inspected, tested and approved before concrete is placed.

2.3 For special concrete finish and for special methods of construction,
formwork shop drawings shall be designed and prepared by the
Contractors, at his own cost. Approval of shop drawings as well as that of
actual samples of concrete finish shall be obtained before work is
commenced.

3. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British, ACI and ASTM Standards are
relevant to these specifications wherever applicable.

3.1 Pakistan Standards

PS 232 Portland Cement (ordinary & rapid hardening)

PS 243 Natural aggregates for concrete

PS 279 Abrasion of coarse aggregates by the use of Los Angeles

machine.

PS 280 Determination of aggregates crushing value.

PS 281 Organic impurities in sand for concrete aggregates

PS 282 Material finer than No. 200 B.S. test sieve in aggregates.

PS 283 Soundness test for aggregates by the use of sodium

sulphate or magnesium sulphate.

PS 284 Sampling aggregates for concrete.

 2300-2

PS 285 Sieve or screen analysis of fine and coarse aggregates.

PS 286 Description and classification of mineral aggregates.

PS 421 Sampling fresh concrete.

PS 422 Slump test for concrete.

PS 560 Making and curing concrete compression test specimen in

the field.

PS 612 Sulphate-resistant portland cement type `A' and sampling

fresh concrete in the laboratory.

PS 716 Mixing and sampling fresh concrete in the laboratory.

PS 717 Compacting factor test for concrete.

PS 746 Definitions and terminology of cements.

PS 849 Making and curing concrete compression test cubes.

3.2 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

C 33 Concrete Aggregates.

C 40 Organic impurities in sand for concrete.

C 78 Flexural strength of concrete.

C 87 Effect of organic impurities in fine aggregates on strength

of mortar.

C 88 Soundness of aggregates.

C 94 Ready mixed Concrete.

C 117 Material finer than No.200 (0.075mm) sieve.

C 123 Light weight pieces in aggregates.

C 125 Concrete and concrete aggregates.

C 127 Specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate.

C 128 Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate.

C 131 Resistance to abrasion of small size coarse aggregate.

C 136 Sieve or screen analysis of fine and coarse aggregate.

C 142 Clay lumps and friable particles in aggregates.

C 143 Slump of portland Cement Concrete.

 2300-3

C 150 Portland Cement.

C 156 Water retention by concrete curing material.

C 171 Sheet material for curing concrete.

C 172 Fresh concrete sampling.

C 260 Air entraining admixture for concrete.

C 289 Potential reactivity of aggregate.

C 309 Liquid membrane forming compounds for curing concrete.

C 332 Light weight aggregates for insulating concrete.

C 494 Chemical admixtures for concrete.

C 535 Resistance to abrasion of large size coarse aggregates.

C 685 Concrete made by volumetric batching and continuous

mixing.

D 75 Aggregate sampling.

D 1190 Concrete joint sealer (hot poured elastic type).

D 1751 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete paving and

structural concrete.

D 1752 Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers

for concrete paving and structural concrete.

D 1850 Concrete joint sealer (cold application type).

E 11 Wire cloth sleeves for testing purposes.

E 96 Water vapour transmission of materials in sheet form.

E 154 Materials for use as vapour barrier under concrete slabs.

E 337 Relative humidity by wet and dry bulk psychro- meter.

C 400 Requirements for water for use in mixing and curing

concrete.

3.3 British Standards

B.S 12 Portland cement, ordinary and rapid hardening.

B.S 410 Test Sieves

B.S 812 Methods for the sampling and testing of mineral

aggregates, sand fillers
 2300-4

B.S 882 Concrete aggregates from natural sources

1201

B.S 1881 Methods of testing concrete.

B.S 3148 Tests for water for making concrete.

B.S 4027 Sulphate-resisting portland cement.

C.P 8110 Structural use of concrete.

3.4 ACI (American Concrete Institute)

117 Standard Specifications for tolerances for concrete construction

and materials.

201.2 Guide to durable concrete.

211 Recommended practice for selecting proportions for normal and

heavy weight concrete.

214 Recommended practice for evaluation of strength test results of

concrete.

301 Specifications for structural concrete for building.

304 Recommended practice for measuring, mixing, transporting and

placing concrete.

305 Hot weather concreting.

308 Standard practice for curing concrete.

309 Recommended practice for consolidation of concrete.

318 Building code requirement for reinforced concrete.

347R Guide to Formwork for concrete.

351.1R Grouting for support of equipment & machinery.

UBC Uniform Building Code (88/97).

In addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistan Standards,

British standards, American Concrete Institute Standards, American
Institute of Steel Construction Standards, American Society for Testing
and Materials Standards and other Standards as may be specified by the
Engineer for Special Materials and Construction are also relevant.
 2300-5

4. MATERIALS

4.1 Aggregates

4.1.1 The sources of supply of all fine and coarse aggregates shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

4.1.2 All fine and coarse aggregates shall be clean and free from clay,
loam, silt and other deleterious matter. If required, the Engineer
reserves the right to have them washed by the Contractor at no
additional expense. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be
delivered and stored separately at site. Aggregates shall not be
stored on muddy ground or where they are likely to become dirty
or contaminated.

4.1.3 Sulphate content of aggregates shall not exceed 0.40 percent by

weight for each individual source of coarse and fine aggregate.
Chloride content of aggregates shall not exceed 0.05 percent by
weight for each source of coarse and fine aggregate. Total
sulphate (SO 3 ) content of concrete shall not exceed 4.0 percent
by weight of the cement. Total chloride content of concrete shall
not exceed 0.15 percent by weight of the cement.

4.1.4 Fine aggregate shall be hard coarse sand, crushed stone or

gravel screenings and shall conform to requirements of PS 243
and/or BS 882 and/or ASTM C 33.

4.1.5 Coarse aggregate shall be gravel or crush stone of hard, durable

material free from laminated structure and conforming to PS 243
and/or BS 882 and/or ASTM C 33 size number 467 as follows for
use in foundations:

Total Passing Sieve Percent by weight

50.80 mm (2 in.) : 100

38.10 mm (1.5 in.) : 95-100
19.00 mm (0.75 in.) : 35-70
9.51 mm (0.38 in.) : 10-30
4.76 mm (0.19 in.) : 0-5

Coarse aggregate for all cast-in-place concrete other than

foundations shall conform to ASTM C 33 size number 6, as
follows:

Total Passing Sieve Percent by weight

25.00 mm (1. 0.in.) : 100

19.00 mm (0.75 in.) : 90-100
12.50 mm (0. 5 in.) : 20-55
9.50 mm (0.38 in.) : 0-15
4.75 mm (0.19 in) : 0
 2300-6

4.1.6 Unless otherwise specified the nominal maximum size of

aggregate for cast-in-place reinforced concrete slabs and other
members, shall be 19mm, if feasible. If there are difficulties in
placing such a concrete the maximum size may be restricted to 12
mm provided the requirements for strength are satisfied.

4.1.7 Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer

that a supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can
be maintained over the period of the work, the grading of the
aggregates shall be controlled by obtaining the 19mm maximum
nominal size, the different sizes being stocked in separate stock
piles and recombined in the correct proportion for each batch at
the batching plant / concrete mixer. The materials shall be stock-
piled for a period before use so as to drain nearly to constant
moisture content (as long as site and other conditions permit,
preferably for at least a day). The grading of the coarse and fine
aggregates shall be tested at least once for every 100 tons
supplied, to ensure that the grading is uniform and same as that
of the samples used in the preliminary tests.

4.2 Cement

4.2.1 Cement shall be fresh and of approved origin and manufacture. It

shall be one of the following as may be specified by the Engineer.

- Ordinary or Rapid Hardening Portland cement complying

with the requirements of PS 232 or BS 12 or ASTM C-150.
(Type -I).

- Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement complying with the

requirements of PS 612 or BS 4027 ASTM C-150.
(Type - V).

4.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, ordinary Portland Cement complying

with the requirements of BS 12 or ASTM C-150 Type-1 shall be
used.

4.2.3 For fair faced concrete if required, an approved cement with a

view to obtain a light shade concrete as approved by the Engineer
shall be used.

4.2.4 The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer at fortnightly

intervals, reports of tests for conformance with the relevant
specified standard in respect of the samples of cement from the
work-site. These tests shall be carried out in a laboratory
approved by the Engineer.

4.2.5 Only one brand of each type of cement shall be used for
concrete in any individual member of the structure. Cement shall
be used in the sequence of receipt of shipment, unless otherwise
directed.
 2300-7

4.2.6 There shall be sufficient cement at site to ensure that each

section of work is completed without interruption.

4.2.7 Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from leaky containers

shall not be used.

4.2.8 The Contractor shall provide and erect (at his cost) in a suitable
plain, dry, well ventilated, weather-proof and water proof shed of
sufficient capacity to store the cement.

4.2.9 The cement shall be used as soon as possible after delivery and
cement which the Engineer consider has become stale or
unsuitable through absorption of moisture from the atmosphere or
otherwise shall be rejected and removed immediately from the site
at the Contractor's expense. Any cement in containers damaged
so as to allow the contents to spill or permitting access of the
atmosphere prior to opening of the container at the time of
concrete mixing shall be rejected and removed immediately from
the site at the Contractor's expense.

4.2.10 Mixing together of different types of cement shall not be permitted.

4.3 Water

Only clean water from the city supply, tube well installed at the site or
from other sources approved by the Engineer shall be used. The
Contractor shall supply sufficient water for all purposes, including mixing
the concrete, curing and cleaning plant and tools. Where doubt exists as
to the suitability of the water, it shall be tested in accordance with B.S.
3148 or CE CRD C 400. Where water can be shown to contain any sugar
or an excess of acid, alkali or salt, the Engineer may refuse to permit its
use.

In case of doubt, the Engineer may require that concrete mixed with
water proposed to be used should be tested to have a compressive
strength not lower than 90 percent of the strength of concrete mixed with
distilled water.

4.4 Additives

If required, all additives shall be from a manufacturer approved by the

Engineer.

Air Entraining Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 260. Other

Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494.

4.5 Bitumen

All material for bitumen shall consist of plastic bitumen grade 10/20.

Expansion/isolation joints shall be filled in with hot bitumen, of approved

grade, as shown on the drawing.
 2300-8

4.6 Vapour Barrier

Polyethylene sheeting conforming with ASTM E 154 and 0.2mm thick as

a minimum. Other similar material having a vapour permeance rating not
exceeding 0.5per meter as determined by ASTM E 96, will be considered
unless noted otherwise.

4.7 Joint Fillers

ASTM D 1751, performed, resilient bituminous type or ASTM D 1752,

preformed sponge rubber.

4.8 Joint Sealants

ASTM D 1190, ASTM D 3569,ASTM D 3406, hot-pour type.

4.9 Waterstops

Provide flat, dumbbell type or center bulb type water stops at construction
joints where shown. Web thickness not less than 5mm for units up to
125mm wide, and not less than 10mm for widths over 125mm. Provide
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) waterstops of approved manufacturer.

4.10 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be provided wherever indicated on the Drawings or

as directed by the Engineer. In no case shall the reinforcement, corner
protection angles, or other embedded items be permitted to extend
continuously through any expansion joint.

All expansion joints shall carefully be placed so as not to be displaced

during concreting. The method of placing the expansion joints shall be
strictly in accordance with the Drawings and/or as directed by the
Engineer. All materials for use in the expansion joints shall have prior
approval of the Engineer before placing order for supply.

4.11 Non Shrink Grout

Grout for filling under base plate or otherwise shall be of non-shrink type
FEB Grout GP, manufactured by FEB Ltd, or approved equivalent
conforming to the requirement of ASTM C827, ASTM C878.

5. NOMINAL CONCRETE MIXES

5.1 Proportions of Mix

5.1.1 Cement and aggregates:

The cement, fine aggregate and the coarse aggregate shall be

weighed separately. The proportions of cement to fine aggregate
and coarse aggregate shall be adjusted so as to provide the
concrete of the required crushing strength when tested as set out
in Table 1.
 2300-9

5.1.2 The Contractor shall regulate and arrange mixing of the

ingredients for the designed mix of the concrete by weight-
batching. The cost of designing the mix shall be borne by the
Contractor.

5.1.3 Water/Cement ratio:

The water/cement ratio for all structural concrete shall not exceed
0.45 for watertight structures and 0.5 for all other structures.

5.1.4 Workability

Admixtures may be used where necessary to achieve required

workability, with the Engineer's approval. 'Workability' shall be
determined by the slump or compaction factor tests as directed by
the Engineer and these shall be perform in accordance with the
methods given in PS 422 and PS 177 or ASTM C 143. The
slump or compaction factor for each grade of concrete shall be
determined during the preliminary Test mixes and the value
obtained shall not be modified without the written consent of the
Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted or specified, the concrete
shall be proportioned and produced to have a slump of 75 mm
or less if consolidation is to be by vibration, and 100 mm or
less if consolidation is to be by methods other than vibration. A
tolerance of upto 25 mm above the indicated maximum shall be
allowed for individual batches provided the average for all
batches or the most recent 10 batches tested, which ever is
fewer, does not exceed the maximum limit. Concrete of lower
than usual slump may be used provided it is properly placed and
consolidated, as per satisfaction of Engineer.

5.2 Strength requirements for concrete

5.2.1 Portland cement concrete when aggregates comply with B.S.

882.

5.2.2 Concrete made with Portland cement shall comply with the
strength requirements of Table 1:

Table 1 : Strength requirements for Portland cement concrete with

aggregates complying with B.S. 882.
____________________________________________________
Class Minimum Cube Crushing
Strength at 28 days (MPa)
____________________________________________________
A 31.0
B 26.0
C 21.0
D 10.5
E 7.0
____________________________________________________
 2300-10

5.2.3 The strengths given in Table 1 are based on the assumption that
average temperature is 20 degree C. Where accurate records of
temperature are kept, allowance may be made for change of
temperature or the cubes may be tested at the equivalent
maturity.

5.2.4 Minimum cement content for structural concrete shall not be less
than 356 kg/Cu.m of concrete for watertight structures and 310
kg/Cu.m of concrete for all other structures. Except concrete class
‘D’ and class ‘E’.

5.2.5 The Contractor shall submit mix design by weight for each grade
of concrete. Manufacture 12 Nos. test cubes 150mm x 150mm x
150mm in accordance with the Mix design batching by weight and
test 3 cubes each at 3,7, 14 & 28 days intervals in the presence
of Engineer, and submit all relevant data and results of tests for
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain approval
from the Engineer in writing for each Mix design before producing
the actual concrete for the Works.

No payments shall be made for producing the Mix design,

manufacture of test cubes and testing. The Contractor shall
include this cost in the relevant item of concrete.

5.3 Batching

5.3.1 All cement, including cement supplied in bulk, shall be batched by

weight. A bag of cement may be taken as 50 kg.

5.3.2 Aggregates shall be batched by weight, due allowance being

made for water content. Aggregates may be batched by volume
only with the prior permission of the Engineer. The apparatus for
weight-batching may be an integral part of the mixer or a separate
unit of a type approved by the Engineer. It shall be accurate
within 2% and shall be checked for accuracy at least once a week.

5.3.3 The quantity of additives shall be as prescribed by the

manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer.

5.3.4 Where the batching plant is of the type in which cement and
aggregates are weighed in the same compartment, the cement
shall be introduced into the compartment between two sizes of
aggregates.

5.3.5 Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will
enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. Water shall
continue to flow for a period which may extend to the end of the
first 25 percent of the specified mixing time. Controls shall be
provided to prevent batched ingredients from entering the
mixer before the previous batch has been completely discharged.
 2300-11

5.4 Mixing

5.4.1 The concrete shall be mixed in an approved batch mixer. It shall

be fitted with the manufacturer's plate stating the rates, capacity
and the recommended number of revolutions per minute and
shall be operated in accordance therewith. It shall be equipped
with a suitable charging mechanism and an accurate water
measuring device.

5.4.2 Mixing shall continue for the period recommended by the mixer
manufacturer or until there is apparently a uniform distribution of
the materials and the mass is uniform in colour, whichever period
is longer. However, minimum mixing time shall not be less than
1
1 / 2 minutes.

If it is desired to use a mixing period of less than 1-1/2 minutes,

the Engineer's approval shall be obtained in writing.

5.4.3 Controls shall be provided to ensure that the batch cannot be

discharged until the required mixing time has elapsed. At least
three quarters of the required mixing time shall take place after the
last of the mixing water has been added.

5.4.4 The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will
interfere with mixing action. Mixing blades shall be replaced
when they have lost 10 percent of their original height.

5.4.5 Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use.

Concrete which has set shall not be retempered, but shall be
discarded.

5.5 Transporting

5.5.1 The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the
place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by means which will
prevent segregation or loss of or addition to ingredients. It shall
be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position so as to
avoid rehandling or flowing. All skips vehicles, or containers used
for transporting the concrete shall be thoroughly clean.

5.5.2 During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep

containers, on account of their ratios of surface area to mass,
which reduces the rate of loss of water by evaporation during hot
weather and loss of heat during cold weather.

5.6 Placing

5.6.1 Before placing of concrete, formwork shall have been completed;

water shall have been removed; reinforcement shall have been
secured in place; expansion joint material, anchors and other
embedded items shall have been kept in position; and the
entire preparation shall have been approved.
 2300-12

No concrete shall be placed into the foundation pits and trenches

until the ground to receive the same has been examined and
approved by the Engineer for this purpose.

5.6.2 Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layer of such

thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which
has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or
planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be
placed continuously, construction joints shall be located as shown
in the Contract Documents or as approved by the Engineer.
Placing shall be carried out at such a rate that the concrete
which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still
plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened shall not be
deposited. Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removed when
the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their
services unnecessary. They may remain embedded in the
concrete only if made of metal or concrete and if prior
approval has been obtained.

5.6.3 The actual sequence of construction proposed by the

Contractor shall be subject to the Engineer's approval before
construction starts on any part of the structure, and this
sequence shall not be varied without the Engineer's approval.

5.6.4 The concrete shall be placed as soon after it has been mixed as
is practicable. Once the concrete has left the mixer, no more
water shall be added, although the concrete may be mixed or
agitated to help maintain workability. The concrete shall not be
used if, through any cause, the workability of the mix at the time
of placing is too low for it to be compacted fully and to an
acceptable finish by whatever means available.

The time between mixing and placing should be reduced if the

mix is richer or the initial workability of the mix is lower than
normal, if a rapid hardening cement or an accelerator is used, or if
the work is carried out at a high temperature or exposed to a
drying atmosphere.

The Contractor shall ensure that the delay between mixing and
placing does not exceed 45 minutes under any circumstances.
Any concrete which does not satisfy this requirement shall be
discarded.

5.6.5 The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final

position to avoid re-handling. In no circumstances may concrete
be railed or made to flow along the forms by the use of vibrators.
Concreting shall be carried on as a continous operation using
methods which shall prevent segregation or loss of ingredients.

5.6.6 The free fall of concrete shall not be allowed to exceed two metre
and where it is necessary for the concrete to be placed more than
this depth, it shall not be dropped into its final position, but shall
 2300-13

be placed through pipes fed by a hopper. When a pipe is used for

placing concrete the lower end shall be kept inside, or close to
the freshly deposited concrete. The diameter of the pipe shall be
not less than 225 mm.

5.6.7 The workmen carrying concrete to the site, and all other
workmen, shall move only along runways or planks placed for the
purpose and no person shall be allowed to walk on the
reinforcement.

5.7 Consolidation

5.7.1 All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading,

rodding or forking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked
around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into
corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may
cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Vibrators
shall be operated by competent workmen. Use of vibrators to
transport within forms shall not be allowed.

Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at points approximately

450 mm apart. At each insertion, the duration shall be sufficient to
consolidate the concrete but not excessive so as to cause
segregation, generally from 5 to 15 sec. A spare Vibrator shall
be kept on the job site during all concrete placing operations.
Where the concrete is to have an as-cast finish, a full surface of
mortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration process,
supplemented, if necessary, by spading to work the coarse
aggregate back from the formed surface.

5.7.2 If there is any tendency for the mix to segregate during

consolidation, particularly if this produces excessive laitance, the
mix proportions shall be modified to effect an improvement in the
quality of the concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
in conformity with the provisions of Clause 5.

5.7.3 Vibrator shall not be allowed to contact the form work for exposed
concrete surfaces.

5.7.4 Mechanical vibrators shall be of a type approved by the Engineer

to suit particular conditions.

5.7.5 Over-vibration or vibration of very wet mixes shall be avoided.

5.8 Curing and Protection

5.8.1 Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be

protected from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures and mechanical injury, and shall be maintained with
minimum moisture loss at a relative constant temperature for the
period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of
the concrete. The materials and methods of curing shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer.
 2300-14

5.8.2 For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the
following procedures shall be applied immediately after
completion of placement and finishing, as approved by the
Engineer.

- Ponding or continuous sprinkling.

- Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously

wet.

- Application of waterproof sheet materials approved by the

Engineer.

- Application of other moisture-retaining covering as

approved.

5.8.3 Moisture loss from surface placed against wooden forms or

metal forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by
keeping the forms wet until they can be safely removed. After
form removal, the concrete shall be cured until the end of the
time prescribed as follows by one of the methods specified above.

5.8.4 Curing in accordance with sub-clauses above shall be continued

for at least 10 days in the case of all concrete except concrete
with rapid-hardening Portland Cement for which the period shall
be at least 3 days. Alternatively, if tests are made of cubes kept
adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods and to
the same intensity, moisture retention measures may be
terminated when the average compressive strength has reached
70 percent of the minimum specified works cube strength. If one
of the first four curing procedures specified above is used initially,
it may be replaced by one of the other specified procedures any
time after the concrete is one day old provided the concrete is not
permitted to become surface dry during the transition.

5.8.5 When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 5oC (41OF)
then temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 10
and 20 degrees C (50OF-68OF) for the required curing period
specified above.

When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering insulation

or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of
placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required
temperature with measures to avoid concentration of heat.
Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours
unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the
concrete to exhaust gasses which contain carbon dioxide.

5.8.6 When necessary, provision for wind-breaks, shading, spraying,

sprinkling, ponding or wet covering with a light coloured material
shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective
 2300-15

measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and

finishing operation will allow.

5.8.7 Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the

concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall
be kept as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 3oC (37OF)
in any one hour or 10oC (50OF) in any 24 hour period.

5.8.8 During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from
damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy
shock and excessive vibrations. All finished concrete surfaces
shall be protected from damage by construction equipment,
materials or methods by application of curing procedures, and by
rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be
loaded in such a way as to overstress the concrete.

5.9 Works in Extreme Weather

5.9.1 Unless adequate protection is provided and approval is

obtained, concrete shall not be placed during rain.

Rain water shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor
to damage the surface finish.

5.9.2 When the temperature of the surrounding air is expected to be

below 5OC during placing or within 24 hours thereafter, the
temperature of the plastic concrete, as placed, shall be no lower
than 13OC for sections less than 300 mm in any dimensions nor
10OC for any other sections.

When necessary, concrete material should be heated before

mixing and carefully protected after placing. In general, heating of
mixing water alone to about 60OC may be sufficient for this
purpose. Dependence should not be placed on slat or other
chemicals. Calcium chloride upto 1-1/2 percent of the weight of
cement may be used to accelerate the rate of hardening only with
prior written permission of the Engineer. Use of calcium chloride
in excess of 1-1/2 percent is harmful. No frozen material or
concrete damaged by frost shall be removed. It is recommended
that concrete exposed to the action of freezing weather should
have entrained air and the water content of the mix should not
exceed 25 litres per bag of cement.

If water of aggregate is heated above 38OC, the water shall be

combined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added.
Cement shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of water
and aggregate having a temperature greater than 38OC.

5.9.3 During hot weather, the temperature of the concrete as placed

shall not be so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash
set, or cold joints and should not exceed 32OC. For mass
concreting, this temperature should not exceed 21OC. When the
temperature of the concrete exceeds 32OC, precautionary
 2300-16

measures approved by the Engineer shall be put into effect.

When the temperature of the steel is greater than 50OC, steel
forms and reinforcement shall be sprayed with water just prior to
placing the concrete. The ingredients shall be cooled before
mixing, or falked ice or well crushed mixing may be substituted for
all part of the mixing water if, due to high temperature, low slump,
flash set or cold joints are encountered.

Other precautions recommended by ACI Standard 305 shall also

be adopted.

5.10 Construction Joints

5.10.1 Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction

joints, the position and arrangement of which shall be approved by
the Engineer.

5.10.2 Joints not shown on the drawings shall be so made and located as
to least impair the strength of the structures and shall need prior
approval of the Engineer. In general, they shall be located near
the middle of the spans of slabs and beams unless a
secondary beam intersects a main beam at this point, in which
case the joint in the main beam shall be offset a distance equal to
twice the width of the secondary beam. Joints in walls and
columns shall be at the underside of floor slabs or beams, and at
the top of footings or floor slabs. Beams, brackets, column,
capitals, haunches and drop panels shall be placed at the same
time as slabs. Joints shall be placed at the same time as slabs.
Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement.

5.10.3 All reinforcing steel shall be continued across the joints. Key and
inclined dowels shall be provided and and where directed by
Engineer. Longitudinal keys at least 40 mm deep shall be
provided in all joints in walls and between walls and slabs or
footings.

5.10.4 When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has

hardened, such surface shall be roughened in an approved
manner which will expose the aggregate uniformly and will not
leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged
concrete at the surface.

5.10.5 The hardened concrete of construction joints and of joints

between footings and walls or columns, between walls or columns
and beams or floors they support, joints in un-exposed walls and
all others not mentioned herein shall be dampened (but not
saturated) immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete.

5.10.6 The hardened concrete of joints in exposed work, joints in the

middle of beams, and slabs; and joints in work designed to
contain liquids shall be dampened (but not saturated) and then
thoroughly covered with a coat of cement grout similar in
proportions to the mortar in the concrete. The grout shall be
 2300-17

as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and at least 12 mm

thick on horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete shall be placed
before the grout has attained initial set.

5.10.7 Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be
removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle, and
brushed, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles of
aggregate. The surface shall then be coated with neat cement
grout. The first layer of concrete to be placed on this surface shall
not exceed 150 mm in thickness, and shall be well rammed
against old work, particular attention being paid to corners and
closed spots.

5.10.8 Stop ends for movement joints or construction joints shall be

made by splitting them along the lines of reinforcement passing
through them, so that each portion can be positioned and
removed separately without disturbance or shock to the
reinforcement or the concrete. Stop ends made of expanded
metal or similar material may only be left permanently in the
concrete with prior written approval of the Engineer. Where such
stop ends are used, no metal may be left permanently in the
concrete closer to the surface of the concrete than the specified
cover to the reinforcement. Wood strips inserted for architectural
treatment shall be kerfed to permit swelling without pressure on
the concrete.

5.11 Embedded Items

5.11.1 Electric conduits and other pipes which are planned to be

embedded shall not, with their fittings, displace more than four
percent of the area of the cross section of a column on which
stress is calculated or which is required for fire protection.

Sleeves, conduits, or other pipes passing through floors, walls, or

beams shall be of such size or in such location as not to impair
unduly the strength of the construction; such sleeves, conduits,
or pipes may be considered as replacing structurally in
compression the displaced concrete, provided that they are not
exposed rusting or other deterioration, are of uncoated or
galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard steel pipe, have
a nominal inside diameter not over 50mm and are spaced not
less than three diameters or width on centres. Except when
plans of conduits and pipes are approved by the Engineer,
embedded pipes and conduits other than those merely passing
through, shall not be larger in outside diameter than one third
the thickness of the slab, wall, or beams in which they are
embedded nor so located as to impair unduly the strength of the
construction. Sleeve pipes, or conduits of any material not
harmful to concrete and within the limitations of this section
may be embedded in concrete with the approval of the Engineer
provided they are not considered to replace the displaced
concrete.
 2300-18

5.11.2 All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for
adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to concreting.

All Contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be

supported by it shall be given ample notice and opportunity to
introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the concrete is
placed.

5.11.3 All embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported

against displacement. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots
shall be filled temporarily with approved readily removable
material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids.

5.12 Precast Concrete

5.12.1 Scope

This Sub-Section includes fabrication and installation of all precast

concrete units, and related work.

5.12.2 Material

Cement, concrete and reinforcing steel shall conform to the

applicable requirements of the IN SITU CONCRETE WORKS,
except as otherwise specified herein. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the design of concrete mixes and for meeting the
strength requirements.

5.12.3 Formwork

Forms and formed surfaces shall conform to the applicable

portions of the IN SITU CONCRETE WORKS, and to the
following:

a. Forms shall be made and maintained to the grade,

alignment and dimensions shown in the drawings.

b. Beds and forms shall be adequately cleaned before reuse.

5.12.4 Fabrication

a. Precast Units shall be of the sizes and shapes indicated

on the Drawings. The finished units shall be straight and
true with all edges sharp, straight and square and all flat
surfaces in a true plane, such as specified in the Drawing.

b. Tolerances: The casting, bowing warping and dimensional

tolerance for precast units shall be maintained in
accordance with the following:

1. Overall dimension for widths of each unit, plus or

minus 10mm; and length, plus or minus 20mm.
 2300-19

2. Bowing or warping: not to exceed 20mm in any

direction.

3. Insert locations: Plus or minus 10mm in any

direction.

c. Reinforcement shall be provided, where required, in

precast units and shall be of sizes, shapes and spacing as
shown on the Drawings.

d. All anchors Inserts, Lifting Devices (galvanized, if

required) and similar items shall be and placed and
secured in the forms prior to casting and shall be as shown
on the Drawings.

e. Concrete shall be mixed, handled, conveyed, placed and

finished in strict conformance with the applicable
requirements of the IN SITU CONCRETE WORKS.

f. Curing of precast units shall be carried out in strict

conformity with the applicable requirements of the in situ
concrete works.

g. Bearing Pad: The bearing pad if specified on drawing

shall be of a standard approved quality fully enveloped in
3mm thick neoprene all around for protection against
weather. The natural rubber in the pad should have a
shore hardness of 550 C + 50 C and a shear modulus of
155 psi (1.07 MPa) for short-term movement.

5.12.5 Identification and Marking

Each precast member shall be marked to indicate its type, serial

number and date of fabrication. Identification marks shall
correspond to the drawings.

5.12.6 Handling and Storage

a. Precast units shall be handled, transported and stored in a

manner, which will avoid undue strain, cracking, other
damage. Damaged or defective units shall be repaired or
replaced as directed by the Engineer.

b. Units in which the departure form true dimensions is such

that they will not come together satisfactorily with adjacent
units, within the limits of their allotted positions or which
produce an unacceptable irregularity in the finished units of
the work, shall be rejected.

5.12.7 Cleaning

All precast units shall be delivered to the job site in the cleanest
condition possible. During installation, utmost care shall be taken
 2300-20

to prevent staining or marring the precast units. Upon completion

of the erection, the precast work shall be left clean, and free of
stains and all other noticeable defects on exposed surfaces.

5.12.8 Installation

a. All precast work shall be accurately set in its assigned

position, carefully plumbed and aligned and securely
anchored to the structure in accordance with the Drawings.

b. The Contractor shall furnished and install all loose shims,

wedges, leveling grout, plates, etc. for the units to be
secured to the structure as indicated on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall provide all other members as indicated for
the attachment of the precast work to the structure, as
noted on the Drawings.

5.12.9 Testing and Inspection

Testing and Inspection shall be done in strict conformity with the

applicable requirements of the in situ concrete work.

6. TEST OF CONCRETE QUALITY

6.1 Sampling of concrete for testing shall be done as per relevant PS or

ASTM standards and at the Engineer's direction. Making and curing of
test specimens shall be in accordance with PS 560, PS 849. A competent
person shall be employed by the Contractor whose first duty shall be to
supervise all stages in the preparation and placing of the concrete. All test
specimens shall be made and site tests carried out under his direct
supervision.

6.2 Preliminary 5 cube strength tests shall be performed in accordance with

PS 560, PS 849 and BS1881 directed by the Engineer.

6.3 The usual test for concrete with maximum size of aggregate upto 40 mm
is the 150 mm cube tested in compression. Details of making and curing
compression test cubes are given in PS 560, PS 849 and B.S. 1881 and
details of the testing are given in Part 8 of B.S. 1881.

6.4 For all grades / classes of concrete, preliminary cube strength test with
the mixes and materials to be used shall be performed in accordance with
PS 560, PS 849 and B.S. 1881 before the work is begun and
subsequently whenever any change is to be made in the materials or in
their proportions of materials to be used, or as required by the Engineer.
The strengths shall comply with the standard of quality specified in
accordance with Table 1 for preliminary tests. The cost of such testing
shall be borne by the Contractor.

6.5 Test sample shall be taken at the mixer or as directed by the Engineer.
The test specimens shall be cured in accordance with P.S. 560, PS 849
and B.S. 1881.
 2300-21

6.6 Records shall be kept of all test cubes identifying the mix used, the
section of work for which the concrete was used and the date poured.

6.7 The tests shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by the Engineer.
The laboratory shall be an independent organization, or such other
undertakings approved by the Engineer. Original test reports received
from the laboratory shall be submitted to the Engineer.

6.8 The five test cubes are to be tested for compressive strength as specified
in B.S. 1881. These tests shall be carried out at site or in a laboratory
approved by the Engineer. Two cubes shall be tested at the age of seven
days and three at 28 days and the strengths determined are to comply
with the standard of quality specified.

6.9 For all grades of concrete, the appropriate strength requirement shall be
considered to be satisfied if none of the strengths of the cubes is below
the specified cube strength or if the average strength of the three cubes
is not less than the specified cube strength and the difference between
the greatest and the least strength is not more than 10% of the
average.

6.10 When the results of works cube tests show that the strength of any
concrete is below that specified, the Engineer may give instructions for
the whole or part of the work concerned to be removed and replaced at
the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall bear the cost of any
other part of his, or any other contractor's work, which has to be
removed and replaced as a result of the defective concrete. If any mix
proportion is held to have failed by the works cube tests, the Engineer
may order the proportion to be changed in order to provide the specified
strength.

7. FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES

7.1 General

7.1.1 After removal of forms, the surfaces of concrete shall be given

one or more of the finishes specified below in locations
designated by the Contract Documents.

7.1.2 When finishing is required to match a small sample furnished to

the Contractor, the sample finish shall be reproduced on an area
at least 10 square metres in an inconspicuous location
Designated by the Engineer before proceeding with the finish in
the specified location.

7.1.3 Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment,
profile grades, and dimensions are specified in clause 9.
Tolerances for concrete construction, as defined as tolerances are
to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as described
herein. The finish requirements for concrete surfaces shall be as
generally specified in this clause and as indicated on the
Drawings. Finishing of concrete surfaces shall be performed
 2300-22

only by workmen who are skilled in concrete finishes. The

Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed as to when finishing
of concrete will be performed. Unless inspection is waived in
each specific case, finishing of concrete shall be performed
only in the presence of the Engineer. Concrete surfaces will be
tested by the Engineer where necessary to determine whether
surface irregularities are within the limits herein after specified.

Surface irregularities are classified as abrupt or gradual. Offsets

caused by displaced or misplaced form sheathing or lining or
sections, or otherwise defective form lumber will be considered
as abrupt irregularities, and will be tested by direct
measurements. All other irregularities will be considered as
gradual irregularities, and will be tested by use of a template,
consisting of a straight edge or the equivalent thereof for curved
surfaces. The length of the template will be 2 metres for testing
of formed surfaces and 3 metres for testing of unformed surfaces.

7.2 As-cast Finishes

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings the classes of

finish shall apply as follows:

7.2.1 Rough form finish:

No selected form facing materials shall be specified for rough

form finish surfaces. The holes and defects shall be patched.
Fins exceeding 5 mm in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off.
Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the
forms.

7.2.2 Fair face finish:

Fair face finish applies to concrete formed surfaces, the

appearance of which is considered by the Engineer to be of
special importance, such as surfaces of structures prominently
exposed to public view. Location of surfaces of concrete
structures requiring fair face finish are shown in the Drawings.
Surface irregularities, measured as described in sub-clause
7.2.1, 'Rough form finish', all not exceed 5 mm for gradual
irregularities and 2.5 mm for abrupt irregularities, except that
abrupt irregularities will not be permitted at construction joints.
Abrupt irregularities at construction joints and elsewhere in
excess of 2.5 mm and gradual irregularities in excess of 5 mm
shall be reduced by grinding so as to conform to the specified
limits. Abrupt irregularities at construction joints shall be ground
on 1 to 20 ratio of height to length.

Unless otherwise approved, repair of imperfections in formed

concrete shall be completed within 24 hours after removal of
forms. The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard,
uniform texture on the concrete. It may be plywood,
 2300-23

emperated concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, plastic

paper, or other approved material capable of producing the
desired fair face finish. The arrangement of the facing material
shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept
to the practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other
backing capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material with
raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edge, patches, dents, or other
defects which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall
not be used. The holes and defects shall be patched. All fins
shall be completely removed.

7.3 Finishes of Unformed Surfaces:

7.3.1 Monolithic Concrete Floor Finish

Where monolithic concrete floor finish is shown on the Drawings,

placing shall proceed continuously for the full thickness of the
course or RCC slab without change in concrete mix. Mixing
water shall be the minimum required for proper placing, and will
be as specified by the Engineer. After placing, floors, and other
surfaces shall be floated with a wood float to a true surface and to
elevation as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the
Drawings, floor surfaces shall be steel trowel finished.

Trowelling shall be the minimum amount consistent with

maintaining a smooth dense surface, and shall not be done until
the mortar has hardened sufficiently, to prevent excess fine
material from being worked to the surface, and shall produce a
dense uniform surface, free from blemishes and trowel marks.
Gradual surface irregularities shall not exceed 5 mm. The
addition of water, dry cement, or dry cement mortar, to the surface
of the concrete to facilitate finishing will not be permitted.

8. REPAIR OF DEFECTS

8.1 General

8.1.1 Any concrete failing to meet the specified strength or not formed
as shown on drawings, concrete out of alignment, concrete with
surfaces beyond required tolerances or with defective surfaces
which cannot be properly repaired or patched in the opinion of
the Engineer shall be removed at Contractor's cost.

The Engineer may reject any defective concrete and order it to

be cut out in part or in whole and replace at the Contractor's
expense.

8.1.2 All ties and bolt holes and all repairable defective areas shall be
patched immediately after form removal.
 2300-24

8.2 Repair of Defective Areas

8.2.1 All defective and honeycombed concrete shall be removed down

to sound concrete. The area to be patched and an area at least
150 mm wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent
absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout
shall be prepared using a mix of approximately 1 part cement to
1 part fine sand passing No.25 BS Sieve and shall then be well
brushed into the surface.

8.2.2 The patching mixture shall be made of the same material and of
approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete,
except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the
mortar shall consist of not less than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts
sand by weight. White Portland cement shall be substituted for a
part of the grey Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to
produce a colour matching the color of the surrounding concrete,
as determined by a trial patch.

8.2.3 The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for
handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in
advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a
trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the
stiffest consistency that will permit placing.

8.2.4 After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched,
the bond coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the
bond coat begins to loose the water sheen, the premixed
patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly
consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch
slightly higher than the surrounding surface to permit initial
shrinkage; it shall be left undisturbed for at least 1 hour before
being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for
atleast 7days. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in
a formed wall which will be exposed.

8.2.5 Where as-cast finishes are specified, the quantity of patched area
shall be strictly limited. The combined total of patched areas in
as-cast surfaces shall not exceed 0.2 square metre in each 100
square metres of as-cast surface. This is in addition to form tie
patches, if the project design permits ties to fall within as-cast
areas.

8.2.6 Any patches in as-cast architectural concrete shall be

indistinguishable from surrounding surfaces. The mix formula for
patching mortar shall be determined by trail to obtain a good
colour match with the concrete when both patch and concrete are
cured and dry. After initial set, surfaces of patches shall be
dressed manually to obtain the same texture as surrounding
surfaces.
 2300-25

8.2.7 Patches in architectural concrete surfaces shall be cured for

atleast 7 days. Patches shall be protected from premature drying
to the same extent as the body of the concrete.

8.3 Tie and Bolt Holes

After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, the tie and bolt holes
shall be filled solid with patching mortar. If architectural appearance
requires, these holes may be filled partially creating the desired round
clear holes pattern on surfaces exposed to view.

8.4 Proprietary Materials

If permitted or required by the Engineer, proprietary compounds for

adhesion or as patching ingredients may be used in lieu of or in addition
to the foregoing patching procedures. Such compounds shall be used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with prior approval
of the Engineer.

9. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

All tolerances shall be as per ACI 317.

Where tolerances are not stated in the specifications or drawings for any
individual structure or feature thereof, maximum permissible deviations from
established lines, grades and dimensions shall conform to the following. The
Contractor is expected to set and maintain concrete forms so as to ensure
complete work within tolerance limits. These allowable tolerances shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct fitting of indicated
materials and components. These tolerances are not cumulative.

9.1 Variation from the plumb (or the specified batter for inclined walls).
(allowable variation)

9.1.1 In the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and in arises.

In any 3 metres of length or height 6 mm

In any storey or 6 metres maximum 10 mm

Maximum for the entire length or height. 25 mm

9.1.2 For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves and other
conspicuous lines.

In any bay or 6 metres maximum 6 mm

Maximum for the entire length or height 13 mm

9.2 Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings.

9.2.1 In floors, ceilings, beams soffits and in arises measured before

removal of supporting shores.
 2300-26

In any 3 metres of length 6 mm

In any bay or in any 6 metres maximum 10 mm

Maximum for the entire length 19 mm

9.2.2 For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other
conspicuous lines.

In any bay or 6 metres maximum + 6 mm

Maximum for the entire length + 13 mm

9.3 Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and
related position of columns, walls and partitions.

In any bay or 6 metres + 13 mm

Maximum for the entire length + 25 mm

9.4 Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings, and wall
openings. + 6 mm

9.5 Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the

thickness of slabs and walls.

Upto 12" (300mm) - 6 mm

+10 mm

More than 12" (300mm) - 10 mm

+13 mm

9.6 Footings

9.6.1 Variation in dimensions in plan

Minus 13mm

Plus (plus variation applied to concrete only,

not to reinforcing bars or dowels
formed) 50mm

9.6.2 Misplacement or eccentricity

2 percent of the footing width in the

direction of misplacement but not more
than (applies to concrete only, not to
reinforcing bars or dowels). + 50mm

9.6.3 Reduction in thickness

Minus 5 percent of specified thickness

 2300-27

10. ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE

10.1 General

10.1.1 Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirements

will be accepted subject to the other terms of the Contract
Documents.

10.1.2 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more of the
requirements and which has been repaired to bring it into
compliance will be accepted subject to the other terms of the
Contract Documents.

10.1.3 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more of the
requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may
be accepted or rejected as provided in these Specifications or in
the Contract Documents. In this event, modifications may be
required to assure that remaining work complies with the
requirements.

10.2 Dimensional Tolerances

10.2.1 Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than

permitted by the tolerances of clause 9 shall be considered
potentially deficient in strength and subject to the provisions of sub
clause 10.4.

10.2.2 Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than

permitted by the tolerances of clause 9 may be rejected and the
excess material shall be subject to removal. If removal of the
excess material is permitted, it shall be accomplished in such a
manner as to maintain the strength of the section and to meet all
other applicable requirements of function and appearance.
Permission is required if excess material is to be removed in
accordance with this clause.

10.2.3 Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected if

the strength, appearance or function of the structure is adversely
affected as decided by the Engineer or if misplaced items
interfere with other construction.

10.2.4 Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding the limits of

Clause 9 or of Clause 6.5 of Section 'Formwork' shall be removed
and replaced, and those that are exposed to view, may be
rejected, or shall be repaired, or removed and replaced, as
directed by the Engineer.

10.3 Appearance

10.3.1 Architectural concrete with surface defects exceeding the

limitations described in relevant Clauses of this section shall be
removed and replaced.
 2300-28

10.3.2 Other concrete exposed to view with defects which adversely

affect the appearance of the specified finish may be repaired only
by approved methods.

10.3.3 Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for reason
of defective appearance.

10.4 Strength of Structure

10.4.1 Strength of the structure in place will be considered potentially

deficient if it fails to comply with any requirements which is
relevant to the strength of the structure, including but not
necessarily limited to the following conditions:

- Concrete strength requirements not considered to be

satisfied in accordance with Clause 6 hereof.

- Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position or

arrangement at variance with the requirements as
specified under section 'Reinforcement' or in the Contract
Documents.

- Concrete which differs from the required dimensions or

location in such a manner as to reduce the strength.

- Curing less than that specified.

- Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of

temperature during early stages of hardening and strength
development.

- Mechanical injury, construction fires, premature removal

of formwork likely to result in deficient strength.

- Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength.

10.4.2 Structural computations and/or additional testing may be required

when the strength of the structure is considered potentially
deficient.

10.4.3 Core tests may be required when the strength of the concrete in
place is considered deficient.

10.4.4 If core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if

structural computations do not confirm the safety of the structure,
load tests may be required and their results evaluated, in
accordance with ACI Standard 318.

10.4.5 Concrete work judged inadequate by structural computations or by

results of a load test shall be reinforced with additional
construction if so directed by the Engineer or shall be replaced,
at the Contractor's expense.
 2300-29

10.4.6 The Contractor shall bear all costs incurred in providing the
additional testing and/or computations required by this section.

11. NON-SHRINK GROUT

Grout for placement under base and bearing plates of steel columns, crane rail,
machinery and equipment, for grouting anchor bars and dowels and for similar
uses shall be as specified in clause 4.10. The grout shall be used in accordance
with the following and as per manufacturer’s recommendation, and as directed by
the Engineer.

Concrete surfaces to receive non-shrink grout shall be roughened, cleaned and

dampened. Form shall be provided to retain the grout until sufficiently hard to
support itself, Grout shall be poured in place and thoroughly rodded or strapped
to prevent air entrapment and formation of voids. After non-shrink grout has
received its initial set, it shall be kept damp for least 24 hours.

12. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

12.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract

Documents, no measurement and payment will be made for the under
mentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills of
Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the
quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bills of Quantities.

12.1.1 Providing, fixing, striking etc. of formwork including fair face

formwork, if required.

12.1.2 Providing and installing all type of joints in structure including

Sealant and Bitumen Impregnated Soft Board.

12.1.3 All sampling, mixing, testing and concrete mix design as specified.

12.1.4 Making and testing of concrete cube specimens

12.1.5 Providing pockets and voids.

12.1.6 Anchor bolts & other embedded parts.

12.1.7 Bitumen seal in plinth protection, ramp and isolation joint as

shown on the drawings.

12.1.8 Providing grooves on concrete surfaces as shown on the drawing.

12.1.9 Curing, repair work, scaffolds, water stops and admixtures.

12.1.10 Installation and placing in position of pre-cast concrete elements.

 2300-30

12.2 Plain and Reinforced Concrete

12.2.1 Measurement

Concrete shall be measured as executed but no deduction shall

be made to the following:

Volume of any steel embedded in the concrete.

Volume occupied by water pipes, conduits etc. not exceeding 25

square centimeters each in cross-sectional area.

Voids not exceeding 0.1 square metre. If any void exceeds 0.1
square metre total void shall be deducted.

Voids, which are not be deducted as specified above, refer only

to openings or vents which are wholly within the boundaries of
measured areas. Openings or vents which are at the boundaries
of measured areas shall always be subject to deductions
irrespective of size.

Concrete work shall be classified and measured separately as

listed under items of Bills of Quantities.

Junction between straight and curved works shall in all cases be

deemed to be included with the work in which they occur.

Measurement of walls shall be taken between attached columns

or pilaster. The thickness of attached columns, or pilaster shall be
taken as the combined thickness or the wall and the columns, or
pilaster. Attached or isolated columns, pilaster, and the like
(except where caused by openings) having a length on plan over
four times the thickness and are caused by opening in wall shall
be classified as walls.

Columns shall be measured from the top of footing beams or floor

surfaces to the underside of beams or slabs as the case may be.

Where the width of beams is less than the width of columns, the
extra width at the junction shall be included in the beams.

The depth of the beams shall be measured from bottom of the

slab to the bottom of the beams except in case of inverted beams
where it shall be measured from top of slab to the top of beam.
The cross-section of the beam shall be the actual cross-section
below or above the slab.

Measurement of acceptably completed works of plain and

reinforced cement concrete will be made on the basis of number
of cubic metre concrete placed and compacted in position within
the neat lines of the structure as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
 2300-31

12.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for the acceptable measured quantity of

plain and reinforced cement concrete on the basis of unit rate per
cubic metre quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute
full compensation for all the works related to the item.

12.3 Non-Shrink Grout

12.3.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of non-shrink grout

will be made on the basis of actual volume of grout provided, filled
and compacted in position to the line and level as shown in
drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

12.3.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of non-

shrink grout on the basis of unit rate per cubic metre quoted in the
Bill of quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the item.

12.4 Precast Cement Concrete Copings/Window Sill

12.4.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of

Precast concrete copings shall be made on the basis of actual
volume of Precast coping in cubic meter provided and placed in
position as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
No separate measurement will be done for concrete, rebar,
embedded items, installation etc.

12.4.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

precast concrete coping on the basis of unit rate per cubic meter
quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.
 2410-1

SECTION - 2410

GRANULAR SUB-BASE COURSE, CRUSH AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

01. SCOPE

The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing of all materials, plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and performing all operations in connection with supply
and construction of Granular Sub-Base Course and Crush Aggregate Base Course
complete in all respects in accordance with the specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades, thickness and cross-sections shown on the drawings and/or as directed by
the Engineer.

02. MATERIALS

2.1 Aggregates

A. Source of Materials

All aggregates for use in the laying of the base course and sub-base course shall be
obtained only from source approved by the Engineer. The actual quarry pits or gravel
deposits shall be in all cases approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall determine the location, suitability and quantity of material available
before tendering as well as the cost and the amount of work required to crush, screen
and the length of haulage to the job site. The Contractor shall also satisfy himself and
make an estimate of the amount of over burden that must be removed from any quarry
site and the cost of handling such overburden. He shall include all costs in his Tender
price.

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer, within thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled
beginning of construction with a complete statement of the origin and composition of all
stone and/or gravel aggregates to be used on the project. All material shall comply with
the specified requirements for the various aggregates.

The location and the manufacture of aggregates which must meet the requirements of
the Specifications is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to manufacture such
aggregates at the rates and in the quantities required to complete the work within the
specified Time Schedule.

The approval of the Contractor's crushing and screening plant & equipment by the
Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility of producing aggregates
which meet the Specifications and in the quantities required for the completion of the
work within the specified Time Schedule.

No aggregate producing equipment shall be put into operation prior to the approval of the
equipment by the Engineer. If after the equipment is put into operation it fails to perform
as proposed, the Contractor shall provide additional approved equipment or replace the
original equipment with more suitable equipment, as may be directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall commence crushing and screening of aggregates for base course,
concrete, or as otherwise may be required, immediately after the occupancy of the
Project Laboratory by the Engineer and/or immediately after the Contractor receives
approval of his aggregate sources.
 2410-2

B. Testing

In order to ascertain the properties of all aggregate materials, the Contractor shall submit
for approval by the Engineer, test certificates from an approved testing laboratory for all
materials intended for incorporation in the work prior to commencement of work.

Representative samples for such testing shall be taken by the Contractor, at his expense,
in the presence of the Engineer, and duplicate samples shall be submitted to the
Engineer for future reference.

The Contractor may, if approved by the Engineer, conduct the necessary tests in the
Project Laboratory. The tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer by the
Contractor's Materials Engineer. The qualifications of the Contractor's Materials Engineer
must be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to any testing operations.

This testing, whether performed at an approved testing laboratory, or in the Project

Laboratory, shall be solely the Contractor's responsibility and will be at the Contractor's
expense.

C. Approval and Inspection

All sources of material shall be approved by the Engineer prior to procuring or processing
material from such sources. Test certificates obtained or performed by the Contractor at
his expense are intended to assist the Contractor in his estimate of the location, extent
and quantities which will comply with the Specifications when properly processed, and
will in no way obviate the need for further testing by the Engineer. Only materials from
approved sources shall be processed for incorporation into the work. Approval of specific
sources of materials shall not be construed as final approval and acceptance of materials
from such sources.

All processed material shall be tested and approved before being stored on the site or
incorporated in the work and may be inspected and tested at any time during the
progress of their preparation and use. Questionable materials, pending laboratory
testing and subsequent approval, shall not be unloaded and incorporated with materials
previously approved and accepted. If however, the grading and quality of the material
delivered to the site do not conform to the grading and quality as previously inspected
and tested, or do not comply with the Specifications, the Engineer reserves the right
to reject such materials at the site of the work. Only materials conforming to the
requirements of the Specifications shall be used in the work.

Samples must meet all test requirements as specified under the Specifications. The
Contractor shall permit the Engineer or his designated representative to inspect any and
all materials used or to be used, at any time during or after its preparation, or while being
used during the process of the work or after the work has been completed. All such
materials not complying with the required Specifications, whether in place or not, shall be
rejected and shall be removed promptly from the work. The Contractor shall supply, or
arrange with any producers or manufacturers to supply all necessary material, labour,
tools and equipment for such inspection.

D. Storage

Materials shall be stored so as to ensure preservation of their specified quality and fitness
for the work. They shall be placed on hard, clean surfaces and, when required by the
Engineer, they shall be placed under cover. Stored materials shall be located so as to
facilitate prompt inspection and control. Private property shall not be used for storage
purposes without written consent of the owner.

The centre of the storage area shall be elevated and sloped to the sides so as to provide
proper drainage of excess moisture. The material shall be stored in such a way as to
prevent segregation and coning to ensure proper control of gradations and moisture.
 2410-3

Coarse aggregate storage piles shall be built-up in layers not exceeding one (1) metre.
The height of a stockpile shall be limited to a maximum of five (5) metres.

The equipment and methods used for stockpiling aggregates and for removing from the
stockpiles must be approved by the Engineer and shall be such that no detrimental
degradation of the aggregate will result and no appreciable amount of foreign material will
be incorporated into the aggregate.

The stockpile site shall be prepared by clearing and smoothing and must be approved by
the Prior to any stock piling of aggregates, cross sections of the stockpile site shall be
taken control points established for use in determining the quantity of subsequently
stockpiled material.

2.2 Granular Sub-Base

All sub-base material shall be free from dirt, organic matter, shale or other deleterious
matter and shall be of such quality that it will bind readily to form a firm, stable sub-base.

Material for sub-base shall consist of well-graded gravel with sand and silt, conforming to
the following requirements:

AASHTO Sieve Percent Passing

2 in. (50.8 mm) 100

#4 35 - 70

# 200 0 - 15

Physical Requirements: All sub-base aggregate shall conform to the following physical
rquirements.

- Liquid Limit (AASHTO T 89) 25 maximum

- Plasticity Index (AASHTO T 90) 6 maximum

- Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T 176) 25 minimum

- Loss by Abrasion (AASHTO T 96) 40 maximum

- California Bearing Ratio (CBR) (at 100% compaction as per ASTM D1557 or AASHTO
T- 180 method ‘D’)) > 30

2.3 Aggregate Base Course

Materials shall conform to the requirements for the "Aggregate Base Course" specified.
All aggregates for base course shall consist of clean, tough, durable, sharp angle
fragments free of any excess of thin or elongated pieces, and reasonably free of soft,
disintegrated or decomposed stone, dirt or other deleterious matter.

Crushed gravel or stone fragments for base courses shall consist of the product obtained
by crushing gravel that, if directed by the Engineer, has first been screened in such a
manner that not less than ninety (90) percent of the material to be crushed is retained on
a one-quarter (1/4) inch sieve. The amount of crushing shall be regulated so that at least
eighty (80) percent by weight, of the pieces retained on the No. 4 sieve have at least one
(1) mechanically fractured face.

- Gradation: Coarse materials for base course shall be crushed rock or crushed
gravel conforming to the following grading requirements:
 2410-4

AASHTO Sieve Percent Passing

2 in. (50.8 mm) 100

1 1/2 in. (38.1 mm) 35 - 70
1 in. (25.4 mm) 0 - 15
1/2 in. (12.7 mm) 0- 5

Fine materials for base course shall be quarry screenings or natural material and of
suitable binding quality as approved by the Engineer. The material shall be free from
foreign or organic matter, dirt, shale, clay and clay lumps, or other deleterious matter and
shall conform to the following requirements:

AASHTO Sieve Percent Passing

3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100

No. 4 85 - 100
No. 100 10 - 30
Plasticity Index (AASHTO 90) 6 maximum
Sand Equivalent (AASHTO 176) 30 minimum

The combined material shall consist of a mixture of all aggregate uniformly graded from
coarse to fine to conform to the following gradation requirements:

AASHTO Sieve Percent Passing

2 in. (50.8 mm) 100

1 1/2 in. (38.1 mm) 60 - 90
1 in. (25.4 mm) 42 - 77
3/4 in. (19.0 mm) 35 - 70
1/2 in. (12.7 mm) 25 - 60
No. 4 15 - 40
No. 10 10 - 26
No. 40 5- 15
No. 200 2- 9

Acceptance: When the stationary plant method is used, the aggregate will be accepted
immediately following mixing, based on periodic samples taken from the pug mill output.

Physical Requirements: All base course aggregates shall conform to the following
physical requirements:

Loss of Sodium Sulfate Soundness

Test (AASHTO 104) 10 percent maximum

Loss of Magnesium Sulfate Soundness

Test (AASHTO 104) 12 percent maximum

Loss by Abrasion Test (AASHTO 96) 40 percent maximum

Thin and Elongated Pieces, by Weight

(larger than 25 mm, thickness less
than 1/5 length) 5 percent

Friable Particles (AASHTO T112) 0.25 percent maximum

When the aggregate is a total aggregate, it may be accepted at the crusher. Acceptance
of the material by the Engineer does not constitute acceptance of the base course, only
that the material is approved for use in the base course.
 2410-5

03. EXECUTION

3.1 Granular Sub-Base Course

A. Method of Construction

a) Preparing Under Lying Course: Before any sub-base material is placed, the underlying
course shall be prepared and conditioned as specified. The course shall be checked and
accepted by the Engineer before placing and spreading operation are started.

b) Spreading: Sub-base aggregates shall be spread on underlying course which has been
approved by the Engineer.

Sub-base aggregate shall be spread on the sub-grade in layers not exceeding 150 mm
compacted depth. Spreading shall be done by means of approved mechanical spreaders,
distributing the material to the required width and loose thickness. Where the required
sub-base thickness is greater than 150 mm, the material shall be placed in layers of
equal thickness, in no case shall a layer be less than 75 mm thick. Under no
circumstances shall sub-base be dumped in a pile on the sub-grade.

The material shall be handled so as to avoid segregation. Segregated materials shall be

remixed until uniform. Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent rutting of the sub-
grade during the spreading of the sub-base material. No hauling or placement of material
will be permitted when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the weather or road conditions
are such that the hauling operations will cause cutting or rutting of the sub-grade or
cause contamination of the sub-base material.

c) Compaction: The moisture content of the sub-base material shall be adjusted prior to
compaction, by watering with approved sprinkler trucks or by drying out, as directed by
the Engineer, to that extent required to obtain the specified density. The sub-base shall
be compacted to one-hundred (100) percent of the maximum dry density as determined
according to AASHTO T 180 Method D, or to ninety (90) percent of the relative density in
accordance with ASTM D 2049, as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. The moisture
content directed by the Engineer shall be the optimum moisture content determined
from the moisture-density test performed in the laboratory on sub-base material, or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer after compaction trials as specified in sub-paragraph
A (d) of this section. The sub-base aggregate shall be compacted by means of approved
compaction equipment progressing gradually from the outside towards the centre with
each succeeding pass uniformly overlapping the previous pass. Rolling shall continue
until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the
specified density.

Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient blading, in a manner approved by the

Engineer, to ensure a smooth surface free from ruts or ridges and having the proper
section and crown.

Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by means

of mechanical tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained.

Each layer of sub-base course must be completely compacted and approved by the
Engineer prior to the delivery of materials for a succeeding layer of sub-base.

d) Compaction Trials: If directed by the Engineer, prior to the commencement of the sub-
base or aggregate base operations, the Contractor shall construct trial lengths, not be
exceed one-hundred (100) metres. The materials used in the trials shall be that approved
for use as sub-base or aggregate base and the equipment used shall be that according to
the Contractor's approved detailed program of work.
 2410-6

The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment, the
loose measurements necessary to result in the specified compacted layer depths, the
field moisture content, and the relationship between the number of compaction passes
and the resulting density of the material.

The Contractor may proceed with sub-base and aggregate base work only after the
methods and procedures established in the compaction trial have been approved by the
Engineer.

e) Finishing: The Contractor shall program his operations to avoid the drying out of the sub-
base during construction. If any layer of sub-base material, or part thereof, is permitted to
dry out after compaction, or does not conform to the required density or finish, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, rework, water or recompact the material, as
directed by the Engineer, to the density specified, before the next layer of sub-base or
base course is super imposed thereon.

Immediately prior to the placing of the first layer of base course on the sub-base the final
layer of sub-base shall be at the specified density and to the-required grade and
section. In order to maintain these requirements-while placing the next course, it
may be necessary to water and reshape the surface of the sub-base, which work shall
be at the Contractor's expense.

f) Testing for Compaction: The frequency of inplace density testing for accepting the
compacted area shall be one density test in every 300 sq. metre.

3.2 Aggregate Base Course

A. Method of Construction

a) Combining Aggregate and Water: Aggregate for base course shall be combined into a
uniform mixture and water added either in a central mixing plant or by watering and
mixing of windrows in a manner approved by the Engineer, before final placement of the
material. When binder is to be added, it may be combined with the aggregate base by
thoroughly mixing separate windrows of binder and aggregate base or it may be
combined in the central mixing plant. Adding binder by spreading it over the aggregate
windrow will not be permitted.

The moisture to the aggregates shall be that required, as designated by the Engineer, to
obtain the specified density thereby preparing an aggregate completely ready for
compaction after spreading on the underlying course In no case will the wetting of
aggregates in stockpiles or trucks be permitted.

b) Spreading: Unless otherwise specified, aggregate for base courses shall be delivered to
the designated areas, as specified on the drawings, as a uniform mixture and shall be
placed on the existing prepared underlying course in a uniform layer or layers not
exceeding one hundred and fifty (150) millimeters in compacted depth, including any
binder that is to be blended on the base. Spreading shall be done by means of approved
self-propelled spreader box distributing the material to the required width and loose
thickness. When the required base thickness is greater than one hundred-and fifty (150)
millimeters the material shall be spread in layers of equal thickness.

The material shall be so handled, as to avoid segregation. If an aggregate spreader

causes segregation in the material, or leaves ridges or other objectionable marks on the
surface which cannot be eliminated easily or prevented by adjustment of the spreader
operation, the use of such spreader shall be discontinued and the spreader replaced. All
segregated material shall be removed and replaced with well graded material. No "skin"
patching shall be permitted.

No hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgment of the

Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such that hauling operations will cause
 2410-7

cutting or rutting of the underlying course surface or cause contamination of the base
course material.

c) Compaction: If directed by the Engineer, prior to starting the aggregate base operation,
the Contractor shall construct trial lengths. Immediately after placing, the base course
material shall be compacted. The material shall be compacted to a density of not less
than one-hundred (100) percent of Maximum Density as determined according to ASTM
D 1557. The field determination of density shall be made in accordance with ASTM D
1556.

The percent of density shall be adjusted to compensate for the weight and volume of
aggregate larger than the aggregate used in the compaction control test where
applicable.

Rolling shall be until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly
compacted to the density specified. The final rolling of the completed base course shall
be done with a self-propelled roller. Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient blading in
a manner approved by the Engineer, to ensure a smooth surface, free from ruts or ridges
and having the proper section and crown. When additional water is required it shall be
added in the amount and manner approved by the Engineer. Each layer of base course
must be completely compacted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to
the delivery of materials for a succeeding layer.

If the material for the base course is laid and compacted in more than one (1) layer,
the Contractor shall plan and coordinate the work in such a manner that the previously
placed and compacted layers be allowed ample time for drying and development of
sufficient stability before Vehicles hauling materials for the succeeding layers, or other
heavy equipment are permitted on the base. Prior to placing the succeeding layers of
material, the top of the under layer shall be made sufficiently moist to ensure bond
between the layers. The edges and edge slopes of the base course shall be bladed or
otherwise dressed to conform to the lines dimensions shown on the plans and present
straight, neat and workmanlike lines and slopes as free of loose material as practicable.

The Contractor shall also plan the work and handle the various operations so that the
least amount of water will be lost by evaporation from uncompleted surfaces. If the
Contractor delays placing of succeeding layers of base course material to the extent that
additional water must be applied to prevent raveling or excessive dripping, the application
of such water shall be at the Contractor's expense and will not be considered as the
basis for a claim for additional compensation. Water shall be applied at such times and
in such quantities as directed by the Engineer, and the Engineer shall have full authority
to require the suspension of all other work on the project to insure the proper
maintenance of previously compacted material. If after the base is compacted, any areas
are above or below proper grade and true elevations, such area shall be loosened and
after having had additional materials added or excess material removed, as the case
may require, shall be reconstructed as described herein. If after the base is compacted,
any areas fail to meet the specified density and gradation requirements, they shall be
loosened or removed as directed by the Engineer and reconstructed as described before.

d) Maintenance of Base Course: Following the construction of the aggregate base, the
compacted base course shall be maintained by the Contractor at his expense. The
Contractor shall blade, broom and otherwise maintain the base, keeping it free from
raveling, and other defects until such time as the bituminous prime or other surface is
applied. Water shall be applied at such time and in such quantities as directed by the
Engineer.

The Engineer shall determine when the surface of the base course is in the proper
condition to permit the bituminous prime and/or surfacing to be applied. If the Contractor
chooses not to apply the bituminous prime and/or surfacing at that time, he must
continue to maintain the surface of the base course, including the application of
necessary water, at his expense until such time as the bituminous prime and/or surfacing
 2410-8

is applied. Any additional expense incurred by the Contractor because of his failure to
apply the bituminous prime and/or surfacing when so permitted by the Engineer will not
be considered as the basis for a claim for additional compensation.

e) Testing for Compaction: The frequency of inplace density testing for accepting the
compacted area shall be one density test in every 300 sq. metre.

f) Tolerances:

Description Thickness Level 5M Cross-fall Longitudinal

(mm) (mm) Straight (%) Grade in
Edge 30M (%)
(mm)

Sub-base + 10 + 0
(Granular or - 20 - 25 20 + 0.3 + 0.1
Stabilized)

Base + 5 + 5 6
Course - 10 - 10 + 0.2 + 0.1
(Granular or
Stabilized)

04. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Document, no

measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified works related
to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have
been included in the quoted unit rates of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.

4.1.1 All sampling and testing of aggregate.

4.1.2 Mockup specimen strip of sub-base course and base course.

4.1.3 Providing and spraying water.

4.1.4 Any loses of material which may result from shrinking, compaction, foundation
settlement, wastage, over flow, erosion or any other causes.

4.1.5 Rolling and compaction.

4.1.6 Subgrade preparation

4.2 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of granular sub-base course and aggregate

base course will be made on the basis of actual volume in cubic metre of granular sub-
base course and aggregate base course laid & compacted in position to the line, level &
grade as shown on drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

4.3 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of compacted granular sub-base
course and crush aggregate base course on the basis of unit rate per cubic metre quoted
in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to
the item.
 2510-1

SECTION - 2510

PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS / TILES

01 SCOPE

The work shall consist of precast concrete paving blocks intended for the
construction of low speed roads, parking areas, lay byes, industrial and other
paved surfaces subjected to all categories of static and vehicular loading
and pedestrian traffic. Paving blocks covered by these Specifications are
designed to form a structural element and the surfacing of pavements,
having the block to block joints filled, so as to develop frictional interlock and
placed in conformity with the fines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-
section shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

02 MATERIAL REQUIRMENTS

For execution of this item provisions made in BS 6717 shall be applicable.

Detailed requirement of materials and construction shall be as under:

2.1 BINDERS AND BINDER CONSTITUENTS

Paving blocks shall be made using one or more of the following binders or
binder constituents complying with the requirements of the relevant
standards:

Ordinary Portland Cement BS 12

Portland Blastfurnace Cement BS 146 : Part 2
Portland Pulverized Fuel ash Cement BS 6588
Pulverized fuel ash BS 3892: Part 1
Ground granulated Blast furnace slag BS 6699

Where pulverized fuel ash is used, the proportions and properties of the
combination with Portland Cement shall comply with BS 6588.

Where ground granulated blastfurnace slag is used, the proportions and

properties of the combination with Portland Cement shall comply with BS
146 : Part 2.

2.2 AGGREGATES

Paving blocks shall be made using one or more of the following aggregates
complying with the relevant standards:

Natural Aggregates (Crushed or BS 882 : 1983 (except grading

Uncrushed) requirements in clause 5)
Air Cooled blastfurnace slag BS 1047 : 1083 (except
grading requirements in 4.8)
Pulverized fuel ash BS 3892 : Part-1 or Part-2
Ground granulated blastfurnace slag BS 6699
 2510-2

2.2.1 Acid Soluble Material (Fine Aggregate)

When tested as described in BS 812 : Part 119, the fine aggregate (material
passing a 5 mm sieve complying with BS 410) shall contain not more than
25% by mass of acid soluble material either in the fraction retained on, or in
the fraction passing, a 600 µ m sieve.

2.3 WATER
The water shall be. of drinking quality or in accordance with the
recommendations of appendix A of BS 3148: 1980.

2.4 ADMIXTURES AND PIGMENTS

Proprietary accelerating, retarding and water reducing agents shall comply
with BS 5075: Part 1.

Pigments shall comply with BS 1014.

Calcium chloride shall comply with BS 3587

2.5 FINISHES
The finish should be agreed between the manufacturer and the Engineer.

Concrete described as "natural colour shall contain no pigment.

In composite paving blocks the surface layer shall be formed as an integral

part of the block and shall be not less than 5 mm thick.

2.6 BINDER CONTENT

The cement content of the compacted concrete shall be not less than 380
kg/M3 for equivalent durability, paving blocks made with binder constituents
other than ordinary Portland cement shall have a higher binder content than
paving blocks made in a similar way using only Portland Cement. The
Engineer will decide the additional binder content. The compressive strength
test will be the only guide to the amount of additional binder needed.

2.7 SIZES AND TOLERANCES

2.7.1 Sizes
Paving blocks shall have a work size thickness of not less than 60 mm.
Type-R blocks shall be rectangular with a work size length of 200 mm and a
work size width of 100 mm. Type-S blocks shall be of any shape fitting within
a 295 mm square coordinating space and shall have a work size width not
less than 80 mm.

The preferred work size thicknesses are 60 mm, 65 mm, 80 mm & 100 mm.

A chamfer around the wearing surface with a work size not exceeding 7 mm
in width or depth shall be permitted.
 2510-3

All arises shall be of uniform shape.

2.7.2 Tolerances

The maximum dimensional deviations from the stated work sizes for paving
blocks shall be as follows:

length ± 2mm
width ± 2mm
thickness ± 3mm

Where a paving block includes profiled sides, the profile shall not deviate
from the manufacturer's specification by more than 2 mm.

2.8 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

The compressive strength of paving blocks shall be not less than 49 N/mM2
and the crushing strength of any individual block shall be not less than 40
N/mM2.

2.9 SAMPLING

The following sampling procedure shall be used for the compressive

strength test.

a) Before laying paving blocks, divide each designated section, comprising

not more than 5000 blocks, in a consignment into eight approximately
equal groups, Clearly mark all samples at the time of sampling in such a
way that the designated section or part thereof and the consignment
represented by the sample are clearly defined. Take two (2) blocks from
each group.

b) Dispatch the sample to the test laboratory, taking precautions to avoid

damage to the paving blocks in transit. Each sample shall be
accompanied by a certificate from the person responsible for taking the
sample, stating that sampling was carried out in accordance with this
Part of BS 6717.

c) Protect the paving blocks from damage and contamination until they
have been tested. Carry out any tests as soon as possible after the
sample has been taken.

2.10 MARKING

The following particulars relating to paving blocks made in accordance with

this standard shall be indicated clearly on the delivery note invoice,
manufacturer's or supplier's certificate or brochure supplied with the
consignment of blocks:

a) The name, trade mark or other means of identification of the

manufacturer.
 2510-4

b) The number and date of this British Standard, i.e. BS 6717 : Part 1:
1986*; or latest revision.

03 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Laying the Concrete Blocks

The total area to be covered with paving block shall be prepared by:

a) Compaction of subgrade
b) Laying of subbase in a thickness specified
c) Laying of crushed aggregate base or lean concrete in thickness as per
typical section

3.2 Tolerance

Tolerance of these layers shall be as per applicable requirement of each

item of this specifications.

Payment for each of the above item shall be made under the relative item of
work.

The total area will thereby be divide with nylon strings into sectors of not
more than 1.5 square meters. This shall be done to control the alignment of
paving blocks and to avoid multiplication of deviation in sizes of paving
blocks.

04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents,

no measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned
specified works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost
thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the
respective item (s) of the Bill of Quantities.

4.1.1 Providing, fixing, striking etc. of formwork.

4.1.2 Curing and testing of concrete.

4.1.3 Sand cushion in bed/joints for laying paving blocks/ tiles.

4.1.4 Edge precast blocks and cut units.

4.1.5 Cast insitu concrete to stablise edge precast blocks.

 2510-5

4.2 Pre-Cast Concrete Paving Tiles/Blocks

4.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of pre-cast concrete

paving tiles/Blocks will be made on the basis of actual area in square
metre of concrete tiles provided and laid in position to the line, level
and grade as shown on drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

4.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of pre-cast

concrete paving tiles/Blocks on the basis of unit rate per square
metre quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.
 4200-1
SECTION - 4200

BRICK MASONRY

1.0. SCOPE

The work under this section of the specification consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances, materials and in performing all operations in
connection with supplying and constructing brick masonry, complete in strict
accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings and
subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The scope of this section of
specification is covered with detailed specification as laid down herein.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following ACI codes and ASTM Standards referred to
herein, are applicable to these Specifications.

ACI Codes

ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures

ASTM Standards

ASTM C 62 Building Bricks (Solid Masonry units made from clay or shale)

ASTM C 216 Facing Bricks (Solid Masonry units made from clay or shale)

ASTM C 67 Sampling and Testing Bricks

ASTM C 270 Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM A 615 Deformed and plain billet bars for concrete reinforcement

3.0 SUBMITTALS

3.1 Manufacturer's Data

Submit two copies of the manufacturer's specifications and other data

for each type of brick and accessory required. Instructions shall be
included for handling, storage, installation, and protection of units and
accessories.

3.2 Samples

Submit three samples of each type of brick and accuracy required, also
samples of the full range of exposed texture to be used in the completed
work.
 4200-2

3.3 Test Reports

Reports for compressive strengths of brick and mortar; and tensile tests
of reinforcing steel.

3.4 Certificate of Compliance

For Cement.

Reinforcing Steel.

4.0 MATERIALS

4.1 Cement & Aggregates

All Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 150.

All aggregates for mortar shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

C 144.

All water used in the manufacture of bricks and in the preparation of

mortar shall be free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter,
alkali, salts and other impurities. The water shall be tested in accordance
with BS-3148, where directed by the Engineer.

4.2 Mortar

Mortar shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 270. Mortar shall be

of type S having a minimum compressive strength of 12.4 MPa.

Proportioning for mortar shall be in accordance with the requirements of

ASTM C-270. However it shall not be less than 1 part of cement to 4 parts
of sand or as specified on the drawings.

Methods and equipment used for mixing mortar will be such so as to

accurately determine and control the amount of each separate ingredient
entering into the mortar. Mortar shall be mixed only in sufficient quantities
for immediate use and shall be used within 30 minutes after mixing.
Stiffened mortars shall be re-tempered by adding water to restore the
required consistency. Mortars not used within 2-1/2 hours after initial
mixing shall be discarded. The mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned and
washed at the end of each day's work.

4.3 Bricks

Building bricks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 62. Size of

building bricks shall be 9x4 1/2x3 inch and as approved. The Contractor
shall submit samples of building bricks for approval prior to
commencement of work. Defective bricks shall not be used.
 4200-3

5.0 PLACING

The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortar shall be
such as will not damage the brick nor delay the use of mixed mortar. Bricks
shall not be placed during heavy rains to washing away the mortar from the
brick. Mortar already spread which becomes diluted by rain shall be discarded
and replaced before continuing with the work. All bricks to be used in brick
masonry shall be soaked in water for three to four hours before they are used to
ensure that each brick is thoroughly and uniformly wetted. All bricks shall be free
from water adhering to their surface when they are placed in the brick masonry.

Bricks shall be laid "frog" upward (except for lining in drain) with mortar joints and
in stretcher bond or as approved by the Engineer. Both bed and vertical joints
shall be 10 mm in thickness completely filled with mortar as specified herein, and
each brick shall be bedded by firmly tapping with the handle of trowel. All
horizontal joints shall be parallel and all vertical joints in alternate courses shall
be directly over one another. Excess mortar at the outer edges shall be removed
and joints drawn straight. Work required to be embedded in the brick masonry
shall be installed as the work progresses. At the completion of the work all holes
or defective mortar joints shall be cut out and re-pointed.

They shall be laid true to line, level and plumbs, All joints shall be perfectly
straight, parallel and sharp. Facing brick of irregular shape, size, damaged and
defective edges and faces shall be rejected outright. Works done with defective
edges and faces shall be bricks shall be rejected and the Contractor shall
replace, without additional cost, all defective and unacceptable works.

Exterior faces of the walls shall be finished by striking the joints as the work
proceeds. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set bat still
sufficiently plastic to bound. The joints shall be struck by raking the green
mortar after the brick work has been laid and finish the joints with a pointing tool.
Horizontal joints shall be struck to form a weathered joint and vertical joints shall
be struck with a V notch. Care shall be taken that the striking tools do not
develop a cutting edge as the object of striking the joint is to compress the
mortar into the joints.

6.0 CURING AND REPAIR

All brick masonry shall be water cured and shall be kept wet for at least seven
days by an approved method which will keep all surfaces to be cured
continuously wet. Water used for curing shall meet the requirements of the
specifications for water used in the manufacture of bricks.

If, after the completion of any brick masonry work, the brick is not in alignment or
level, or does not conform to the lines and levels, shown on the drawings, or
shows a defective surface, it shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor,
without additional cost to Engineer. Repair or patching of the defective area
will not be acceptable unless allowed, in writing, by the Engineer.
 4200-4

7.0 SCAFFOLDING

The Contractor shall provide safe scaffolding of adequate strength for use of
workmen at all levels and heights at his own expense. Scaffolding which is
unsafe in the opinion of the Engineer shall not be used until it has been
strengthened and made safe for use of workmen. Cost of scaffolding etc., shall
be included by the Contractor without additional cost to the Engineer.

Damage to masonry from scaffolding or from any other cause shall be repaired
by the Contractor at his own cost.

8.0 TOLERANCES

All tolerances shall be as per requirements of ACI-530.1

9.0. DAMP PROOF COURSES

All damp proof courses unless otherwise specified shall be 2 inch thick,
consisting of cement concrete having a 28 day minimum cube strength of
21 N/mm2, mixed with approved quality water proofing compound as per
manufacturer's specifications and shall be laid at required levels as per drawings
and instructions of the Engineer. The damp proof course shall be tamped,
consolidated, leveled and edges and corners made to the requirements of the
relevant drawings including finishing and curing complete.

No separate payment will be made for providing and laying damp proof course.

10.0 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

At the completion of the work, all holes, and defective mortar joints shall be cut
and re-pointed. Exposed masonry shall be protected against staining or other
damage and excess mortar shall be cleared off the surfaces as the work
progresses. All exposed masonry shall be clean, smooth, fine and shall be of
acceptable finish approved by the Engineer.

11.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

11.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract

Documents, no measurement and payment will be made for the under
mentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills of
Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the
quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bills of Quantities.

11.1.1 Cutting & chiseling of masonry wherever required.

11.1.2 Cement sand mortar used in laying bricks including wastage.

11.1.3 Curing and repairing the masonry work.

 4200-5

11.1.4 All joint reinforcing bars, reinforcing anchor bars and dovetail
anchors.

11.1.5 Providing and laying damp proof course.

11.1.6 Loading, Transportation, unloading, stacking at site, multiple re-

handling and curing of bricks.

11.2 Brick Masonry

11.2.1 Measurement

In case of different thickness of slab in different areas or room or

for any other reason whatsoever, if chiseling of masonry is
required the Contractor shall do so at his own cost. Where, for any
reason whatsoever, the height of the wall is short of ceiling height
of the actual height shall be made good with Class "C" concrete.
This concrete shall neither be measured nor be paid under item of
concrete but will be paid for under item of masonry. Similarly
where the lintel heights are such that the Contractor has to
chisel the masonry or provide cast-in-place concrete to make up
the height of the course, no payment will be made for chiseling,
but where such cast-in-place concrete is provided, payment for
the same will be made at the unit rate for masonry.

Measurement of acceptably completed works of brick masonry at

any height will be made on the basis of number of cubic meter
provided & installed in position as shown on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer.

11.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of brick

masonry on the basis of unit rate per cubic meter quoted in the
Bills of Quantities & shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the item.
 6220-1

SECTION - 6220

ALUMINIUM WORKS

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the specifications includes furnishing all labour,
equipment, appliances and material and performing all operations in carrying out work of
aluminum doors, windows, ventilators, glazed partition and composite aluminum
cladding. All related items such as sealants, rubber gasket for glazing fly proofing,
rollers, latches, fastenings, glazing, anchor bolts, and all items supplied by other trades
and customarily built in and/or installed in strict accordance with this section of the
specifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the
Contract.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of following ISO and British Standards are relevant to these
Specifications wherever applicable.

2.1 ISO (International Organisation for Standardisation)

1804 Doors - Terminology

6442 Door Leaves - Measurement of defects of

general flatness.

6443 Door Leaves - Measurement of dimensions and

defects of squareness.

6444 Door Leaves - Test of behaviour under humidity

variations (successive uniform climates)

6612 Windows & Doors - wind resistance tests.

6613 Windows & Door - Air permeability test.

2.2 BSI (British Standard Institution)

1227 Hinges

4873 Aluminum alloy windows.

3. GENERAL

3.1 Door, Windows, ventilators, to be provided shall be aluminium doors, windows

and ventilators, of profile pattern and design shown on drawings and shop
drawings as approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall provide literature
completely describing the product instructions for installation and maintenance.

3.2 All the sections used for doors, windows, ventilators shall be of best quality
aluminium products such as equal and unequal angles, channels, tubes,
corrugated strips, mouldings etc., in accordance with International standards
conforming to ASTM B 308 & B 221.
 6220-2

3.3 All doors, windows. Ventilators shall be of type and size indicated on drawings
and shall conform to the requirements shown and specified herein.

3.4 Contractor shall arrange tests and analysis if directed by the Engineer of scaled
models of each door, window, ventilator type at the maker's works or any
laboratory specified by the Engineer for the material supplied by him to be tested
in the presence of the Engineer's Inspector, to whom test certificates, proof
sheets, etc. shall be furnished. The models shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval prior to testing. Nevertheless, neither the fact that the materials have
been tested in the presence of the inspector nor that the Engineer may have
been furnished with test certificates in lieu of sending an inspector to the works
shall affect the liberty of the Engineer to reject, after delivery of materials found
not in accordance with these specifications.

3.5 The contractor shall submit shop drawings which shall show full construction
details, quantities and locations, fastenings and attachments to adjacent
construction and materials. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the proper time
to allow for checking, revisions, agreement and to permit manufacturer's product
delivery and start of site work to suit the building programme. The Contractor
shall submit representative samples of finished doors, windows, and ventilators
mechanism, embedded parts, fastenings, glass panes, accessories and other
materials for the Engineer's approval.

After approval of shop drawings and tests etc., the Contractor shall submit at his
own cost one mock-up sample of each type of aluminium works complete with
glazing, all components assembly method and required fittings and accessories
prior to the actual fabrication of the bulk. The samples shall be returned to the
Contractor for incorporation in the works after installation of at least 80% of the
works.

Fabricate and assemble all work in the shop of the approved manufacturer to
reduce field fabrication to a minimum unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

3.6 The glass shall conform to specification laid down under chapter 'Glazing' and
shall be free from all blemishes, bubbles, distortions and other flaws of any kind
and shall be properly cut to size as shown on drawings, so as to fit the grooves
in ventilators members. All the glass shall be best quality of approved
manufacture or equivalent standard as approved by the Engineer.

3.7 The structural shape of the Aluminium members shall be of uniform quality,
colour and temper, clean, round, commercially straight and free from injurious
defects.

3.8 All doors, windows and ventilators shall be fabricated as a complete unit, fully
airtight and watertight, including rubber gasket for glazing, rollers, latch,
anodized in specified colour, inclusive of glass sheet, all as approved by the
engineer.

3.9. Contractor shall, on request, get certificate signed by the manufacturer stating
that each lot has been sampled, tested and inspected and has met the
requirements in accordance with these specifications and the same shall be
furnished to the Engineer.

3.10 The shop drawings shall clearly show that there shall be no penetration of
rainwater from the exterior to the interior in case of severe wind and rainstorm.
This has to be specially ensured in cill section.
 6220-3

4. MATERIAL

4.1 Frames/shutters

The frames of aluminium door, windows and ventilator shall be formed from
rolled, strip or extruded aluminium. The thickness of sectional members shall be
at least 2.0 mm. All outer / frame sections of openable / fixed windows.
Ventilators and louvers curtain wall shall be 4” (100 mm) minimum in width. The
Frames for doors and door/windows curtain wall shall be at least 4” (100 mm) in
width.

4.2 As shown on the drawings, aluminium frames shall be provided as per

international standard approved by the engineer.

4.3 Fasteners shall be stainless steel of a type selected to prevent galvanic action
with the components fastened.

4.4 Gaskets shall be vinyl glazing channel gasket to commercial standard

CS-230-60.

4.5 Hardware shall be manufacturer's standard hardware. Flush to match doors,

windows, ventilators and louvers finish. Floor mounted concealed type double
action/swing imported door closures shall be provided to all doors. Heavy duty
in-matching finish stays shall be provided to all openable windows, ventilators
and louvers. Stays shall be attached to the window frame so as could be
replaced easily.

4.6 Joint sealant shall be approved elastomer.

4.7 All Aluminium sections shall be powder coated in accordance with the standards
of Aluminium Association of USA. The anodisation shall be of not less than 70-
90 microns. The anodic oxide surface shall be properly sealed.

4.8 For powder coated finish aluminium sections to be coated shall be mill finish.
The sections shall be firstly degreased with a degreasing chemical to remove
all/any stains. The sections will then be given a chromating coating and electro
static powder coating in the desired colour with a powder-coating machine. After
colour coating the sections will be baked at baking temperature of 220 degree
Centigrade for 25 minutes.

4.9 All sliding/openable windows shall have sliding/openable wire/fly screen shutters
in window matching finish with wire/fly screen of size so as not to permit the
entry of flies and mosquitoes. The wire mesh shall be 30 SWG. 14 mesh (14 x
14 openings per square inch).

4.10 Composite Aluminum cladding: composite aluminum cladding material shall be

from approved manufacturer.

5. DESIGN REQUIREMENT

The Contractor shall design the installation to meet or excell the following requirements.

5.1 Tolerances
 6220-4

The Contractor shall be responsible for agreeing to all dimensions with the
Engineer before proceeding with the manufacture and for making provision to
allow for building tolerances required by the Engineer. Contractor shall also take
site measurements of the structure completed before manufacturing.

5.2 Thermal & Seismic Movements

The window and glazing assemblies are to be constructed and installed in the
openings with sufficient tolerance and, where necessary, to provide for joints
incorporated in couplings, to provide for expansion and contraction as will be
caused by the local seismic and climatic conditions and temperature changes,
winter to summer - day to night without buckling, distortion of joints, or other
harmful effects.

6. WORKMANSHIP

The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and installation of all items
furnished. All items shall be installed plumb and square and shall be solidly anchored in
a good workman like manner in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and as
specified herein. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of installed items
from damage by other trades. All items shall be left in operating, neat and clean
condition, free from dirt, finger marks, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for final
cleaning before the final acceptance.

The glass panes shall firmly be secured in the rebates with the rubber gasket. Ensure
that the beads and grooves are clean, dry and unobstructed at the time of glazing. The
complete unit shall be airtight and watertight on completion. No ventilator shall be
considered complete until and unless the fingerprints and other stains and marks have
been removed from the surface of glass and aluminium.

7. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

7.1 Deliver doors, windows, ventilators in a manner preventing damage to units.

Store materials off the ground under cover in a manner preventing deterioration
or damage.

7.2 All embedded parts and anchor bolts shall be delivered to the site carefully and
keeping the fabricated shape and configuration. All these parts shall be suitably
marked for identification.

8. ERECTION

Rawalplugs and anchoring bolts shall be embedded into the concrete or block masonry
for holding the doors windows, ventilators in their correct positions.

Care shall be taken to install the doors, windows, ventilators in line and plumb & solidly
anchored in a good workman like manner in accordance with the drawings. Should any
scale or scratch appears on the surface of doors, windows and ventilators the contractor
shall at his own expense and at the Engineer's direction have all exposed surfaces
cleaned to bare bright specified colour.

All works shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
 6220-5

9. PROTECTION AND CLEANING

9.1 Temporary protection shall be achieved by applying water-soluble protective

coating capable of withstanding the action of lime mortar.

9.2 Apply coating in the manufacturer's plant to the exposed surfaces of all
components.

9.3 Before application of coating, remove all fabrication compounds, moisture and
dirt accumulations.

10. DEFECTIVE WORK

In the event of non-conformance to specifications and drawings the aluminium works

shall be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove and replace the
rejected works by new work of same specifications.

11. GUARANTEE

11.1 The manufacturer shall furnish his standard written guarantee against leakage of
rain, excessive infiltration of dust and air and all defects in materials and
workmanship covering all work under this section.

11.2 Such guarantee shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.

12. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

12.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or else where in the Contract Documents, no

measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified
works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall
be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items
of the Bill of Quantities.

12.1.1 Providing and fixing glazings.

12.1.2 Powder coating of Aluminum works.

12.1.3 Anodizing of Aluminum works.

12.1.4 Rawalplugs, brackets, rubber gasket, sealants, rollers, vetting latches

and any other embedded fixture required for fixing the ventilators.

12.1.5 Providing and fixing locks, door closures, and other hardwares as
approved by the engineer.

12.1.5 Fly proof shutters for Doors and windows.

12.1.6 All samples and tests.

12.1.7 Insulation, structural steel for framing etc. for cladding.

 6220-6

12.2 Aluminum Works

12.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of all aluminum works will

be made on the basis of net actual area in square meters of all aluminum
works provided and installed in position as shown on drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.

12.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of all aluminum

works on the basis of unit rate per square meter quoted in the Bill of
Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related
to the item.
 6250-1

SECTION - 6250

GLAZING

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labour,
equipment, tools, appliances, scaffolding and providing glass, gaskets, sealants,
compound and other materials required for performing all operations in connection with
the installation and setting of all types of glass and glazing and glass blocks complete in
every respect in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The
scope of this section of Specifications is covered with detailed Specifications as laid
down herein.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of following British Standards are relevant to these Specifications

wherever applicable.

2.1 BSI (British Standards Institution)

952 Glass for glazing

5051 Security glazing part I & II

CP.152 Glazing

3. GENERAL

3.1 Each type of glass shall have the manufacturer's label on each pane, and the
labels shall remain on the glass until final cleaning.

3.2 Glazing sealant shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the

particular application.

3.3 Spacer shims (distance pieces) shall be plasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
Thickness shall be equal to space shown on drawings between glass and
rebates bead or cleat. Depth shall give not less than 1/4" cover of glazing
sealant.

3.4 Contractor shall submit samples for each type of glass, minimum 1200 mm x
12 mm in size with protective edges. Samples of glazing sealant minimum
0.1 liter of specified types shall be submitted. Samples of minimum of three
glass blocks shall also be submitted.

3.5 Contractor shall submit 1 feet long sample of each type of glazing gasket.

3.6 Contractor shall also submit printed materials manufacturer's installation

instructions for specified glazing gaskets, compounds sealants and
accessories including description of required equipment and procedures and
precautions to be observed.
 6250-2

4. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

4.1 Contractor shall deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened

containers clearly labeled with manufacturer's name and address, material,
brand, type, class and rating as applicable.

4.2 Contractor shall store the materials in original unopened containers with
labels intact/protected from ground contact and from elements which may
damage glass.

4.3 Contractor shall handle the materials in a manner to prevent breakage of

glass and damage to surfaces.

5. MATERIALS

5.1 General

Glass shall be free from all blemishes, bubbles, distortions and other flaws of
any kind and shall be properly cut to fit the rebates so as to have a uniform
clearance of 1.6 mm round the panes between the edges of glass and the
rebates.

5.2 Sheet Glass

It shall be first quality tempered glass conforming to the applicable

requirements of B.S. 952 “Glass for Glazing”. Unless otherwise indicated
glass shall be 8 mm thick glass for internal display window except where
obscure glass is specified. Glass shall be free from specks, bubbles,
deterioration and flows of every kind.

5.3 Glazing Sealants and Compounds

Contractor shall provide material coloured to match frame in which glass is

installed. Provide only compounds known to be fully compatible with
surfaces, which they will contact as follows.

5.4.1 Two component polysulfide glazing sealant.

5.4.2 One component acrylic glazing sealant.

5.4.3 Acrylic-latex glazing sealant consisting of modified latex rubber

and acrylic emulsion, non-hardening, non- staining and non-
bleeding.

5.4.4 Cleaners, Primers and sealer as recommended by the sealant

manufacturer.

5.4 Tinted Glass

Glass for windows, ventilator and door shall be of 6 mm thickness and of

imported origin.

5.5 Laminated glass (interior & exterior)

Interior : 12mm (6mm + 6mm) tinted

Exterior: 36mm (6 + 6mm) tinted + 12mm (Air gap) + (6 + 6mm) tinted
 6250-3

6. INSTALLATION OF GLAZING

6.1 Glazing shall comply with the recommendations contained in the "MANUAL
of GLAZING" of the Glass Marketing Association or as specifically
recommended otherwise by the glass and glazing materials manufacturers.

6.2 Examine each piece of glass and discard and replace glass with edge
damage or face imperfection. All glazing shall be wind tight and fully water
tight on completion.

6.3 Clean glazing channels and other framing members indicated to receive
glass. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate,
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are to
be used. Apply primer and sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended
by the sealant manufacturer and as shown on the drawings.

6.4 Trim and clean excess glazing materials from surrounding surfaces
immediately after installation and eliminate stains and discolorations.

6.5 Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's

instructions to obtain high early bond strength internal cohesive strength and
surface durability.

6.6 While glazing operation is in progress great care shall be taken to avoid
breakage or damage to the glass and adjoining glazing. The Contractor shall
make good at his own cost, all glass broken by his workmen while cleaning
or carrying out other operations. On the completion of the glazing work, all
glass that has been set by the Contractor shall, if it becomes loose, within the
maintenance period, be refixed at Contractor's expense.

6.7 No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paint and other
stains have been removed from the surface of the glass ad checked by the
Engineer for water tightness.

7. PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF GLAZING

7.1 Remove all smears, labels and excess glazing sealant, leave clean inside
and outside free from scratches. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection of installed glass. Before final acceptance, damaged or broken
glass shall be removed and replaced with new glass at no additional expense
to the Employer.

7.2 All glass surfaces shall be washed clean both inside and outside within two
weeks prior to final acceptance by the Employer.

8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No payment shall be made for the works involved within the scope of this section of
specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein. The
cost there of shall be deemed to be included in the quoted unit rate of the relevant item
of the Bill of Quantities.
 6411-1

SECTION - 6411

WATER PROOFING & BUILT-UP ROOFING

1. SCOPE

The works under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in
connection with water-proofing over roof complete in strict accordance with this
section of the specifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the
terms and conditions of the Contract.

2. BUILT-UP PROOFING

2.1 Submittals

2.1.1 Shop Drawings :

Shop drawings showing layout and all the details for construction.

2.1.2 Samples :

Two samples of Built-up roofing, applied on 1x1 ft. rigid cement

asbestos board in specified thickness.

2.1.3 Manufacturer's Data :

Copies of data sheets, application instructions and manufacturer's

standard guarantee for Built-up roofing materials.

2.2 Materials

2.2.1 Bitumen 10/20 grade shall be according to BSS.

2.2.2 Bitumen priming oil shall be of the approved manufacturer of the

bitumen.

2.2.3 Cement and aggregates shall be in accordance with specifications

for "Plain and Reinforced Concrete."

2.2.4 400x400x50 mm thick pre-cast concrete paver.

2.2.5 Felt shall be asphalt impregnated jute based as per BS 747. The
number of ply shall be 3 or as specified in the Drawings or as
approved by the Engineer.

2.2. 6 Extruded Polystyrene board shall have a density of not less than
50 kg/cu.m , resistance 34.7 k.m/w.

2.2.7 Laminated 2mm thick aluminium sheet between two thickness of

0.5 mm Du Ponti Mylor sheets.
 6411-2

2.2.8 1mm thick polyster protection sheet.

2.2.9 Nails/galvanized screws shall be of the size and type

recommended by the roofing manufacturer for the job conditions.

2.2.10 Aluminum flashing 18 SWG

2.3 Delivery Storage and Handling

Materials shall be protected from damage during loading, shipment

delivery and storage. Non-staining materials shall be used for blocking
and packing.

2.4 Preparatory Work

2.4.1 All surfaces, to be treated shall be dust free and dry. Application
of roof finishes shall not start unless the preparatory work has
been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

2.4.2 Treated wood nailing strips 25mm thick shall be embedded in

uninsulated cast-in-place at rakes, eaves, and around large
opening, so that flanges of edging strips, large vents, etc. may be
properly secured to deck during the application of the roofing.

2.4.3 All metal strips, scuppers and roof drains shall be placed and
metal flashing, flanges etc., shall be provided in time to be
installed alongwith the roofing assembly. Cant strips shall be
installed at the angle formed by the roof deck and the vertical
surfaces.

2.4.4 When the slope of concrete deck exceeds one in six, 25mm by
50mm treated wood nailing strips shall be embedded in the
concrete with surface flush with the deck. Nailers shall be spaced
900mm on centres, and may be installed either parallel or at right
angles to the slope. Roofing felt shall then be laid at right angles
to the nailing strips and each blind nailed into each nailer. For
slopes between one in twelve and one in six on concrete decks in
areas of high temperature, provide nailer at ridge, apply felt
parallel to slope, and blind nail upper ends securely into wood
nailers.

2.5 Application of Roof Finishes.

2.5.1 Asphalt for built-up roofing shall not be applied when it is above
205 degree centigrade, nor shall it be heated above 245 degree
centigrade.

2.5.2 Felt shall be stacked in properly protected piles and maintained at

temperature of at least 10 degree centigrade for a period of not
less than 24 hours prior to laying. Felt and the surfacing material
shall always be dry. Asphalt shall be hot when applied and the
several layers of felt shall be laid free from wrinkles or buckles.
 6411-3

2.5.3 Built-up roofing shall consist of layers of asphalt priming oil,

bituminous paint and felt as specified by the Engineer. Roofing
shall not be applied during rain or while surfaces are damp; it shall
be applied only to surfaces that are clean and dry.

2.5.4 Method of laying the different layers of built-up roofing shall be

strictly in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.

2.5.5 Built-up roofing shall not be laid when the temperature, at the
location of the work, is below 5oC.

2.5.6 Heating of asphalt shall be strictly regulated by means of an

accurate thermometer of approved type, kept constantly
suspended in the heating kettle while the work is in progress.

2.5.7 Entire deck surface and parapet walls shall be and allowed to dry
thoroughly.

2.5.8 Mopping of surface with asphalt shall be performed so that the

surface shall be completely covered. Bond coats of asphalt shall
be at the rate of 150 kg/100 square meter. At no point shall felt
touch felt or underlying concrete and the rate of application
shall be such that the bitumen mopping shall not be more than
one metre ahead of the roll of felt. All asphalt shall be applied
with mops except that the hot surfacing application shall
bepoured from a dipper.

2.5.9 Felt shall be laid with each sheet lapping the preceding one. Each
sheet shall be lapped with an expose lap of 300mm. All end laps,
shall be 100mm minimum. The laying of felt shall, in general, be
started at low points, working upwards to high points of the
surfaces. Roll all roofing felt, mopping, rubbing and pressing the
felt sheets as it spreads on to the surface so as to ensure
thorough sticking and a smooth firm surface, free from wrinkless
or bubbles. Roofing felt shall be extended to points and position
as shown on the Drawings. It should be fixed tightly in positions
with cant strips and concrete nails in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings and as per direction of the Engineer.

2.5.10 A flood coat of asphalt shall be applied over the top, or top layer of
felt at the rate of 250 kg/100 Square metres of area and shall be
penetrated therein.

2.5.11 Base Flashing:

a) Where built-up base flashing are required, they shall be

made by continuing the built-up roofing upon the cant and
securing the tip edge with galvanized roofing nail used
with metal discs. The nails shall be spaced not over
100mm apart.

b) Where metal base flashing occur, apply 3 layers of felt,

extending up on the including surface to 150mm and out
on the roof surfaces 100 to 150mm respectively,
cementing the same in place with asphalt plastic, trowelled
 6411-4

on. These flashing strips shall be applied over the top ply
of roofing and under the metal base flashing. The portion
of metal flashing extending out over roof surfaces shall be
covered with two additional plies of felt, 400mm and
450mm wide respectively and both cemented in place with
bitumen.

2.5.12 The water proofing treatment to reinforced cement concrete roof

slabs shall consist of and be done in the following manner as
indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

a) The concrete surface shall first be thoroughly broomed,

cleaned and dried before application of water proofing
treatment.

b) 75mm thick (avg.) Class "C" cement concrete screed laid

in slope over cleaned surface of roof.

c) 2mm thick Vapour barrier shall be laid over screed.

d) The primer (mixture of asphalt and turpentine in 50:50

ratio) shall be applied at the rate of 0.5 liter/m2 to entire
roof surface and felt to dry per 24 hours.

e) A flood coat of hot bitumen 10/20 grade at the rate of

1.5kg/m2 shall be applied over the primer.

f) Two layer of three ply bitumen impregnated jute based felt

shall then be laid over the layer of asphalt already applied
in accordance with the instructions laid down in para
2.5.9 herein above and/or as directed by the Engineer.

f) 50 mm thick high density extruded polystyrene board shall

be laid over felt.

g) 1 mm thick polyster protection sheet shall be placed over

extruded polystyrene board.

h) 400x400x50 mm thick pre-cast concrete pavers shall be

placed over polyster protection sheet.

Weight of 3 ply bitumen felt standard of 20x1 yard shall be

100 lbs.

3. WATER PROOFING TREATMENT IN FOUNDATIONS AND

SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH EARTH.

All surfaces to be bitumen painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of any accretion,

dust, dirt etc; by scraping, wire brushing or as directed by the Engineer. The
surface shall be primed with a coat of asphalt oil used at the rate of not less
than 5 litres/10 square meters. Two coats of hot bitumen paint shall be applied
at the rate of 1.0kg/Sq.m per coat. The first coat shall be allowed to dry for
about 6 hours before applying the second coat. During operation of painting
 6411-5

great care shall be taken to avoid air bubbles. The manufacturer's instructions
and Engineer's directions shall be followed.

4. EXPANSION JOINTS

Expansion joints shall be provided wherever indicated on the Drawings or as

directed by the Engineer. In no case shall the reinforcement, corner protection
angles, or other embedded items be permitted to extend continuously through
any expansion joint.

All expansion joints shall carefully be placed so as not to be displaced during

concreting. The method of placing the expansion joints shall be strictly in
accordance with the Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. All materials
for use in the expansion joints shall have prior approval of the Engineer before
placing order for supply.

5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

5.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract

Documents, no separate measurement and payment will be made for the
under mentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bill
of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in
the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.

5.1.1 All preparatory work, scrapping, scratching, cleaning and

priming.

5.1.2 Cement concrete screed

5.1.3 Primer

5.1.4 Pea size gravel

5.1.5 3 flood coat of hot bitumen

5.1.6 Felt

5.1.7 Flashing, nails, screws etc.

5.3 Bitumen Painting/Coating

5.3.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of bitumen

painting/coating will be made on the basis of net actual area in
square metre of surfaces painted as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
 6411-6

5.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

bitumen painting/coating on the basis of unit rate per square metre
quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.
 6521-1

SECTION - 6521

CEMENT PLASTER

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances, and materials and in performing all operations in any floor and
at any height connection with providing and installation of cement plaster, and specified
external rendering complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

2. GENERAL

2.1 Except as may be otherwise shown on surfaces specified, all plaster work,
both internal and external shall be ordinary Portland Cement plaster of the
required thickness as shown on the drawings.

2.2 Plastering shall not commence until all electric conduits, drainage and
sanitary pipes, inlets to tanks, brackets, clamps, doors and window frames
and all sorts of inserts and embedded items are fixed in position. It shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to make sure that all such work is carried
out by other contractors before starting of plaster work. Chiseling and
repairing of cement plaster shall not be permitted without the approval of the
Engineer.

2.3 Sample of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior
to use in the works.

3. MATERIAL

3.1 Cement for plaster shall be Ordinary Portland Cement (B.S 12 or P.S 232) or
Sulphate resisting cement (B.S 4027 or P.S. 612) as specified and shall
conform to requirements specified in the section "Plain and Reinforced
Concrete".

3.2 Sand for plaster shall comply with the requirements of BS 1199, BS 1200 or
the draft Pakistan Standard "Sand for Plaster" as directed by the Engineer.

3.3 Water for plaster shall conform to requirements specified in the section for
"plain and reinforced concrete".

3.4 All materials and workmanship for plaster, not explained in these
Specifications, shall comply with the requirements of relevant BS CP 211 and
CP 221 as directed by the Engineer.

4. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING

4.1 Measurement of materials by volume shall be by containers of known

capacity to maintain consistent proportions. No lumpy or caked material shall
be used. Mixing equipment boxes and tools shall be clean. Materials shall be
proportioned as specified on the Drawings, in the Bill of Quantities or as
directed by the Engineer. Mixing shall be continuous until all ingredients are
evenly distributed and thoroughly mixed.
 6521-2

4.2 Only limited water shall be added for proper workability and such quantity of
mortar shall be prepared which can be consumed in thirty minutes after
preparation. Preparation of mortar in bulk quantity for use during the entire
day or for any other time more than that stipulated above is expressly
prohibited. Retempering shall not be permitted and all mortar which has
begun to stiffen shall be discarded.

4.3 Plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed either by hand on a clean

cement concrete platform or by a mechanical mixer, as directed by the
Engineer.

5. PREPARATION OF SURFACE TO BE PLASTERED

5.1 Concrete surface to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all grease, form
oil and other surface impurities, which will otherwise adversely affect the
adhesion of plaster to the surface concerned. The surface of all-concrete
ceilings, beams and columns shall be lightly hacked by approved means to
give the required key for plastering.

5.2 All masonry surfaces to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all matter,
which will otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surface
concerned. The surface shall be washed with clean water and kept damp for
24 hours before further treatment. The surface thus prepared shall be treated
uniformly with cement and sand slurry. The slurry to be used shall be one
part cement to one part sand by volume with water added to make a stiff
creamy mix. The slurry shall be applied with a stiff brush on surface, which
has previously been well wetted. The surface so treated shall be left to cure
for 3 days.

6. APPLICATION OF PLASTER

6.1 The plaster of thickness less than the specified thickness shall be rejected. If
the plaster is to be more than 12 mm thick, it shall be done in two coats. The
surface of first coat shall be made rough before the second coat is applied.

The plaster shall not have wavy surface and shall be perfectly in plumb. The
edges and corners shall represent a straight line. The plaster shall be kept
wet continuously for at least ten (10) days. No extra payment shall be
allowed for jambs, junctions, corners, edges, round surfaces or for more than
one layer of plaster required due to any unevenness in the work done by the
Contractor. The plasterwork is to cover all conduits, pipes etc fixed in the
walls and ceiling. Wherever specified, metal lath shall be nailed firmly before
plastering is commenced. The plaster surface shall be tested frequently with
a 3 meter straight edge and plumb bob.

6.2 Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, discolouration or any defects shall not
be acceptable. Any such plaster or loose plaster shall be removed &
replaced with plaster in conformity with these specifications and as
additionally directed by the Engineer.

Contractor shall cut out and patch all defective work at his own cost. All
damaged plaster shall be patched as directed by the Engineer. Patching
plaster shall match appearance of and shall be finished level with adjoining
plaster.
 6521-3

7. METAL LATH

Metal lathing shall be fabricated from sheet steel and shall be of uniform quality and free
from flaws broken strands, cracks and corrosive pitting, shall be rectangular and true to
shape and shall comply with BS-1369.

All lathing shall be galvanized. Where plastering material depends entirely on the lathing
for its key, these shall be not less than two complete mesh openings per 30mm in one
direction and the width of the aperture shall not be less than 5mm.

Sheets shall not be less than 1.6 kg/sq.m when fabricated, using 0.7 mm thick steel
sheet. Where used on smooth surfaces to form a key it shall be not less than 1.2
kg/sq.mm when fabricated, using 0.5 mm thick steel sheet. Tying wire shall be 1.2 mm
diameter galvanized annealed iron wire.

Sheets shall be welded to angle iron frame as shown on drawings.

8. ANGLE AND BEADS

Angle beads, stop beads, depth gauge beads, edging profiles, plaster dividing profiles,
interior angle profiles, plaster borders and the like shall all be manufactured from sheet
steel and galvanized after fabrication, all beads shall be perforated at edges to ensure
good adhesion of the plaster work. Thickness and dimensions shall suit particular
locations and plaster thickness.

All angle beads, stop beads, depth gauge beads and the like are to be fixed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, at all corners, stops, joints, etc. as per
directions of Engineer In-charge.

9. INTERNAL/EXTERNAL PLASTER

9.1 Where specified in the Drawings external surface shall have an average 20
mm thick plaster finish, consisting of a base coat of 1:4 cement sand mortar
in Grey cement and the finish coat of smooth plaster as shown on the
Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

9.2 Where specified in the Drawings all internal plaster shall have an average 12
mm thick consisting of base coat of 1:6 cement sand mortar in grey cement
and finish coat of smooth plaster as shown on the Drawings and as directed
by the Engineer.

9.3 Textured Plaster

Wherever specified in the drawings external textured plaster shall consist of

1:2, one part white cement & 2 parts approved shade of marble chips zero
size mixed with approved pigment to achieve desired shade. Wherever
shown on drawings, groves shall be provided with aluminum U/Y channels.
The contractor shall prepare mockup samples of textured plaster for the
approval of Engineer. The plaster shall be applied with machines and the
final rough surface/texture/shade shall be as per the approved sample,
direction and approval of the Engineer.
 6521-4

10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

10.1 Rubbish and debris shall be removed as necessary to make way for work of
other trades and as directed by the Engineer. As each room or space is
completed all rubbish, debris, scaffolding and tools should be removed to
leave the room clean.

10.2 Prior to plastering all aluminum windows, finished metals should be covered
by sheet of plastic or tarpaulin to protect it from damage.

10.3 Protect finished plaster from injury by any source. Contractor shall also
protect walls, floors and work of other trades from plaster materials.

11. TOLERANCES

Surfaces of plaster work shall be finished with a true plane to correct line and level with
all angle and corners to a right angle unless otherwise specified and with walls and
reveals plumb and square.

Maximum permitted tolerances shall not exceed 3mm in 2 meter variation from plumb or
level in any exposed line or surface and 1.5 mm variation between planes of abutting
edges or ends.

12. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

12.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents,

no measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned
specified works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost
thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the
respective item of the Bill of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall include work
to be executed under these specification in any floor and at any height except
where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item of Bill of Quantities
and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim or claim any
compensation on this account.

12.1.1 Metal lath over reinforced concrete and masonry joint.

12.1.2 Joints, junctions, corners, beads, drip course edge, roundings,

and aluminum U/Y channels in groves. Etc.

12.1.3 More than one layer due to any unevenness in the finished
works and base coat plaster in stucco plaster including marble
chips/colour pigments.

12.1.4 Cutting & patching of all defective works.

12.1.5 Surface preparation, cleaning and protection as specified.

12.1.6 Marble chips & pigments in stucco plaster.

 6521-5

12.1.7 Roughning of first coat of plaster before application of 2nd coat

incase where overall required plaster thickness exceeds 12 mm.

12.2 Plain Plaster/Textured plaster

12.2.1 Measurement

Deductions shall not be made for ends of joints, beam posts,

etc., and openings not exceeding 0.5 square metre each and no
addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills, etc. of
these openings non for finishing the plaster around ends of
joints, beams posts, etc.

In case of opening of area exceeding 0.23 square metre each,

deduction shall be made for the openings and also no addition
shall be made for reveals jambs, soffits, sills, etc., of these
openings.

Measurement of acceptably completed works of plaster will be

made on the basis of number of square meter of the surface
area plaster as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the
Engineer.

12.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

plaster on the basis of unit rate per square meter quoted in the
Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the item.
 6600-1

SECTION - 6600

FLOOR AND WALL FINISHES

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specification consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in any floor and at
any height in connection with the installation of cement concrete floors and floor finishes
including bases, skirting and external surface treatments, complete in strict accordance
with this section of the specifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the
terms and conditions of the Contract.

2. MATERIAL

2.1 Cement

Cement shall be ordinary portland cement conforming to B.S. 12 or PS 232.

2.2 Sand

All fine sand shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer. The
grading shall conform to B.S 882 Grading Zone 1 and 2 of which the gradation
limits are as follows:

Percentage (by weight) passing

B.S. Sieve Grading Zone 1 Grading Zone 2

3/8" (9.53 mm) 100 100

3/16" (4.765 mm) 90-100 90-100
No. 7 60-95 75-100
No. 14 30-70 55-90
No. 25 15-34 35-59
No. 52 5-20 8-30
No. 100 0-10 0-10

2.3 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel or crushed stone,

angular or rounded in shape and shall have granular, crystalline or smooth
surface free from friable, flaky and laminated pieces, mica and shale. It shall not
contain matters injurious to concrete. All coarse aggregate shall conform to BSS
NO.882 and shall be graded as follows:
 6600-2

B.S. Sieve % Passing by weight

1" (25.40 mm) 100

3/4" (19.05 mm) 90-100
3/8" ( 9.53 mm) 20-55
3/16"(4.765 mm) 0-10

The aggregate shall be stored on properly constructed paving or as directed by

the Engineer.

There shall be a physical partition between the stockpiles of coarse and fine
aggregate. If required aggregates shall be washed and screened to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Sieve analysis of all the aggregates to be used in
the works shall be carried out as and when required by the Engineer. All
aggregate shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Any aggregates not found to be of the specified/approved standard shall be

rejected by the Engineer and all such rejected material shall be removed from
site with-out delay.

Floors, sub-base or base constructed with rejected aggregates shall be

dismantled and rebuilt at the expense of the Contractor.

2.4 Water

Water used for mixing concrete, curing or any other operation of the works
specified herein shall be fresh, clean and free from organic or inorganic matters
in solutions or in suspension. Only water of the approved quality shall be used
for all constructional purposes:

2.5 Ceramic and Porcelain tiles

Ceramic tiles shall be imported, premimum quality, plain white/coloured or

printed. Porcelain tiles shall be imported Italian or Spanish. The tiles shall be of
sizes as specified on the drawings and shall conform to BS 1281 as per
samples.

2.6 Cleaning Compound

The compound used for all cleaning of terrazzo shall be an approved neutral
chemical cleaner free from acid and alkali or any other material that will affect
the colour or otherwise damage the terrazzo and shall not affect the conductivity
of terrazzo floors.
 6600-3

2.7 Cement Concrete Tile

Cement Concrete tiles shall be of approved shade, shape and size, chequered,
mechanically vibrated and compressed type conforming to PS-531, as shown
on the drawings and approved by the Engineer. Only tile by the name of Grand
Stone manufactured by Grand Work or approved equivalent shall be used.

2.8 Terrazzo Glass Mosaic Tiles

Terrazzo glass mosaic tiles shall be first grade mechanically compressed type
conforming to PS-531. Tiles shall be 30x30xcm with a topping of 20 mm
thickness composed of 1:2 cement marble chips the colour quality of size of
chips shall be as per Engineer’s direction

2.9 Ironite Floor Hardener Topping

Ironite floor hardener topping shall be a graded, processed, non-oxidizing, non-

rusting, inert metallic aggregate compatible with ordinary Portland cement
designed for use in industrial pavings and floors to produce heavy duty, dense
and tough floor surfaces able to wear, abrasion and dusting.

3. CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING

The materials for C.C flooring shall be same as already specified under clause
3, "Materials".

3.1 Composition of Concrete

Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, sand, coarse, aggregate and

water, all well mixed and brought to the proper consistency. The Contractor shall
mix the ingredients as indicated on the Drawings. The proportions of the various
ingredients shall be determined from time to time during the progress of the
work and tests shall be made of samples of the aggregates and the resulting
concrete. The mix proportions and appropriate water-cement ratio will be
determined on the basis of the production of concrete having required
workability, density, impermeability, durability and required strength.

3.2 Mixing Concrete

The concrete ingredients shall be mixed in a batch mixer for not less than 1-1/2
minutes after all ingredients, except the full amount of water, are in the mixer.
The Engineer reserves the right to increase the mixing time when the charging
and mixing operations fail to produce a concrete batch in which the ingredients
are uniformly distributed and the consistency is not uniform. The concrete shall
be uniform in composition and consistency from batch to batch except when
changes in composition or consistency are required. Water shall be added prior
to, during and following the mixer charge. Excessive over-mixing requiring
addition of water to preserve the required concrete consistency will not be
permitted. The concrete ingredients shall be mixed by volumetric measurement
in purpose made boxes approved by the Engineer.
 6600-4

3.3 Construction

The base course of the floor shall comprise of stone ballast of 2 inches (approx:
50 mm) mesh size. The base course shall be thoroughly compacted by suitable
power rammers to the total consolidated thickness as shown on the Drawings
and as approved by the Engineer. The interstices shall be filled with smaller size
stones. The base course shall be blinded with sand and the whole surface
watered. Over the well compacted base course, a layer of concrete of the
required grade and thickness shall be laid, in panels of the sizes as indicated on
the Drawing and as approved by the Engineer.

After the C.C bed has been cured, as directed by the Engineer, it shall be
roughened and well watered before floor finishing is laid. The floor finish shall
comprise of cement concrete of required grade and shall be laid in panels to the
required thickness as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The concrete after laying will be thoroughly rammed and mortar worked up to
the top and smoothed with a steel trowel. The edge of each section into which
the floor is divided should be defined by wooden screeds of the approved width
and of a depth equal to the depth of the floor concrete.

Freshly placed concrete floor and completed floor portions as finished shall be
protected to prevent loss of water by covering with damp hessian, water proof
paper, damp sand or other approved material, and shall be kept constantly
damp for a period of four days or longer after concreting as directed by the
Engineer. The concrete shall be allowed to dry out slowly over a period of three
days after wet curing is completed.

The expansion joints shall be filled in with hot bitumen, of the approved grade,
as directed by the engineer.

4. INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORING

When setting out the tiles, care shall be taken to establish the correct elevation for the
floor. A gauge rod shall be used, indicating the overall measurement of a given number
of tiles with specified joint width to reduce cutting.

After the floor has been machine finished, it should be covered with white, non-staining
sand or rags to protect it while other work is being done. After removal, the floor shall be
thoroughly scrubbed.

4.1 General

The base shall be prepared by laying cement concrete of specified grade and of
thickness as shown on the drawings, or specified in the Bill of Quantities.

The curing period of the setting bed shall be as directed by the Engineer. As
large an area of setting bed shall be spread at one time as can be covered with
tiles before the mortar has set. Surplus mortar shall be removed. The thickness
of setting bed in any space shall not be less than 1/2".

Floor and wall surfaces to receive the tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt,
dust, oil and other objectionable matters. Tiles shall be laid out from the centre
line of each space in an outward direction and the pattern should be made
symmetrical with a minimum number of cut tiles as directed by the engineer.
 6600-5

Joints between the tiles shall be of uniform width. Tiles shall be cut with a
suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Tiles shall be laid
to the straight edges.

4.2 Ceramic/Porcelain Tiles

The ceramic/porcelain tiles shall be laid to the required lines, levels and grades
over a setting bed of cement sand mortar comprising of one part of cement and
4 parts of sand by volume and the joints filled with neat white or grey cement
including vertical and horizontal covers. The tile floor shall be kept wet for at
least 72 hours and no traffic should be allowed on the tiles during curing period.

4.3 Cement Concrete Tiles

The cement concrete tiles shall be laid to the required lines, levels and grades
over a setting bed of cement sand mortar comprising of one part of cement and
4 parts of sand by volume. The sides shall be buttered with cement mortar and
adjacent tiles laid in the same manner in the required pattern, with a thin joint in
proper level and line. The joints shall then be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush
and pointed with neat cement of the same colour as the tile.

Care shall be taken to see that full tiles are used as far as possible. Where this
is not possible, the edge tiles shall be neatly cut with an electric saw and the
edges rubbed smooth. In case of patterned tiles, the tile shall be laid in such a
way that the pattern ends symmetrically on two sides.

Cement concrete tiles shall be cured for 7 days with water and then thoroughly
cleaned and dried. Notwithstanding anything written above, the manufacturer’s
printed instructions regarding laying shall be strictly followed.

4.4 Terrazzo and Glass Mosaic Tiles Flooring

The tiles shall be sell soaked in water and kept in a vertical position to drain out
all surplus water. The bed over which the tiles would be laid shall be 25mm thick
cement sand mortar as specified by the Engineer. The cement sand mortar
shall be prepared and mixed with clean granular sand in the proportion of 1:2
and spread uniformly on the thoroughly wetted and moist surface. The tiles shall
be laid on this cement mortar slurry rises up in the joint. The tiles shall be laid in
the pattern as specified by the Engineer. The levels and lines shall be checked
with very fine twine and the defects removed then and there. After 3 or 4 days
the slurry from the joints shall be raked out and colored cement of required
shade shall be spread in the form of slurry to fill all joints. It shall be neatly wiped
out of the surface when still wet. After about 10 days the area shall be rubbed
and ground with Carborundum stone and the whole surface rendered smooth
and washed with plenty of water. After allowing to dry the surface shall be wax
polished. The finished surface shall not show any depressions in individual tiles
or undulations in the floor.
 6600-6

5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

5.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, no

measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified
works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities.

The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate
of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.

5.1.1 Loss and wastage of material due to consolidation, erosion and

settlement.

5.1.2 All type of joints (expansion, contraction and construction joint etc.).

5.1.3 Class ‘C’ cement concrete screed base and 1:4 cement sand mortar
under floor.

5.1.4 Rough plaster base under skirting / dado.

5.1.5 Finishing/grinding, washing & polishing works of ceramic, concrete,

terrazzo glass mosaic tile.

5.1.6 1:2 and 1:4 cement sand rough cast plaster.

5.1.7 Pigmented grouting.

5.1.8 Cleaning of tiles after installation.

5.2 Cement Concrete Floor

5.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of cement concrete floor

steel trowelled finish will be made on the basis of net actual area in
square meter laid in position as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.

5.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of cement

concrete floor steel trowelled finish on the basis of unit rate per square
meter quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.

5.3 Ceramic/Porcelain Tile Floor

6.3.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of ceramic/porcelain tile in

floor will be made on the basis of net actual area in square meter of floor
laid in position as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
 6600-7

6.3.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

ceramic/porcelain tile floor on the basis of unit rate per square meter
quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation for
all the works related to the item.

5.4 Ceramic/Porcelain Tile Dado/Skirting

5.4.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of ceramic/Porcelain tile in

dado/skirting will be made on the basis of net actual area in square
meter of dado/skirting laid in position as shown on the Drawing or as
directed by the Engineer.

5.4.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

ceramic/porcelain tile in dado/skirting on the basis of unit rate per square
meter quoted in the Bills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all cost
of cement, sand, mortar and shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the items.

5.5 Terrazzo and Glass Mosaic Tile Floor/skirting/dado

5.5.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of terrazzo and glass

mosaic tile in floor/skirting/dado will be made on the basis of net actual
area in square meter of floor laid in position as shown on the Drawing or
as directed by the Engineer.

5.5.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of terrazzo and

glass mosaic tile in floor/skirting/dado on the basis of unit rate per
square meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.

5.6 Porcelain Tile Band with Marble Gola

5.6.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of Porcelain Tile Band

with Marble Gola will be made on the basis of actual length in running
meter of Band provided and laid in position as shown on the Drawing or
as directed by the Engineer.

5.6.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of Porcelain

Tile Band with Marble Gola on the basis of unit rate per running meter
quoted in the Bills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all cost of
 6600-8

cement sand mortar and shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the items.

5.7 Glazed Ceramic Tile Motive

5.7.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of Glazed ceramic tile

motive with marble gola will be made on the basis of actual number of
Motive provided and fixed in position as shown on the Drawing or as
directed by the Engineer.

5.7.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of glazed

ceramic tile motive with marble gola on the basis of unit rate per number
quoted in the Bills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all cost of
cement, sand, mortar and shall constitute full compensation for all the
works related to the items.
 6700-1

SECTION - 6700

PAINTING

1. SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all materials,
plant, labour, equipment, appliances and performing all operations in any floor and at
any height in connection with surface preparation, mixing, painting concrete works,
gates, frames, walls, ceilings and all such surfaces as shown on the Drawings and/or as
directed by the Engineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with
detailed specifications as laid down herein.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of following British Standards are relevant to these specifications

wherever applicable.

2.1 BSI (British Standards Institution)

245 Specification for mineral solvents (white spirits and related

hydrocarbon solvents) for paints and other purposes.
2521 Lead-based priming paint for wood work.
2523 Lead based priming paint for iron and steel.
2569 Sprayed metal coatings.
4800 Paint colours for building purposes.
CP.231 Painting of building.
CP.3012 Cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces.

3. GENERAL

3.1 Except as otherwise specified, all painting shall be applied in conformity with
BS CP 231 "Painting of Building" as applicable to the work.

3.2 The Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damaged or defective
areas of shop-painted metal work and structural steel work. Metal surfaces
against which concrete is to be placed will be furnished shop-painted and
shall be cleaned prior to being embedded in concrete.

3.3 Except as otherwise specified all concrete and plastered surfaces are to be
painted.

3.4 The Engineer will furnish a schedule of colours for each area and surface. All
colours shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 Colours of priming coat (and body coat) where specified, shall be lighter than
those of finish coat. The Engineer shall have unlimited choice of colours.

3.6 Samples of all colours, and finishes shall be prepared in advance of

requirement so as not to delay work and shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval before any work is commenced. Any work done without such
approval shall be redone to the Engineer's satisfaction, without additional
expense to the Employer. Samples of each type of paint shall be on separate
 6700-2

12" x 12" x 1/8" tempered hard board panels. Manufacturer's colour chart
shall be submitted for colour specifications and selection.

4. MATERIALS

4.1 All materials shall be acceptable, proven, first grade products and shall meet
or exceed the minimum standards of reputable manufacturers as approved
by the Engineer.

4.2 Colours shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew-proof sun-proof, finely

ground in approved medium. Colours used on-plaster and concrete surfaces
shall be lime-proof. All materials shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

4.3 All synthetic enamel paints and primers for structural steel works, metal work
and wood works will be the best available of its type and shall be approved
by the Engineer prior to its procurement.

4.4 Approved quality Weather Shield/Weather Coat paint shall be used for
painting the exteriors of the structures or other surfaces where specified on
the drawings as directed by the Engineer.

4.5 The plastic emulsion paint, vinyl emulsion paint or similar as approved by the
Engineer shall be used for interior surfaces.

4.6 All material for Bitumen painting shall consist of Bitumen grade 10/20. It shall
be used for foundations or wherever recommended by the Engineer.

4.7 Only paints manufactured by ICI, Berger or approved equivalent shall be

used in this Project.

All material shall be delivered to site in their original unbroken containers or

packages & bear the manufacturer's name, label, brand & formula & will be
mixed and applied in accordance with his directions.

5. DELIVERY STORAGE AND CONTAINER SIZES

Paints shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers, which plainly show the type of
paint, colour (formula or specifications number) batch number, quantity, date of
manufacture, name of manufacturer and instructions for use. Pigmented paints shall be
supplied in containers not larger than 20 liters. All materials shall be stored under cover
in a clean storage space, which should be accessible at all times to the Engineer. If
storage is allowed inside the building, floors shall be kept clean and free from paint
spillage.

6. SURFACE PREPARATION

6.1 All oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale and any other foreign substance
shall be removed from the surface to be painted, polished and white washed
by the use of a solvent and clean wiping material. Following the solvent
cleaning, the surfaces shall be cleaned by scrapping, chipping, blasting, wire
brushing or other effective means as approved by the Engineer.
 6700-3

6.2 In the event the surfaces become otherwise contaminated in the interval
between cleaning and painting, recleaning will be done by the Contractor at
no additional cost.

6.3 Surfaces of stainless steel, aluminum, bronze, and machined surfaces

adjacent to metal work being cleaned or painted shall be protected by
effective masking or other suitable means, during the cleaning and painting
operations.

6.4 All the surfaces to be painted with approved quality paint shall be free from
dust, dirt, fungus, lichen, algae etc. Oil paint, varnish and lime wash should
always be removed by scraping and washing.

6.5 All surfaces to be bitumen painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of any

accretion, dust, dirt etc. by scraping, wire-brushing or as directed by the
Engineer. The surface shall be primed with a coat of asphalt oil used at the
rate of not less than 0.50 pound per square foot.

No work in this section shall be allowed until all surfaces or conditions have
been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

7. APPLICATION

7.1 All paint and coating materials shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition at the
time of application. All work shall be done in a workman like manner, leaving
the finished surface free from drips, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. All
paints shall be applied under dry and dust free conditions. Unless approved
by the Engineer paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the metal
or of the surrounding air is below 7 degrees centigrade. Surfaces shall be
free from moisture at the time of painting.

All primary paint shall be applied by brushing. The first coat of paint shall be
applied immediately after cleaning. When paint is applied by spraying,
suitable measures shall be taken to prevent segregation of the paint in the
container during painting operation.

Effective means shall be adopted for removing all free oil and moisture from
the air supply lines of the spraying equipment. Each coat of paint shall be
allowed to dry or harden thoroughly before the succeeding coat is applied.
Surfaces to be painted that will be inaccessible after installation shall be
completely painted prior to installation.

Coats of Weather Shield/Weather Coat paint shall be applied in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions or as directed by the Engineer.

Only as much material should be mixed as can be used up in one hour.

Over-thinning will not be permitted. After the first coat the surfaces will be
soaked evenly four or five times and the second coat shall be applied after
leaving for at least overnight.

7.2 Where shown on Drawings all exterior finishes shall be painted with Weather
Shield/weather coat paint in approved colours as per manufacturer's
specifications. The number of coats shall be as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
 6700-4

7.3 All wooden doors shall be painted with approved synthetic enamel paint as
per manufacturer's recommendation and instructions or after approval of the
Engineer.

7.4 Plastic emulsion paint, vinyl emulsion paint or matt enamel paint of the
approved make and shade shall be applied to surfaces as shown on
Drawings as per manufacturer's instructions. The number of coat shall be as
indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

7.5 Two coats of hot bitumen paint shall be applied to exposed concrete surfaces
in contact with earth. The first coat shall be allowed to dry for about six hours
before applying the second coat. During the operation of painting great care
should be taken to avoid air bubbles. The manufacturers instructions and
Engineer's directions shall be complied with.

8. JOB CONDITIONS

8.1 Observe manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum temperature

but do not apply paint or finish to any surface unless ambient temperature is
10 degree C or above and less than 43 degree C. No painting shall be done
above 90% relative humidity.

8.2 Place drop cloths to adequately protect all finished work.

8.3 Remove and replace all items of finish hardware, device plates, accessories,
lighting fixtures or other removable items.

8.4 In no case shall any finish hardware or other finished item that is already
fitted into place be painted, unless otherwise specified.

9. QUALITY ASSURANCE

All paint for any one surface shall be top quality, of one manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer. Deep tone accent colours shall be used and the unavailability of final coat
colours may be the basis for rejecting materials for any one surface.

10. SCHEDULE OF MEASUREMENT OF PAINT AREA:

10.1 Irrespective of prime coats and number of paint coats applied to exposed
painting surface area of column, walls, projections, ceilings, false ceilings and
other surfaces (Except gates, doors windows and ventilators) shall be
measured as per actual paint surface area for single time only and paid in
accordance with quoted rate of Bill of Quantities.

11. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

11.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in Contract Documents, no

measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified
works related to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof
shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the
respective items of Bill of Quantities.
 6700-5

The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall include work
to be executed under these specification in any floor and at any height except
where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item of Bill of Quantities
and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim or claim any
compensation on this account.

11.1.1 Preparatory works, including preparatory materials, scraping,

scratching, sand blasting, cleaning, prime coating, priming,
protection of finished works etc.

11.1.2 Polishing works, including preparatory materials, scraping,

cleaning, sanding etc.

11.1.3 Painting work on steel & wooden surfaces.

11.1.4 Before application of paint on existing surface the old paint

surface shall be removed existing paint, filling of cracks, surface
preparation and application of primer coat, if any.

11.2 Painting

11.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed respective type of

painting works will be made on the basis of net actual areas in
square meter of the surface painted as shown on the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.

11.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of

respective type of painting on the basis of unit rate per square
meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.
 6720-1

SECTION – 6720

ILLUMINATED SIGNS

1. SCOPE

The work covered under this section of the specification consist of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in
connection with supply, erection, installation and testing of illuminated signs work
complete, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable
drawings, and subject to the sterms and conditions of the Contract.

This section describes the minimum requirements for such a system.

The requirements for the system to be met by the Contractor shall include principally, but
are not limited to the following in accordance with this specification:

- The supply, manufacture, factory inspection and testing, packing, delivery to the
site, installation including provision of all necessary labour, equipment and
materials, testing including the provision of all test equipment and commissioning
of the complete system.

- The supply of all special tools and test equipment for maintenance of the system.

- Supporting equipment – including consoles, interconnecting cables, modems,

rectifiers, automatic voltage regulators, control panels, junction boxes, connectors,
etc., and all other distribution, amplification and termination equipment.

- All works and services to integrate, install and commission the complete system to
perform the required operational function.

- The supply of operation and maintenance documentation.

- The training of staff nominated by the Employer for the operation and maintenance
of the system.

- The supply of operational and maintenance spares.

- All other requirements specified in this Specification and associated documents.

2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 Engineering Design

Technical design of the system shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
However, the system shall be in strict accordance with these Specifications. It is
intended that standard component parts shall be used wherever possible to the
extent that they comply with these Specifications. All shop drawings or layout
drawings necessary of installation shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor
and copies are to be provided to the Engineer. Cable routing and interconnect
diagrams must be clearly defined and provided to the Engineer.
 6720-2

3.1 Modular Construction

Wherever possible throughout the system, modular design of equipment shall be

sued. Each module shall have test points to facilitate maintenance. Sufficient
space wall shall be provide for the use of test equipment and other tools without
difficulty or hazard. Where practicable, rests and stands have to be provided for
test equipment, tools and manuals. The points shall be arranged in a manner
reflecting the sequence of their cables and test points shall be fully identified and
labeled.

Maximum accessibility shall be provide for those component requiring the most
attention. Sensitive adjustments shall also be protected to prevent inadvertent
disturbance. Displays and control system must be of modular construction and in
case of failure of one unit the rest of the system shall not be easily removable.

3.1 Expandability

The system shall be modular in design and construction in both software and
hardware. It shall permit expansion in capacity and functional ability mainly by
adding modules rather than modifying or substituting those already implemented.

Similar equipment units shall be interchangeable as far as practicable. Basic to

these requirements is that future expansion of the system shall be possible without
requiring of the installation or major changes so that expansion shall be possible
without interruption to the operations of the system once it has been
commissioned.

2.4 Flexibility

Notwithstanding the specified design requirements, changes in operational

requirements are unavoidable in future. The system shall be designed and
constructed to meet the requirements with regard to flexibility by permitting:

- Changes in system structure.

- Re-configuration of the system in order to adapt the number of inputs and

outputs of the system.

- Provisions for addition of modules to make possible increases in system

capacity, storage capacity, display capacity and introduction of new
functions and equipment.
The Contractor shall describe in his offer how the above objectives can be
achieved.

2.5 Presentation of Information

In fulfilling its basic functions, the system shall provide timely, relevant and
unambiguous information to its users. The displayed information shall be legible,
taking into consideration the environmental conditions as regards artificial light, day
light, etc.
 6720-3

2.6 Operational Availability

In view of the nature of its functions, the system shall have high operational
availability and reliability. Wherever possible, the system shall use equipment
which is proven, off-the-shelf and commercially available.

3.1 Constructional Design

All equipment must withstand frequent use and manipulation during 24-hours
operation without appreciable wear and tear.

The noise level from any unit must be minimum.

Dimensions and weights shall be kept to a minimum.

2.8 Environmental Conditions

All equipment shall be suitable for the climatic conditions prevailing at the site of
installation.

3.1 Maintainability and Reliability

System design must be such as to facilitate easy installation and maintenance.

Interconnecting cables and wires must be kept to a minimum.

Moving parts shall be limited to a minimum.

The Contractor shall show that all the equipment will be reliable and require
minimum maintenance.
The system must be designed for auto-diagnosis of faults.

The Contractor shall state places where similar equipment has been installed.

3. QUALITY, STANDARD PRODUCTS, SUBMITTALS

3.1 Quality

The Contractor shall execute the work in accordance with the highest standards
available, and comply with the latest editions whether specifically mentioned in
these documents or not.
Only material complying with the latest VDE 0100, 0713 and DIN 40040, 41110
regulations shall be used. The quality has to be proved by data given by the
producer or type specification.
The responsibility of the successful Contractor shall include rectification of any
errors or omissions contained in this Specification to ensure a complete and fully
operational system suited for the stated location.
 6720-4

3.2 Standard Products

Materials furnished under this Specification shall be standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall
be the manufacturer's latest standard design. Capacities shall not be less than
those indicated and equipment shall fit in the assigned spaces.
All equipment, components and parts, and the materials used therein shall be new
and of the highest quality. No old or re conditioned parts or equipment shall be
used. All materials and equipment supplied under this Specification shall be new
and the best grade; the equipment shall be installed in a practical and first-class
manner.
It shall be complete in operation, nothing being omitted in the way of labour and
materials required to make it so, although not specifically shown or mentioned
herein, and that it will be delivered in good working order, complete and perfect in
every respect.
Evidence of a quality assurance and quality control system adequate to ensure
the highest quality and reproducibility of the system equipment shall also be
provided. The quality control program shall provide for adequate factory inspection
and testing of equipment to ensure high levels of quality. Adequate procedures
shall be incorporated to ensure quality products (factory acceptance tests)
witnessed by the Engineer.
3.3 Power Supply
The equipment shall operate at 230 V AC plus/minus 20 %, 50 Hz.
Energy consumption and heat dissipation must be minimal. The Contractor shall
give details of the power needed for the system and the capacity to be connected,
acceptable tolerances in voltage and frequency variations shall also be given. At
tendering, the Contractor shall submit a principal diagram showing the
interconnection of all the pieces of equipment and the number of cores and sizes
of cables to be used.
3.4 Completeness
It is specifically intended and must be agreed to by the Contractor that
anything (whether material or labour) which is usually furnished as a part
of such equipment as is hereinafter called for (and which is necessary
for its proper completion and best operation) shall be furnished as a
part of the work under this Specification without additional cost or time
whether or not shown in detail on the drawings or described in detail in
the Specifications. This provision is in consideration of the fact that, in
many cases, the use of apparatus of different makes may be considered,
which differ in detail from that described (although intended to fulfill the
same functions).
The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment required for,
installation, tests, and acceptance of the system.
3.5. Equipment List
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list
of material and equipment to be i n c o r p o r a t e d in the work. This list
s h a l l include at least the manufacturer's name, catalogue numbers,
dimensions, cuts and such other descriptive data as may be required.
 6720-5

No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time.

Approval of material will be based on manufacturer's published data
submitted with the list; approval of materials and equipment will be
tentative and subject to submission of complete shop drawings
indicating compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.6 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for written
approval before ordering materials or commencing work:
Detail Drawings and/or Shop Drawings
Manufacturer's Data
Assembly and Installation Drawings
Coordination Drawings
Design Analysis and Calculations for Transom, Soffit, Floor and Ceiling
Mounted Substructure Supports
Graphic Layout Drawings
Typical graphic layout drawings of each panel showing English and Urdu
words and p i c t o g r a p h s arranged according to graphic design provided
shall be submitted for review prior to application. All layouts shall be
shown in full scale.
. Samples
Submit three samples of each of the following:
a) 300 mm x 300 mm squares of each type and colour of acrylic sheet used.
Acrylic sheet samples will be reviewed for integral colours, textures and
colours of applied finishes.
b) 300 mm long sections of all extruded shapes used. Samples will be
reviewed for extrusion designs and colours and textures of finishes.
c) 300 mm long sections of stainless steel tubing.
d) 300 mm x 300 mm squares of each type and colour of aluminium panels
used. Aluminium samples will be reviewed for integral colours, textures and
colours of applied finishes.
e) Working samples of all operating and exposed hardware and extrusions.

Mock-Up
a) General: Prepare a mock-up of one exterior sign suitable for visual
examination and compliance with performance requirements.
b) Test: Conduct the following tests in accordance with the specified
standards and prepare Iaboratory reports of the test results:
- Duct Penetration Test : UL 844
- Rain Tightness Test : UL 844
- Temperature Test : UL 844
 6720-6

- Test for Water Penetration

under Static Pressure : ASTM E 331
- Test for Water Penetration :
under Dynamic Pressure : AAMA TM 1

Whenever required tests have resulted in unsatisfactory results, including

performance below the requirements S r ,ecified, then the Contractor shall
repair and revise the mock-up as necessary and as directed and re-conduct
the tests. Repeat until satisfactory results are obtained. Make changes in
the final shop drawings and in the construction of the system to correspond
with the mock-up revisions needed to obtain satisfactory performance in the
specified tests.
c. Prepare a mock-up of each interior sign suitable for visual examination and
compliance with performance requirements.

4. MATERIAL AND PRODUCTS

4.1 General
Only material complying with the latest VDE/DIN regulations may be used. The
quality has to be shown by manufacturer or type specification. Where not
otherwise specified material shall be as mentioned in this section.
Colours which undergo the powder coating process on anodized and galvanized
parts must first be provided as a sample on each individual part and be authorized
before production.
4.2 Material
- Fixing seals, etc., are to be included for whether specifically mentioned or
not.
- Metal products for making components must be either prefinished, or
suitable to receive the specified finishes.
All glass and plastic sheets to be of accurate size with clean undamaged
true edges and surfaces which are not disfigured, and of approved material.
- Sheets to be one piece per panel.
- Coloured sheets to be uniformly coloured.
- Clear float and polished plate glass to comply with BS 952.
- PVC sheet transparent, 3 mm thick, to show colour as indicated.
PVC sheet, 3 mm thick, to neutral colour as indicated.
- Polycarbonate sheet clear, 1.5 mm thick.
- Polycarbonate sheet clear, 3 mm thick.
- Polycarbonate sheet clear, 6 mm thick.
- Acrylic glass plate: best quality, Rohm white 072, or equal approved.
− Laminated Melamine: to BS 3794
 6720-7

− Reinforced thermoplastic sheet: 3 mm thick to specified colour.

− Plywood: to BS 1455. Bonding WBP grade of BS 1203.
− Steel: to BS 4360.
- Galvanized Sheet Steel: to BS 2989.
- Aluminum: to BS 1470-1575 as applicable.
The aluminum plates shall be clear anodized, powder coated, and fire lacquered.
The knuckle joints are zinc die-cast, matt chromed, powder coated.
The aluminum extrusions, knuckle joints and aluminum plates shall be clear
anodized, powder coated, fire lacquered.
- Aluminum Bronze: shall be of a composition certified suitable for its
purpose, supplied by an approved source.
- Manganese Bronze: shall be of a composition certified suitable for its
purpose, supplied by an approved source.

4.3 Sign Casing

The casing consists of a surrounding frame, sharp-edged ALU special
profile with a thickness of 2 mm. The alloy is ALM Si 0.5 F . 22 thermally
polymerized. The four sides of the casing are mitred and connected via
corner connection. 8 pieces of corner connectors are needed per
transparent. The corner connector consists of ALU-angles 80/80/18 mm,
with a width of 29 mm and are riveted with blind rivets - 4 per angle - to the
casing. A front side will be screwed to the casing with 4 nickeled "Linsen
Senko" screws M 6 12 (VA), removable for maintenance purposes. The
back consists of ALU-sheet ALMG semi-hard, 2 mm thick. It will be
pushed into the groove of the casing as well as an equalizer frame and is
attached to the latter by the same blind rivets, All rivets have to be fixed ,
symmetrically with the same intermediate space. Measurements and
construction see also plan scheme.
a. Colour
Casing and all fixings of all sides - as well all inside sheets - white
mat with artificial resin annealing varnish pure white RAL 9010,
varnished in accordance with material specifications.
4.4 Sign Faces
Sign faces consist of acryl glass.
- Material: plexiglass, 4.7 mm thick W 7328, white or approved
equal.
- Fabricate in accordance with plexiglass sign manual PL-871.
- Finish where required with acryl, or approved equal, acrylic paint
matching the colour sample in accordance with plexiglass sign
manual PL-871.
Transparent: The transparent consists of acryl glass, 3 mm thick, Roehm
white and has a 1-4 colour paint.
 6720-8

The Fond: The acryl glass has a blue, green or silver print. The Urdu text
appears white, transparent, in the coloured section, the English text is
black on the coloured section. Type is Univers 55 in capital and small
letters. The indication arrow will be placed left or right of the elements,
depending on the indication or walk direction and appears white without
frame, transparent on a silver background.
The drawing of the pictograph is also illuminated from the back on a colored
section transparent. Distribution and spatial arrangement in accordance with
design norms.

4.5 Graphics and Signs

Graphics and signs are to be designed by the Engineer and will be delivered to the
successful Tenderer.

A. Signs

a) Building lettering shall be illuminous.

b) Direction signs shall be illuminated from behind.

c) Signs at doors shall not be illuminated.

d) Small module for standard signs shall be 270/270 mm.

e) Large module for standard signs shall be 540/540 mm.

f) Building entry module shall be 1,080 mm.

g) Terminal key plan shall be 2 mm thick aluminium sheet, enamel light

grey. Screen printed in 6 colours, boxed up in aluminIum to white
(RAL 9010) square hollow section enamel supports with welded on
round foot plates.

h) Standard size version A : 270 x 1,620 mm

i) Standard size version B : 540 x 3.240 mm

j) Standard size version C : 1,080 x 6,480 mm

4.6 Accessories

Fastenings to be supplied by manufacturer of component being fixed. Fastenings

shall be of the same metal as the item being fixed, with a match coating or finish.

Wood screw: to BS 1210, or appropriate DIN.

Bolts, screws & nuts: to the appropriate BS, or appropriate DIN.

Machine screws & nuts: to BS 1981 or BS 4183, or appropriate DIN.

 6720-9

Self-tapping screws: to BS 4174, or appropriate DIN.

Anchor bolts: to suit.

Rivets: to BS 4620, 641, 1109, 4895 as appropriate.

Captive fasteners: approved proprietary type.

Synthetic rubber gaskets: grommets etc. to BS 4255:pt 1.

Distance pieces and location blocks for glazing to be plasticized polyvinyl

chloride(PVC):

- Thickness equal to specified space between glass and rebate bead of cleat.

- Depth to give not less than 6 mm cover of sealant.

Setting blocks of lead or unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC).

Hot rolled steel bars: to BS 449.

Cold rolled steel section : to BS 2994 made from steel to BS 1449: pt 1.

Steel tubes: to BS 1775, Ref. CDS 20.

Coating/jointing materials:

- Bedding compound: Type BUTYL of approved manufacturer.

- Glazing compound: of an approved manufacturer. Colour to approval.

- Polyurethane primer: Approved proprietary type for steel.

- Polyurethane coating: Coloured (for steel); to be approved.

- Polyurethane primer: Approved proprietary type for aluminium.

- Polyurethane coating: Coloured (for aluminium) approved proprietary type.

Electrical accessories:

- Lighting control gear: To BS 2818 controlling individual tubes.

- Starting circuit: Quick start.

- Fluorescent tubes: Warm white with bi-pin caps. Lengths and numbers to suit
Size of units.

- Electric cable:PVC insulated cable to BS 6004. Heat resisting for continuous

operation at 100 degree centigrade.

- Emergency unit: Nickel-cadmium battery. Rechargeable time 24 hours. Operating

temperature 50 degree centigrade. Continuous operation to BS 5266.
 6720-10

5. EXECUTION

5.1 Inspection

Examine the areas and conditions under which signs are to be installed. Do not
Proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or
conflicts In work have been resolved.

5.2 Preparation

Coordinate installation and coordination drawings for the installation of

substructure supports and anchors which are to be attached to existing building
elements. Coordinate diagrams and installation drawings for the connection of
electrical components to existing electrical service stubouts and junction boxes.

5.3 Installation

a. General

Comply with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations for the

installation of internally illuminated signs. Install work in accordance with
the manufacturer’s written instructions.

b. Positioning

Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack. Anchor
securely in place. Separate aluminium and other corrodible metal surfaces
from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with
other materials.

c. Defects

Do not install defective component parts including warped, bowed, dented,

abraded, broken or edge damage. If members have been damaged during
installation or thereafter, remove and replace before the time of final
acceptance.

d. Finish

Do not cut, trim, weld or braze component parts in any manner which
would damage the finish, decrease the strength or result in visual
imperfection or a failure in performance of the sign. Return component
parts which require alteration to the shop for refabrication or for
replacement by new parts.

e. Installation

Install signs and component parts level, plumb and to line with uniform
joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-corrosive shims, anchors,
fasteners, spacers and fillers. Use erection equipment which will not mar or
stain finished surfaces or damage the component parts.
 6720-11

f. Adjust and Lubricate

Properly adjust and lubricate operating hardware for required operation.

5.4 Erection Tolerances

5.4.1 General Tolerances

Limit variations from plumb, level or dimensioned angle to the following:

a) 3mm maximum deviation in any vertical setting height.

b) 3mm maximum deviation in any horizontal setting of an entire sign

length.

5.4.2 Location Tolerances

For any one sign at any location, limit variations from location (theoretical
calculated positions in plan or elevation based on established floor lines
and column lines), including variations from plumb and level, to 10 mm total
maximum deviation.

5.4.3 Offset Tolerances

For adjoining and consecutive sign panels which form planes continuous
runs and profiles, limit offsets in the end-to-end and edge-to-edge
alignments to 2 mm maximum offset in any flush alignment. This limitation
includes any panels which are:

a) to be 15 mm or less out-of-flush,

b) separated 50 mm or less by a reveal or protrusion in the plane of

the wall.

5.5 Electrical Installation

- Illuminated signs to be lit by fluorescent tube mains voltage lamps

operated by control gear fitted within the sign box.

- Illuminated levels for all sizes and types of illuminated signs are to be
matched.

- Main electrical wiring up to the sign to be supplied and installed by the

contractor leaving sufficient length of wiring for final connection at the sign
installation to terminals of approved design within the sign casing. No wiring
shall be visible. Wiring to signs shall be concealed in the suspension
hangers or supports.

- Switch able signs shall be switch able from a console within the station
control room.
 6720-12

- The installation in the transparent has to be made in accordance with the

newest regulations of VDE 0100. Per transparent, a fluorescent lamp or more
of type Osram L 38-25 (alternatively Tungsram with the same capacity) is
needed and installed with two equivalent sockets between two web plates.
Throttle condensator and starter have to be arranged clearly and easily
accessible on the fastener. The fluorescent lamps have to be compensated or
connected in DUO. The transparents are supplied with separate cables. For
that purpose, double clamps, NRK line-up clamps (terminals) for continuous
wiring have to be provided for, which are fixed inside of the transparents.
Double use of the clamps is prohibited. The internal wiring of the transparent,
as well as input and outout ducts have to be fixed with cable clamps. Care
must be taken to ensure that all installation parts are easily accessible for
maintenance purposes. It is prohibited to lead dismantled cables through
pendulous metal conduits.

- The Contractor shall be responsible for planning, installing and commissioning

of all cables, wiring and associated inter connections required for all
equipment, including outside cables connecting the main building to remote
building location.

5.6 Ancillary Equipment

The Contractor shall be responsible for including all equipment and services
required to provide a fully functional system in accordance with the system
purpose, functions and intents described in these documents, even if not expressly
stated.

Typical ancillary equipment and services shall include, but not be limited to:

_ Installation tools and test equipment

_ Installation spare parts

_ Structural support design responsibility

5.7 Protection

Prevent distortion of components during transit, handling and storage.

Prevent finished surfaces from rubbing together.

Prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement.

Retain protective coverings in position and keep dry.

Provide temporary protective strips and covers for protection during handling and
fixing.

Retain protective coverings in place during fixing wherever practicable.

 6720-13

Provide additional protection as necessary to prevent marking of surfaces which

will be visible in completed work.

Remove protection on completion.

6. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, no
measurement specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills of
Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted
unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.
6.1.1 Submittals of detail drawing and / or shop drawings, manufacturer’s data,
assembly and installation drawings and graphic layouts.
6.1.2 Mock-up & samples
6.1.3 Hardwares for installation.
6.1.4 Cleaning & protection

6.2 Illuminated Signs

6.2.1 Measurement
Measurement shall be made for acceptable measured quantity of each type
of illuminated signs supplied and installed by the Contractor as a complete
unit as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
6.2.2 Payment
Payment shall be made for acceptable measured quantity of illuminated
signs on the basis of unit rate per number quoted in the Bill of Quantities &
shall constitute full compensation for constructing, supplying, installing,
connecting, testing and completion of each type of illuminated sings
including all metal works, two ply GRP casing over epoxy painted mild
steel frame, acrylic sheet blank panels, screen printed film with message,
complete with fluorescent tubes, control gear, internal wiring with heat
resistant cable, rechargeable Nickel cadium batteries and all other
accessories as required.
ELECTRICAL
 SIALKOT INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
TEMPORARY DOMESTIC BAGGAGE CLAIM HALL

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sr.
Sections Descriptions Page No.
No.

1. 8001 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

ELECTRICAL WORKS 8001-1 TO 8001-11

2. 8132 LT SWITCHBOARDS & SUB MAIN

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 8132-1 TO 8132-07

3. 8133 LT DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 8133-1 TO 8133-05

4. 8150 LIGHT FIXTURES 8150-1 TO 8150-06

5. 8212 LOW TENSION CABLES 8212-1 TO 8212-06

6. 8220 WIRING ACCESSORIES 8220-1 TO 8220-04

7. 8230 CONDUITS AND PIPES 8230-1 TO 8230-06

8. 8240 EARTHING 8240-1 TO 8240-05

9. 8250 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 8250-1 TO 8250-05

10. 8290 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 8290-1 TO 8290-11

11. 8312 STRUCTURED CABLING 8312-1 TO 8312-13

12. 8331 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 8331-1 TO 8331-06

13. 8335 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM 8335-1 TO 8335-04

14. 8341 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 8341-1 TO 8341-05

15. 8371 CABLE ANTENNA TV SYSTEM 8371-1 TO 8371-03

 8001-1

SECTION - 8001

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

1.0 SCOPE

The works related to the electrical & communication systems, which are included
in the scope of this Contract, are shown on the Drawings, stated in the
Specifications and Bill of Quantities and explained in these specifications. The
works shall broadly include but not limited to the following:

- Internal Electrification works

- Power Distribution System including cable connection to existing MDS
- LT Distribution Board
- L.T. Cables
- Light fixtures
- Earthing & Lightning Protection System
- Miscellaneous Items / works to complete systems / works
- Structured Cabling
- Fire Alarm System
- Closed Circuit Television System
- Public Address System
- Cable Antenna TV System

The Contractor shall also be responsible to supply any other equipment not
specifically mentioned in these Documents but which is necessary for proper
operation of the system as intended in the scope of this Contract. The Contractor
shall solely be responsible for ensuring proper functional requirements of various
equipments and shall be responsible for furnishing any additional piece of
equipment and for making modification in the equipment as desired and/or
approved by the Engineer to achieve proper co-ordination with various
equipments offered in the bid and also with those installed by others.

2.0 RULES & REGULATIONS

The entire electrical installation/work shall be carried out by licensed Contractor,

authorized to undertake such work under the provisions of the Electricity Act
1910 and The Electricity Rules 1937 as adopted and modified upto date by the
Government of Pakistan.

All works shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition of the
Regulations of the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by the Institute of
Electrical Engineers-London, the Contract Documents, The Electricity Rules
1937 and bye-laws that are in force from time to time. Any discrepancy between
these Specifications and any other rules and regulations shall be brought to the
notice of Engineer for his instructions and the decision of the Engineer shall be
final and conclusive.

The Contractor shall be responsible for completing all formalities and submitting
the test certificates as per prevailing rules and regulations, and shall have the
installation passed by the Government Electric Inspector of that region. All
requirements of the Electric Inspector and the electric supply company (WAPDA)
shall be complied with.
 8001-2

3.0 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

All material and equipment supplied and installed shall be designed,

manufactured and tested to meet the following ambient conditions unless
specifically stated otherwise for any material/equipment.

Maximum indoor ambient temperature : 45 Degree Celcius

Minimum indoor ambient temperature : Zero Degree Celcius
Maximum outdoor ambient temperature : 50 Degree Celcius
Minimum outdoor ambient temperature : -5 Degree Celcius
Maximum Relative humidity : 100 Percent (dry bulb at
43 Degree Celcius)
Maximum Altitude of project : 240 metres above the
mean sea level
4.0 STANDARDS

The latest standards, codes and recommendations of reputable institutions shall

be applicable for the material and equipment specified herein and for installation
work. Such organizations to be BSS, VDE, IEC, NFPA etc. In case the
Specifications laid down herein differ from those given in the standards, then the
equivalent or better specifications shall govern. Wherever applicable the
equipment shall also conform to the requirements of Pakistan Standard
Institution (PSI).

Contractor shall maintain at the site office one copy of the standards / codes /
recommendations as applicable to the works and will furnish the same as and
when required by the Engineer / Employer.

5.0 SYSTEM DATA

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, all equipment and material shall be

designed to operate satisfactorily with the following minimum requirements
without any de-rating.

a) Voltage rating of equipment : LT: 400 V, 3 phase + 10%

230 V, 1 phase + 10%

b) Frequency : 50 Hz + 2 Hz

In general, the electrical colour coding of distribution boards, control panels,

desks etc., shall be in accordance with the respective IEC Recommendations.

Live parts of electrical connections shall be colour coded according to IEC 446
as follows:

Conductor Coding Colour

Designation Alphanumeric

A.C. Network Phase 1 L1 red

Phase 2 L2 yellow

Phase 3 L3 blue

Neutral N black
 8001-3

D.C. Network Positive L+ white

Negative L- black

Earthing Protective Earth PE green/yellow

Earth E green/yellow

Control Cables

The Control Cables shall be manufactured according to specifications for L.T.

Cables. The Control Cables shall be of multi-core, PVC insulated type
withstanding without deterioration the conditions prevailing at the place of
installation. The cross section of cable shall be as per the requirement of the
system.

All the cores should be numbered and/or colour coded or otherwise properly
identified. At-least 20% spare cores shall be provided in all Control Cables.

No separate payment is admissible for supplying, installing, testing and

commissioning of control cables and is deemed to have been included in the
BOQ rates of the respective equipment.

Clearance between power, communication and control cables shall be kept as

per requirements laid down by NEC800, NFPA 70 and EN50174-2.

6.0 EQUIPMENT

6.1 IP Degree of Protection

The equipment shall have IP degree of protection as follows, unless

mentioned other wise:

- IP 42 for indoor areas

- IP 54 for indoor damp areas
- IP 65 for outdoor areas

If properly rated equipment is not available, the Contractor shall provide

field enclosures to attain the required IP degree of protection. Necessary
cooling/exhaust fans and / or anti condensate heaters shall also be
provided for the enclosure if necessary. No separate payment shall be
made to attain the required IP degree of protection.

6.2 Identification & Labeling

All devices, meters cabling, wiring and auxiliaries shall be properly

labeled for identification. Labeling of equipment shall be done by means
of flameproof material using indelible ink/marking. The labeling shall be
such as to ensure uniformity and shall facilitate study of control diagrams/
drawings during operation and maintenance.

All labeling shall be of suitable size to be visible from the operating

conditions/positions at site.
 8001-4

7.0 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR

The shop drawings and/or technical data to be furnished by the Contractor for
each electrical equipment shall include, but not limited to the following:

(a) Structural drawings showing foundations, RCC details, dimensional plans,

elevation and sections on a suitable scale.

(b) Electrical drawings showing:

- Line diagrams of LT distributions boards with detailed wiring

diagrams, elevations / internal component layout and other
standard details.

- LV cabling; Grounding / Earthing including all cable routing and

support details.

- Installation details of all equipments.

- Complete bidding drawings with necessary execution details such

as no. of wires, size of conduit, etc.

(c) Communication systems drawings showing:

- Schematic / line diagram of Fire Alarm System, Structured cabling

and CCTV System with detailed description of each PCB cards
installed in the panel / rack / cabinet.

- Software description and any other detail required to demonstrate

that each system has been coordinated and will properly function
as a system.

- Installation details of all equipment and equipment relationship to

other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and
operation.

(d) Material / Sample submittal

- The Contractor shall provide the samples / material submittal for

approval of the Engineer, enclosing the technical literature and
manufacturer's characteristic data with the description of materials
and weights of all equipment as instructed by the Engineer.

At least three (3) copies of the shop drawings and/or technical data of the
equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for checking and approval.

Works shall only be executed after approval of shop drawings and

material/sample submittals.

8.0 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer in properly bound form six (6) copies
of manufacturer's instruction manuals for installation, testing, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the specified equipment including manuals of
spare parts and tools of the equipment and one set of original and branded
 8001-5

backups in form of DVD / CD / floppy etc. of all main and complementary

software installed and/ or as required for each system. At least two copies of the
documents shall be submitted in original. The installation instructions shall be
submitted 2 weeks prior to commencement of installation of each equipment, and
operation and maintenance instructions at the time of commissioning while
backup software shall be provided at the time of training to operation and
maintenance staff. If the Contractor fails to provide the documents and backup
software’s the Engineer shall withhold issuance of requisite certificates and
deduct suitable amount from the payments to the Contractor.

The Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of each sub-contractor installing equipment and
systems, and of the nearest service representative for each item of equipment
and each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets.
The Contractor shall update all manuals to include modifications made during
installations check out, and acceptance.

9.0 GUARANTEE

The Contractor shall furnish written guarantee of the manufacturer or supplier

with respect to satisfactory performance of each equipment. Guarantee shall be
given for replacement and repair of part or whole of the equipment, which may be
found defective in material or workmanship. The guarantee shall cover the
duration of Defects Liability Period as defined in the Conditions of Contract. This
guarantee shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and he will be fully
responsible for the repair or replacement of any defective material in time,
so as not to cause any undue delay in carrying out the repairs and/or
replacements.

10.0 ASSOCIATED CIVIL WORKS

Except where separately stated in the Bill of Quantities the cost of all civil works
associated with any BOQ item of electrical works, such as excavation and
backfilling of earth, compaction of the earth, foundation pads, thrust boring,
chiseling, making openings, etc. shall deemed to be included in the price
quoted against respective items. No separate payment for such works will be
made. Such works will also include repair of any damage to civil works caused
by the Contractor during electrical installation.

11.0 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - GENERAL

The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment required
to install, connect, test and commission all electrical equipment specified herein,
whether or not such equipment is furnished by him or by others.

For all equipment to be installed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall supply
and install all erection materials such as foundation bolts, washers, nuts, etc. as
required and without any additional costs.

The Contractor shall set out the works himself as per Specifications and
Drawings and shall properly position the equipment on specified
foundation/location. In general, the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
shall be followed. Any defect or faulty operation of equipment due to the
Contractor not following the manufacturer's instructions shall be corrected and
repaired by the Contractor at his own cost.
 8001-6

For any deviation from the working drawings deemed necessary due to site
conditions, the Contractor shall submit the details and obtain the Engineer
approval before starting such works.

12.0 FACTORY TESTS

All type and routine tests on LT distribution boards, Low tension cables, F.A,
CCTV/P.A and all other equipment shall be performed at the manufacturer's
works in the presence of the Engineer and the Employer or their representative.
Type tests may be waived off in case test certificates are submitted as certified
by an Engineer approved standard laboratory of international repute; but merely
producing the type test certificates will not relieve the manufacturer to carry out
the required standard/routine tests.

The Contractor shall submit the test procedure to the Engineer for approval
before carrying out the test.

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer about the date and time of test of each
equipment at least two weeks in advance. This shall, however, be done after the
Contractor has got the test procedures duly approved by the Engineer. The
witnessing of test by the Engineer and the Employer shall not absolve the
Contractor from his responsibility for the proper functioning of the equipment, and
for furnishing the guarantees referred to in clause 9.0. All test results shall be
supplied in quadruplicate. All expenses for carrying out the tests by the Engineer
and the Employer to witness shall be borne by the Contractor and deemed to
have been included in the tender bid. Provision for at least two person’s visit for
Factory Acceptance Tests shall be made to include one representative each from
the Employer and the Consultant/Engineer. The contractor shall undertake all
formalities as may be required for the Engineer or his representative to enable
him make the visit for the Factory Test.

13.0 TESTING - GENERAL

13.1 Scope

Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall perform field

tests on all equipment, cables, materials and systems. All tests shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer or his representative for the
purpose of demonstrating equipment or system compliance with
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval
complete details of tests to be performed describing the procedure, test
observations and expected results.

The Contractor shall furnish all tools, instruments, test equipment,

materials, etc., and all qualified personnel required for the testing,
setting and adjustment of all electrical equipment and material including
putting the same into operation.

All tests shall be made with proper regard for the protection of the
personnel and equipment and the Contractor shall be responsible for
adequate protection of all personnel and equipment during such tests.
The cost of any damages or rectification work due to any accident during
the tests shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor.
 8001-7

The Contractor shall record all test values of the tests made by him on all
equipment. Four (4) copies of all test data and results certified by the
Engineer shall be given to the Engineer for record purposes. These shall
also include details of testing method, testing equipment, diagrams, etc.

The witnessing of any tests by the Engineer does not relieve the
Contractor of his guarantees for materials, equipment and workmanship,
or as any other obligations of Contract.

13.2 L.T Distribution Boards

Each circuit breaker shall be operated electrically and mechanically. All

interlocks and control circuits shall be checked for proper connections in
accordance with the wiring diagrams given by the manufacturer.

The Contractor shall properly identify the phases of all distribution boards
and cables for connections to give proper phase sequence. Trip circuits
shall be checked for correct operation and rating of equipment served.
The correct size and function of fuses disconnect switches, number of
interlocks, indicating lights, alarms and remote control devices shall be in
accordance with approved manufacturer drawings. Nameplates shall be
checked for proper designation of equipment served. Protective relays
shall be tested and set at site prior to commissioning of the equipment.

13.3 Insulation Resistance Test

Insulation resistance test shall be made on all electrical equipment by

using a meggar of 500 volts for circuits upto 250 volts and 1000 volt for
circuits between 250 and 500 volts. The exact voltage shall be as advised
by the equipment manufacturer unless otherwise advised by the
Engineer.

The insulation resistance values of cables, transformer, switchgears,

etc., shall be as per BSS, IEEE, NEC, ICEA and Pakistan Electricity
Rules.

Before making connections at the ends of each cable run or joint between
cables, the insulation resistance test of each cable section shall be made.
Each conductor of a multi-core cable shall be tested individually with each
of the other conductor of the group and also with earth. If insulation
resistance test readings are found to be less than the specified minimum
in any conductor, the entire cable shall be replaced and tests repeated on
new cable. If cable joint is provided, then each cable section shall be
tested, and joint made only after the tests have been made satisfactorily.
Finally the completed cable length including the joints shall be tested.

Insulation tests shall be made between open contacts of circuit breakers,

switches and between each phase and earth.

If the insulation resistance of the circuit under test is less than the
specified value, the cause of the low reading shall be determined and
removed. Corrective measures shall include dry-out procedure by means
of heaters, if equipment is found to contain moisture. Where corrective
measures are carried out, the insulation resistance readings shall be
taken after the correction has been made and repeated twice at 12 hours
 8001-8

interval. The maximum range for each reading in the three successive
tests shall not exceed 20% of the average value. After all tests have
been made, the equipment shall be reconnected as required. Polarity test
shall be made on single pole switching devices.

13.4 Earth Resistance Test

Earth resistance tests shall be made by the Contractor on the earthing
system, separating and reconnecting each earth connection.

If it is indicated that soil treatment or other corrective measures are

required to lower the ground resistance values, the Engineer will
determine the extent of such corrective measures.

The electrical resistance of the ECC together with the resistance of the
earthing leads measured from the connection with earth electrode to any
other position in the complete installation shall not exceed one Ohm.
Earth resistance test shall be performed as per Electrical Inspector's
requirements. Where more than one earth electrode is installed, the
earth resistance test of each electrodes shall be measured by means
of resistance bridge instrument.

The complete lightning protection system shall be tested for continuity

and earth resistance. The combined earth resistance at any point in the
lightning protection system shall not exceed 3 Ohms. Continuity test shall
be made on ECCs and earthing lead.

13.5 Special Systems' Tests

The special systems such as Structured Cabling, Fire Alarm System,
CCTV System, Public Address System and CATV System etc., shall be
tested according to the procedures laid down in the respective sections of
the technical specifications. However, any specific tests recommended by
the manufacturer shall also be carried out as approved by the Engineer.

13.6 Completed Tests

After any equipment has been tested, checked for operation, etc., and is
accepted by the Engineer the Contractor shall be responsible for the
proper protection of that equipment so that subsequent testing of other
equipment do not cause any damage to the already tested equipment.

13.7 Expenses
All expenses, i.e., traveling, documentation, boarding and lodging,
allowances etc. for carrying out the tests and witnessing by the Engineer
and Employer shall be borne by the Contractor and are deemed to have
been included in the BOQ rates of the respective equipment(s) by the
Contractor.

14.0 TRAINING
The Contractor shall provide the services of competent instructors who will give
full instruction to designated personnel in the operation, maintenance of all the
systems/works covered under this Contract.
 8001-9

Orient the training specifically to the system installed. Instructors shall be

thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach. Instructors shall be
fluent in English Technical Language. Training manuals shall be provided for
each trainee and shall describe in detail the data included in each training
program. The manuals shall also include an agenda and objectives for each
lesson. The Contractor shall provide equipment and materials for classroom
training.

Accomplish the training in two phases over a period of three (3) months.

Phase 1 shall be conducted on site after the installation of the systems. The
period of training shall be at least (3) days for each system. Provide training for
operators (8 operators) and equipment maintenance personnel (4 persons) for
each system. The training shall include:
- general equipment layout
- troubleshooting and diagnostics
- repair instructions
- preventive maintenance and adjustments of field equipment
Phase 2 training shall start on site three (3) months after completion of phase-1
training. Train operating personnel for a period of 2 training days for each
system. The training shall include advanced material based on the previous
operator training and shall be oriented towards question and answers sessions.
Two training days shall also be dedicated for equipment maintenance persons for
any problems they face during the three months operation.

15.0 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

15.1 General Requirements

The Contractor shall provide all services, materials, and equipment
necessary for successful operations of the entire system during the
defects liability period including provision of necessary material required
for the work, ensuring to minimize impacts on facility operations when
performing scheduled adjustments and non-scheduled work.

15.2 Description of Work

The adjustment and repairs of the systems include all equipment,
software updates, and control devices. Provide the manufacturer’s
required adjustments and all other work necessary.

15.3 Personnel
The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work
promptly and satisfactorily. The Engineer shall be advised in writing of the
name of the designated service representative, and of any changes in
personnel.
a) Supervision: Provide supervision, satisfactory to the Engineer,
with full authority to act for the Contractor. The supervisor shall
effect daily liaison during normal working hours with the Engineer/
Owner. Provide such supervision for all work done.
b) Service Personnel: Service personnel selected by the Contractor
shall be fully qualified to adjust and repair the installed equipment.
15.4 Schedule of Work
 8001-10

The Contractor shall provide two minor inspections at 6-months intervals

or less (if required by the manufacturer), and two major inspections off set
equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection of
alternating magnitude, and all work required as specified.

a) Minor Inspections: These inspections shall include:

- Visual checks and operation tests

- Physical adjustments and other necessary adjustments if
required.

b) Major Inspections: These inspections shall include all work

described under “Minor Inspections” and the following work:

- Cleaning.

- Check all devices on system-by-system basis.

- Run all system.

- Resolve any previous outstanding problems.

15.5 Records and Logs

Keep records and logs of each task. Organize cumulative records for
each major component and for the complete system chronologically.
Maintain a continuous log for all devices on a system-by-system basis.

Maintain complete logs and make them available for inspection on site,
demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have
been accomplished.

15.6 Work Requests

Separately record each service call request, as received. The form shall
include the serial number identifying the component involved, its location,
date and time the call was received, nature of trouble, names of the
service personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing what has
to be done, the amount and nature of the materials to be used, the time
and date work started, time and date of completion and a space for the
Owner representative to indicate approval or further corrective action
where found necessary. The Owner shall receive a record of the work
performed within 5 days after work is accomplished.

15.7 System Modification

Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing to the

Employer. Do not make any system modifications, include operating
parameters and control settings, without prior approval of the Employer.
Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the
operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected.

15.8 Software
 8001-11

Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These
updates shall be accomplished in a time manner, fully coordinated with
system operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and
maintenance manuals, and software documentation.

16.0 APPENDICES TO BE FILLED IN BY THE BIDDER

The details regarding equipment manufacturers, deviations, technical data,

special tools, spare parts etc. are to be furnished in the Appendix J-1 to J-2
attached with form of bid, in accordance with the provision of the Clause
“Requirements of Electrical Works” given in the instructions to Bidder.

17.0 PAYMENT

No separate payment shall be made for work involved within the scope of this
section unless specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8001.doc
 8132 - 1

SECTION - 8132

LT SWITCHBOARDS & SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing, connecting,
commissioning of all material and services of the complete LT Switchboards &
Sub Main Distribution Boards as specified herein and/or shown on the Bidding
Drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and
coordinate at site with other services for exact location and position of the
LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards.

The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall also comply with the
General Specifications for Electrical Works Section-8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Bidding Documents.

2.0 GENERAL
The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be of sheet steel
fabricated, floor mounting, cubicle type, totally enclosed, dust tight and vermin
proof. It shall be complete in all respect with material and accessories, factory
assembled, tested and finished all according to the specifications and to the
normal requirements. The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall
have protection class IP-42 for indoor installation.

The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards with all components and
accessories shall be suitable for front operation only and shall:
- have a rated service short circuit breaking capacity, (Ics) conforming to
IEC 60947-2 as shown on the drawings.
- be provided with adequate clearance from live parts so that flashovers
cannot be caused by switching, vermin, pests, etc.
- have all components rated for insulation class of 600-volts minimum.
- be designed for flush mounting of all instruments on the front side.
- have all incoming and outgoing connection from the top or bottom as
per requirement of site conditions.
- have the components mounted so as to facilitate ease of maintenance
from the front.
- have common lamp test facility for all lamps.
- have wiring diagram in the pocket on the inside of each door of the panel.
- be suitable for 415 volts AC, 3 phase 4 wire, 50 Hz system.
- be labeled with stainless steel nameplate on the front side of door for
each incoming and outgoing circuit.
- have doors grounded by flexible copper cable/strip.
- have arrangements for extension of panel in future.
3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES
 8132 - 2

The latest editions of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for
the materials specified within the scope of this Section :
BS 3871 - Miniature & moulded Case Circuit Breaker.
IEC 60947-2 - Low Voltage Switch gear and Control gear.
IEC 60439-1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear
Assemblies.
IEC 60408 - Low Voltage Air break Switches, Air Break
Disconnectors, Air break Switch Disconnectors and
Fuse Combination Units.
BS 1432 - Bus Bars.
BS 88 - HRC Fuses.
BS 89/90 - Ammeters and Voltmeters.
IEC 60831 - Power Capacitors.
BS 3938 - Low Voltage Current Transformers.
IEC 60073 - Colours for indicator lights and push buttons.

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Sheet Metal Work

The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be fabricated,
welded, grinded, finished with angle iron framework and cladded with 14
SWG MS sheet. It shall be suitably divided into panels and compartments
for accommodating the required number of circuit components,
instruments and accessories.
The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be supplied
complete with foundation bolts and other installation materials as
recommended by the manufacturer. Proper size cable clamping channels
with galvanized steel clamps and brass cable glands respectively for
unarmoured and armoured cables shall be provided. All holes, cutout
shall be tool or jib manufactured and free from burrs and rough edges. An
earth bar of appropriate cross section shall be provided and connected to
the bodies of all sections of the LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution
Boards. Two external earth terminals shall be provided for main earth
connection to the body of LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution
Boards. The doors shall be earthed by means of flexible copper strip.
Means shall be provided to limit the opening angle of doors to about 1000.
The cabling inside the LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards
shall be suitably numbered and harnessed by means of straps or cords.
Colour sleeves shall be provided on each cable lugs, connected to the
bus bars, circuit breakers or terminals etc. for phase identification. Wiring
to door mounted components shall be in flexible PVC conduit. All
indicating, selecting and control equipment shall be suitably arranged and
clearly labelled by means of flame proof material using indelible
ink/marking indicating the rating of fuse, switches, etc. The nameplates
provided on the front of panel shall be of flame retardant material
preferably stainless steel. Use of plastic or any inflammable material shall
not be permitted for nameplates.

All metalwork of the LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards s

shall be cleaned down to bare shining metal phosphated and the surfaces
 8132 - 3

chemically prepared for powder coating. Then these shall be coated with
powder of colour RAL 7032 and then baked in oven. The thickness of
powder coating shall not be less than 120 microns.

4.2 Components

The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards s shall be provided

with all components as specified or shown on the Drawings and as
necessary for the satisfactory operation of the LT Switchboards & Sub
Main Distribution Boards and of the electrical system. Typical
specifications are given hereunder.

4.2.1 Bus Bars

The bus bars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic tinned

copper and shall be completely isolated and mechanically braced
for the specified fault level. The phase identification of bus bars
shall be by providing colours sleeves on bus bars ends and
these shall be red, yellow and blue for phase and black for
neutral. The earth bus bar shall be green.

The bus bars shall be triple pole, neutral & earth and shall be of
appropriate size to meet the electrical and mechanical
requirements of the system. The temperature rise shall not exceed
30 degree centigrade at rated current.

Neutral bus bar shall be of the same cross section as phase bus
bars. Earth bus bar shall be of half cross section area as phase
bus bars.

4.2.2 Circuit Breakers

The circuit breaker shall be triple or four pole, manually operated

or motor operated, spring charged type as shown on the drawings
with front drive grip handle. ON-TRIP-OFF indication shall be
provided on circuit breakers. The all circuit breakers shall have the
following protections and setting range unless
otherwise shown on the drawings:

- Adjustable three pole, manual reset thermal overload release

of setting range 80 to 100% of rated current.

- Magnetic triple pole short circuit release having range

according to manufacturer's standard range.

The incoming circuit breakers of main LT panel (normal and

emergency) shall be air circuit breakers whereas outgoing circuit
breakers shall be moulded case type, unless stated otherwise on
the drawings.

The incoming circuit breaker shall have two numbers normally

open and two numbers normally closed auxiliary contacts rated for
2 Amp, 230 VAC. The incoming circuit breaker shall also have
ON-TRIP-OFF indicating lamps. Where shown on the drawings
indication lamps shall also be provided for outgoing circuit
 8132 - 4

breakers. The circuit breaker shall have specified rupturing

capacity without the use of back-up fuses. Auxiliary release and
trip coils shall be provided for desired operation and/or interlocking
as stated on the drawings.

The motor operated, spring charged type circuit breakers shall

be provided with anti-pumping circuit to prevent repeating cycle of
TRIP reset and ON even if the close command is given while
the circuit breaker has tripped due to fault.

Wherever withdrawable type LT Switchboards & Sub Main

Distribution Boards is specified on the drawings / BOQ, the
LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards s shall also
comply with the following requirements:

- All circuit breakers and switch fuse units shall be as shown on

the drawing. Where two or more feeders are contained in the
same cubicle, they are to be separated by barriers of steel or
fire resistant insulating material. If required, the metal surface
of the cubicle shall be protected by fire resistant insulating
material. Each panel shall combine in tier form all respective
components with their incoming and outgoing power feeders.

- The draw out switching units shall be mounted on trucks or

slide-in chassis having adequate guidance by greased sliding
rails and/ or rollers. They shall be connected to the bus bars
by means of a self-aligning plug and socket arrangement and
complete isolation of each circuit shall be attained by drawing
out the switching unit.

- The main contacts shall have safety shutters, which will

automatically cover the line contacts as the circuit breaker is
withdrawn. The withdrawal of circuit breaker shall be
accomplished by means of a crank, with as little effort as
possible.

- The contact surfaces of the plugs and sockets shall be silver-

plated. The contacts shall be ample sized and sufficiently
strong to withstand maximum prevailing short circuits and
carry continuously their normal rated currents without damage
or overheating of any kind.

- Also, the control circuits shall be provided with plugs and

sockets.

- The withdrawable units shall have clearly marked service, test

and isolated (ready for complete withdrawal) positions. A
mechanical interlock is to be provided to prevent withdrawal of
the unit unless the power circuit has been interrupted. The unit
shall, furthermore, positively be locked in the test position
before it is manually released for complete withdrawal.

4.2.3 Switch - Fuse Units

 8132 - 5

The switch-fuse unit shall comprise a triple pole on load isolating

switch with HRC fuses. The fuse shall be supplied complete with
the fuse base and shall conform to BS-88 Class Q1 with a fusing
factor of 1.5.

4.2.4 Ammeters and Voltmeters

All meters shall be flush mounting, moving iron, spring controlled.

The front dimensions shall be 96 x 96 mm for meters.

The meters shall be of accuracy class 1.5 according to BS-89 and

90. The ammeter shall be suitable for connection to 5 Amps
secondary of current transformers or directly through shunt as
shown on drawings. The ammeters and voltmeters shall have
measuring range as indicated on the drawings.

4.2.5 Current Transformers

Air-cooled, ring type current transformers shall be provided having

transformation ratio as indicated on the drawings. The current
transformers shall be of suitable burden having accuracy class 1.0
according to BS 3938. The current transformers shall have 5
amps secondary.

4.2.6 Selector Switches

Ammeter and voltmeter selector switches shall be complete with

front plate and grip handle. R-Y-B and OFF position for ammeters
and RY-YB-BR-RN-YN-BN and OFF position for voltmeters shall
be marked on the respective selector switches.

The selector switches for controls shall be rotary cam type, having
required number of positions. It shall be provided complete with
knob and front plate showing all positions as required.

4.2.7 Air Break Contactors

The contactors shall be air break, triple pole 415 VAC type and
suitable for the type of duty (at least utilization Category AC3) to
be performed. The main contacts shall be silver tipped, butt type
with double break per pole. Each contactor shall be provided with
single phase 230 VAC operating coil and minimum one spare
normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact. The
number of working auxiliary contacts shall be provided according
to the system requirements.

4.2.8 Push Buttons

The push buttons shall be illuminated, momentary make/break

contact type or latch type (push-on/push-off) as required and
approved by the Engineer and suitable for flush mounting. The
push button for ON and OFF switching shall be red and green
respectively. They shall be provided as shown on the drawing.
4.2.9 HRC Fuses
 8132 - 6

HRC fuses shall be provided complete with fuse bases, fuse etc.
The fuses shall have a fusing factor as specified for class Q1 in
accordance with BS 88.

4.2.10 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamps shall be LED type having long life suitable for
flush mounting, complete with base. They shall be suitable for
operation on 230 V AC and shall have rosettes of suitable colours
as approved by the Engineer.

4.2.11 Line up Terminals

Line up terminals wherever provided for control or power circuits
shall be suitable for voltage and size of conductors as indicated on
drawing.
The line-up terminals for controls shall be suitable for channel
mounting. All necessary accessories such as end plates, fixing
clips, transparent label holder caps and label sheets with marking
shall be provided.

4.2.12 Surge Protection

Surge Arresters shall be provided in LT Switchboards & Sub Main
Distribution Boards, wherever required, as shown on drawing. The
415 Volts surge arrester shall have the following characteristics:
- Voltage Class (highest system voltage): 440 V rms
- Service (rated voltage): 415/1.732 V rms
- Peak Current surge: 40 kA
This equipment will be tested in accordance with the relevant IEC
Standard.

4.3 Tools

One complete set of tools for routine operation, setting and maintenance
of LT Switchboard & Sub Main Distribution Boards as recommended by
manufacturer of each component shall be furnished within the price
quoted for the HT Switchboard.

HT switchboard shall be provided with independent set of tools placed in

suitable box. Details of tools shall be furnished by the bidder with his offer
in the relevant schedule of the form of Bid volume - I.

5.0 INSTALLATION

The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be installed at

location shown on the drawing. The concrete pedestal shall be constructed as
part of civil works. The Contractor shall ensure co-ordination with the civil works
for providing any openings, holes, etc to avoid any breakage to completed works.
In case the provisions in civil works for installation of electrical equipment are not
made or made incorrect the same shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own
cost and to the satisfaction of Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide foundation bolts and grout them in cement concrete
floor using non-shrinkable material with the approval of Engineer.
 8132 - 7

All installation materials for physically erecting the LT Switchboards & Sub Main
Distribution Boards, such as bolts, nuts, washers, supporting steel, etc., shall be
provided and installed by the Contractor. The LT Switchboards & Sub Main
Distribution Boards, manual transfer switch and outdoor feeder pillar shall be
installed upright and in level and shall be firmly and rigidly bolted to the floor and
concrete supports.
The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be completely
erected as per manufacturer's instructions and as approved by the Engineer.
Loose parts dispatched by the manufacturer shall be installed and connected as
per assembly drawing provided by the manufacturer. Any safety locking of meter,
relays, etc., provided by the manufacturer for safe transport shall be released
only after the LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards is erected in
position. The incoming and outgoing cables shall be connected as recommended
by cable manufacturer and providing colour sleeve on the lugs at both ends of
cables the cable armour shall be connected effectively to ground.
The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards body shall be connected to
earth as per instructions given in section "Earthing" of these Specifications. The
LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be tested and
commissioned in the presence of the Engineer.
The LT Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards shall be tested before
energizing as per instructions contained in article "Testing" of General
Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 of these Specifications.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General
The Contractor's bid amount against Bill of Quantities item as given below
shall include design, fabrication, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and completion for all works specified herein and as
shown on the Bidding Drawings related to the item.

6.2 Low Tension Switchboards & Sub Main Distribution Boards

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the complete job
of each LT Switchboard & Sub Main Distribution Boards as shown
on drawing and given in BOQ acceptably supplied and installed by
the Contractor as a complete job.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of each
type of job measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit
price each and shall constitute full compensation for design,
supplying, installing, connecting, testing and commissioning of the
LT Switchboard & Sub Main Distribution Boards as per single line
diagram shown on the drawing including power factor
improvement plant, auto mains failure module, all erecting
material such as foundations bolts, supporting steel channels,
nuts, washers, cable glands etc.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8132.doc
 8133-1

SECTION - 8133

LT DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing, and
commissioning of all material and services of the complete Low Tension (LT)
Distribution Boards as specified herein, shown on the Bidding Drawings and
stated in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-
ordinate at site with other services for exact location and position of the each L.T.
Distribution Board.

The Low Tension Distribution Board with accessories shall also comply with the
General specifications for Electrical Works, section - 8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Bidding Document.

2.0 GENERAL

The Low Tension Distribution Board (DB) shall be sheet steel fabricated suitable
for surface/recessed mounting on wall or floor standing totally enclosed, dust
tight and vermin proof. It shall be complete in all respect with material and
accessories, factory assembled, tested and finished according to the
Specifications and to the normal requirements having IP-42.

The Low Tension Distribution Board shall be front operation type and shall:

- have a rated service short circuit breaking capacity, (Ics) at 415 V conforming
to IEC 60947-2 as shown on the drawings.

- be provided with adequate clearance from live parts so that the flashovers
can not be caused by switching, vermin, pests etc.

- be suitable for 415 Volts, 3 phase 4 wire, 50 Hz system.

- be designed for flush mounting of all instruments on the front side.

- have incoming and outgoing cable termination arrangement, terminal

block/line up terminals.

- be provided with stainless steel name plate on the front side of door.

- have all incoming and outgoing connections from top or bottom as per
requirement of site conditions.

- have door grounded by flexible copper strip/cable.

- have wiring diagram in the pocket inside the door of Distribution Board

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

 8133-2

The latest editions of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for
the materials specified within the scope for this section:
IEC 60947-2 - Low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breakers
IEC 60439 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies.
IEC 60073 - Colours for indication lights and push buttons
IEC 60051 - Direct setting electrical measuring instruments
IEC 60044-1 - Instrument Transformers – Current Transformers
IEC 60044-2 - Instrument Transformers – Inductive Voltage Transformers
IEC 60051-1, - Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
2, 3, 5 & 8 instruments and their accessories
BS 88 - Cartridge fuse for voltage upto and including 1000 V a.c.
and 1500 V d.c.

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Sheet Metal Work

The Low Tension Distribution Board (DB) shall be fabricated with 16

SWG sheet steel recess / surface mounting as approved by the Engineer.
All the components shall be installed on a common component mounting
plate inside the enclosure and protected from the front with screwed
sheet steel front plate. The enclosure shall be provided with rubber
gasketting and a lockable hinged door with cam fastener.

The distribution board shall be supplied complete with all installation

materials as recommended by the manufacturer. The incoming and
outgoing cable connections shall be according to the wiring requirements.
If required, an adapter box for accommodating the cables and conduits
may be provided. The box shall be of the same material and finish as the
DB. All holes, cutout etc. shall be tool or jib manufactured and free from
burrs and rough edges.

The cabling inside the DB shall be suitably harnessed by means of straps

or cords. Colour sleeves shall be provided on each cable lugs connected
to the bus bars, circuit breakers or terminals for phase identification. An
earth bar shall be provided for connection of incoming and outgoing earth
conductors. The earth bar shall be permanently connected to the body of
DB at two points. Flexible copper strip shall be provided for earthing of
the door of DB.

Circuit numbers/ designation on all circuits shall be conspicuously marked

to facilitate connection and maintenance.

All metal work of the DB shall be cleaned down to bare shining metal
phosphated and the surfaces chemically prepared for powder coating.
Then these shall be coated with powder of colour RAL 7032 and then
baked in oven. The thickness of powder coating shall not be less than
120 microns.

4.2 Components
 8133-3

The Low Tension Distribution Boards (DB) shall be provided with

components as specified, as shown on the Bidding Drawings and
required for the satisfactory operation of the distribution board and of the
electrical system.
Typical component specifications are given below:
4.2.1 Bus Bars
The Bus bars shall be made of 99.9% pure high conductivity
electrolytic copper and shall be completely isolated and
mechanically braced for the specified fault level according to
relevant IEC standard. The identification of bus bars shall be by
providing colours sleeves on bus bar ends and these shall be red,
yellow and blue for phases and black for neutral. The earth bus
bar shall be green.

The bus bars shall be for three phase, neutral and earth and shall
be of appropriate size to meet the electrical and mechanical
requirements of the system. The temperature rise shall not exceed
300C at rated current.

4.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

The MCCBs shall be moulded case triple pole 440 Volts or
single/double pole 250 Volts of current ratings as shown on the
drawings. These shall have fixed magnetic short circuit and
adjustable/fixed thermal overload protection as shown on
drawings.

The MCCBs shall be installed such that their switching levers are
accessible through the front plate for operation.

The single and triple pole MCCBs shall have short circuit rupturing
capacity suitable for the distribution system as approved by the
Engineer or as shown on the drawings. The MCCBs shall be
suitable for working on lighting and power circuits.

4.2.3 Ammeters and Voltmeters

All meters shall be flush mounting, moving iron, spring controlled.
The front dimensions shall be 96 x 96 mm for meters.

The meters shall be of accuracy class 1.5 according to relevant

IEC standard. The ammeter shall be suitable for connection to 5
Amps secondary of current transformers or directly through shunt
as shown on drawings. The ammeters and voltmeters shall have
measuring range as indicated on the drawings.

4.2.4 Current Transformers

Air cooled, ring type current transformers shall be provided having
transformation ratio as indicated on the drawings. The current
transformers shall be of suitable burden having accuracy class 1.0
according to relevant IEC standard. The current transformers
shall have 5 amps secondary.
4.2.5 Selector Switch
 8133-4

The ammeter and voltmeter selector switch shall be complete with

front plate, grip handle R-Y-B and OFF position for ammeters, and
RY-YB-BR-RN-YN-BN and OFF position for voltmeters shall be
marked on the respective selector switches.

4.2.6 Air Break Contactors

The contactor shall be air break, triple pole, 400 Volts. Each
contactor shall be provided with a 230 Volt operating coil, one 6
Watt, 230 Volt red coloured signalling lamp, control fuse and two
normally open and two normally closed type auxiliary contacts
wired upto terminals for electrical interlocking.

4.2.7 Push Buttons

Push Button shall be illuminated, momentary contact type and

suitable for flush mounting on the door of panel and on remote
area. The push button for ON and OFF switching shall be spring
loaded.

4.2.8 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamps shall be suitable for flush mounting, complete

with base and 230 Volts incandescent / LED lamp. It shall have
rosettes of suitable colours as approved by the Engineer and shall
be provided on each distribution boards.

4.2.9 Impulse Relay

Impulse relay shall be 1 or 2 pole, 250V, rated and be provided

with latching mechanism.

5.0 INSTALLATION

The location of low tension distribution boards (DB) are shown diagramatically on
the drawings. The actual location shall be determined at site, keeping in view the
site conditions and in co-ordination with other equipment, as approved by the
Engineer.

Low tension distribution board for recessed mounting in wall shall be installed
such that the door shall finish flush with the surface of wall. The recess mounted
distribution board shall be installed before the plastering of walls. The DB shall
be protected to avoid any damage due to the civil work. Any cuttings, dismantling
of the existing wall required for fixing the DB shall be coordinated at site with the
approval of Engineer. Any damage done to civil structure shall be made good by
the Contractor.

All loose parts dispatched separately with the DB shall be installed as per
manufacturer instructions and all adjustments or setting shall be made as
required. All screws, nuts and bolts used for fixing the distribution board shall be
galvanized.

The distribution boards installation shall include connecting all incoming and
 8133-5

outgoing cables. The cable entry in the boards shall be provided from top or
bottom as required.

The distribution boards shall be tested as per instructions contained in article

"Testing" of General Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 of these
Specifications.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each item of Bill of Quantities as

given below shall include design, fabrication, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and completion for all works specified herein and/or as
shown on the Bidding Drawings related to the item.

6.2 LT Distribution Board

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the number of

each LT distribution board acceptably supplied and installed by
the Contractor as a complete job.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of jobs

measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for design, fabricating,
supplying, installing, connecting, testing and commissioning of the
LT distribution boards, including fixing arrangement, adapter box
and other accessories for complete installation.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8133.doc
 8150-1

SECTION - 8150

LIGHT FIXTURES

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and accessories of the complete Light fixtures as
specified herein and/or shown on the drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-
ordinate at Site with other services for exact locations and positions of the light
fixtures.

The lighting fixtures with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Bidding Document.

2.0 GENERAL

The description of light fixtures is given in the bill of quantities, and stated on the
drawings, and all relevant material is described in this Section. The
determination of quality is based on certified photo-metric data covering the
coefficient of utilisation, light distribution curves, construction material, shape,
finish, operation, etc.

The Contractor shall submit at least two samples of each and every light fixture
specified and obtain approval of the Engineer before purchasing. The quality and
finishes of the local make light fixtures (if mentioned in BOQ) shall be same as
that of standard manufacturer. The accessories such as ballast, lamp/starter
holders, starters, lamps, ignitors, etc., for all type of light fixtures shall be of
Philips make or approved equivalent. Approved equivalent against those
specified will be accepted if the specified one is/will not be available. For any
substitution the Engineer's approval is necessary.

All fixtures shall be finished in standard colour schemes as mentioned in the

manufacturer's catalogue for respective fixtures, unless specifically stated in the
Specifications, Drawings or Bill of Quantities or directed by the Engineer.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be applicable to the

material specified within the scope of this section:

IEC 60081 - Tubular fluorescent lamps

IEC 60082 - Ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps

IEC 60155 - Starters for fluorescent lamps

IEC 60400 - Lamp holders and starter holders for fluorescent lamps

IEC 61048 - Capacitors for use in TL, HP mercury and LP sodium

& 61049 vapour discharge lamp circuits.
 8150-2

IEC 60598 - Luminaires

& BS EN 60598

IEC 60922 - Ballast for discharge lamps

& 60923

IEC 60662 - Igniter for High pressure lamps.

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Fluorescent Light Fixtures

The fluorescent light fixtures shall have lamps and ballasts of proper
rating as shown on the drawings. Each lamp shall be provided with
independent ballast.

The fluorescent lamps shall be tubular, 1514/1214/604mm long, 28-mm.

dia. for 58/36/18 watts respectively as specified. The fluorescent shall be
cool white, with colour rendering and light colour of 840 characteristics
with an average output of 5200 lumens (+ 5%) for 58 watts, 3350 lumens
(+ 5%) for 36 watts and 1350 lumens (+5%) for 18 watts after 100
burning hours. The ballast shall be ‘Low Loss’ polyester filled type, totally
enclosed and suitable to operate upto 250 VAC. The power loss shall not
be more than 6 watts for 58/36/18 watts ballast. A wiring diagram,
wattage, voltage and current figures shall be printed on the body of the
ballast.

The lamp holders shall be rotary lock-in type. The starters shall be glow
type with radio interference suppressor/by-pass capacitor. The internal
wiring of the fluorescent light fixtures shall be done with heat resistant
wires at the manufacturer's factory. The internal wiring shall be clipped
properly and heat resistant sleeves be provided on cables passing near
ballasts. All light fixtures shall be provided with power factor improvement
capacitor to give a minimum power factor of 0.90. Connectors suitable for
connecting 2.5 sq.mm cable conductors shall be provided for supply
connections. An earth terminal for connection to 2.5-sq.mm cable
conductor shall be provided.

The body of the fluorescent light fixtures shall be minimum 24 SWG sheet
steel, derusted, degreased, finished in heat resistant paint, stove
enameled. Appropriate size bushed wire entry holes, fixing holes, and
earth terminal shall be provided.

The light fixtures shall be furnished with Perspex diffusing panels "040
opal acrylic" (minimum sheet thickness 3mm), polystrene louvers or metal
grid louvers or mirror optic reflectors, etc. as specified on the drawings or
in BOQ. The louvers shall be secured firmly and in level. The louvers
shall be in one section and not in pieces.

The design of light fixture for recess mounting shall be coordinated with
the design of false ceiling prior to commencement of manufacture. Shop
drawings shall be submitted for approval of Engineer.
 8150-3

IP degree of Protection shall comply with the requirements laid down in

Section 8001. Standard luminaries with manufacturer’s recommended
modifications, such as additional gasket, etc., shall be provided to attain
required protection level.

4.2 Incandescent/Incandescent Reflector/Compact Fluorescent Light

Fixtures

The incandescent/incandescent reflector/compact fluorescent light

fixtures shall be as stated on drawings and bill of quantities. The light
fixture shall be finished in standard colours unless otherwise stated on
drawings or directed by Engineer. All incandescent/incandescent
reflector/compact fluorescent light fixtures shall be of international
standard and quality. The types of fixtures with manufacturer’s catalogue
reference are given on the fixture schedule and in bill of quantities.
Equivalent fixture may be acceptable provided that the contractor submits
for review all necessary data indicating photometric curves to show that
the fixture proposed are of the same type, construction and quality.

The lamps for incandescent/incandescent reflector/compact fluorescent

light fixtures shall be GLS lamps or incandescent reflector (PAR) or
compact fluorescent lamp with normal or electronic control gear and shall
be supplied and installed according to the wattage/type as indicated on
drawings.

Weatherproof bulkhead incandescent/compact fluorescent light fixture

shall comprise of plastic body and gasketted clear glass cover secured to
the body by means of wing nuts/screws to give a weatherproof and
watertight fit. The gasket shall be weather resistance type. The lamp
holder shall be of bi-pin brass having porcelain outer ring or 2/4-pin base
for compact fluorescent lamps with normal control gear as per
requirements.

The glass shade of the light fixtures shall be opal white or clear as
furnished by the manufacturer with the light fixture unless specified and
free from any air bubbles or voids. The shade may be spherical,
cylindrical, flattened bottom or any other shape as specified in the
drawings or BOQ.

4.3 Light Fixture with Battery Backup

Where light fixtures with battery pack are required, the battery pack shall
be provided with high temperature rechargeable NiCd batteries, indication
lamps and all safety devices for protection of batteries and luminaire. If
not mentioned otherwise the battery pack shall be capable of providing a
backup of atleast 3 hours. The recharging time from completely dried up
condition shall not be more than 24 hours. The minimum acceptable life
of battery shall be five years.

The light fixtures with battery pack shall be designed for use in self
contained system in the emergency lighting power supply unit and its
associated battery pack are housed directly in the luminaire.
 8150-4

4.4 Exit Sign – Emergency Light Fixture

The exit sign emergency light fixture shall be maintained type with self
contained, sealed nickel cadmium batteries providing a backup of atleast
3 hours if not mentioned otherwise elsewhere. The light fixture shall have
steel body powder coated in permawhite finish, complete with screen
printed acrylic legend panel. T5 8W fluorescent lamp, 3500 oK – G5 cap
shall be provided. Legend panel shall be bottom entry for case of
installation near walls. The legend pictogram shall be green colour and as
approved by the Engineer.

4.5 High Pressure Sodium Lamp

The high-pressure sodium SON-T plus lamp shall be of increased output

tubular of rating 250Watt and 400Watt as shown on the drawings. The
base of the lamp shall be E40 with 32,000 an 55,000-lumen output for
250W and 400W lamps respectively. The colour-rendering index Ra shall
be 25. These lamps shall comply with IEC 60662.

4.6 Ballast for High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide Lamps

The ballast for high pressure Sodium/Metal halide lamps shall be

polyester resin filled, totally encapsulated electromagnetic of copper / iron
construction with leak proof body for use in combination with an external
ignitor. The ballast shall fully comply with international Standards on
Safety and performance, design compliance to IEC 60922/60923. The
ballast shall be suitable for application in luminaries or poles under
normal humid conditions. The ballast shall conform to the characteristics
and wattage of the lamps. The wattage of lamp and ballast and a wiring
diagram and other relevant data shall be printed on the body of the
ballast. The power loss of the ballast shall not be more than 28 Watts for
400 Watts and 20 Watts for 250-Watts lamp. The ballast shall be provided
with insulated block of terminals for connecting upto 6-sq. mm cable with
separate earth terminal.

4.7 Electronic Ignitors for High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide
Lamps

The electronic ignitors for high-pressure sodium and metal halide lamps
shall be compact and light in weight with reliable and smooth starting
behaviour. The ignitors shall be suitable for specified wattage of high-
pressure sodium and metal halide lamps and other requirements. The
ignitors shall fully comply with IEC 60662 and IEC 60926 regulations. The
ignitors shall be provided with screw terminal / blocks and simple stud or
screw mounting arrangement.

4.8 Capacitors for High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide Lamps
The capacitors for use in combination with high-pressure sodium and
metal halide lamp circuits shall be high-quality electrolytic capacitors for
correction of power factor. The capacitors shall be of appropriate rating
and type for the relevant lamp wattage. All capacitors shall be fitted with
an internal discharge resistor, have a fuse fitted and be of self-healing
type. Capacitor shall conform to IEC 61048/61049.
 8150-5

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 General
The mounting heights of light fixtures are indicated on the drawings, and
positions of fixtures are according to the mentioned scale.
The Contractor must ensure that the light fixtures are installed uniformly
with respect to the dimensions of the area. Any modifications due to site
conditions may be made with the approval of Engineer. All fixtures shall
be carefully aligned before fixing in position.
The wiring between ceiling rose or terminal box and the fixture shall be
carried out with 3-core 1.0 sq.mm and 1.5-sq.mm flexible copper
conductor PVC/PVC cable respectively for circuits protected by 10 amps
and 15/20 amps mcbs. All lights fixtures with battery back-up units shall
be wired with 2 number additional 2.5 sq.mm PVC cable from line contact
of light control switch / contactor for continues charging of battery unit and
sensing of power supply failure. The wiring inside light fixture body shall
be done with heat resistant cables or PVC insulated cable in heat
resistant sleeves as approved by the Engineer.
Glasses, shades, reflectors, diffusers, etc., must be in a clear condition
after installation. All light fixtures shall be earthed by an earth wire
connected to the earth terminal in the fixture.

5.2 Fluorescent Light Fixtures

The fluorescent light fixtures on the surface of ceiling shall be installed
with the back of the body flush with the ceiling surface, and in a manner
so as to facilitate wiring. Nylon plugs and galvanized steel bolts or screws
shall be used for fixing the light fixture to the ceiling. For light fixtures
installation on false ceiling the installation method/detail shall be
coordinated with ceiling design and submitted for approval of Engineer.
Care shall be taken to prevent the weight of the fixture from being
transferred to the false ceiling.

Pendant light fixtures shall have two holes in the top of each casing for
supporting to the ceiling by a 3/4" dia. galvanized pipe or any other
standard method as approved by the Engineer. Wiring from ceiling rose
to the fixture shall be done through the pipe. Proper arrangements such
as long threads with check nuts, etc. for minor adjustment in the mounting
heights of the fixtures shall also be provided.

5.3 Incandescent/Incandescent Reflector/Compact Fluorescent Light

Fixtures

The incandescent/incandescent reflector / compact fluorescent light

fixture shall be installed on the surface of ceiling or wall by means of
nylon plugs and galvanized steel screws, such that their back finish flush
with the surface for exposed conduits and flush with outlet box for
concealed conduit system. Wherever convenient, screws for fixing light
fixtures shall be screwed into the holes of the outlet box. The lights on
false ceiling shall be installed in a manner as described for fluorescent
light fixture.
 8150-6

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein and/or shown on the Bidding
Drawings related to the item.

6.2 Fluorescent / Incandescent / Incandescent Reflector / Compact

Fluorescent

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for each type of light

fixture including all accessories acceptably supplied and installed
by the Contractor as complete unit.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units

measured as provided above at the contract unit price each and
constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting,
testing and completion of fluorescent / incandescent /
incandescent reflector / compact fluorescent including all
accessories such as ballasts, capacitors, igniters, lamps, lamp
starter, holders, suspension rods, GI pipe bracket, ceiling
supports, internal wiring, nuts, bolts, screws, etc., as required and
complete in all respects.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8150.doc
 8212-1

SECTION - 8212

LOW TENSION CABLES

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and services of low tension (LT) cables and the
accessories as specified herein or as shown on the Bidding Drawings and in the
Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and
coordinate at site with other services for exact route, location and position of the
L.T. cables.

The LT cables with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Bidding Document.

2.0 GENERAL

All multi-core and single core PVC insulated and sheathed cables for light
circuits, socket outlets and circuits operating upto 250 volts shall be 300/500
volts grade. All single core PVC insulated, non-sheathed cables shall be of
450/750-volt grade. Power cables for main feeders, main to sub main feeders,
power equipment, etc., armoured or unarmoured shall be of 600/1000 volt grade.
Armouring of multi-core/ single core cables shall be done with appropriate size
galvanized steel/aluminium wire as per relevant codes.

The conductors shall be stranded high conductivity, soft annealed copper.

Conductors of single core cables shall be circular, whereas of multi-core cables
may be circular or shaped according to standard practices and codes. The PVC
insulation, bedding and overall sheath shall be of extruded PVC compound
having good flexibility, resistance to ageing and ability to withstand deformation
at high temperatures. Non-hygroscopic filler shall be provided in multicore cable
to fill empty gaps between the cores to make the cable a smooth round finish. In
all shaped cables a non-hygroscopic high strength binding tape shall be provided
on the core assembly. All cables shall be treated for vermin proofing and be
protected against rodents during storage, laying and all protective pipe/sleeves
shall be plugged to attain the same after installation.

Embossed marking on the oversheath at 3 meters intervals shall give the

following information :

- name of Manufacturer
- year of Manufacture
- No. of cores and size of cable in sq.mm.
- voltage grade
- type of cable i.e. Cu./PVC/SWA/PVC
 8212-2

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest editions of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for
the materials specified within the scope of this section:

IEC 60227 - Core identification by colour

IEC 60228 - Conductor of insulated cable

BS 6004 - Electric cables PVC insulated, non armoured cables for

voltages upto and including 450/750 volts for electric
power, lighting and internal wiring

BS 6346 - Electric cables PVC insulated, armoured cables for

voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V

BS 7846 - Electric cables 600/1000 V armoured fire resistant cables

having thermosetting insulation and low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire

BS 7889 - Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, unarmoured

cables for a voltage of 600/1000 V

BS EN 50266 - Common test methods for cables under fire conditions

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 General

The power, lighting and control cables shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with the routes and requirements shown on the drawings.

All cables shall have phase identification colours on insulation of each

core. The colour code for three phase circuits shall be red, yellow and
blue for phase conductors and black for neutral conductor. Where
insulated earth conductor is installed, it shall have green or green-yellow
colour insulation.

Single-phase circuits shall have insulation of red colour for phase/line,

black colour for neutral and green or green-yellow colour for earth
conductor.

All DC circuits shall have insulation of white colour for positive, black
colour for negative and green or green-yellow colour for earth conductor.

The ends of each length of multi-core armoured or unarmoured cables

shall be properly marked for clock-wise and anti clock-wise sequence of
core colours.

4.2 Cables for Conduit or Channel Wiring

All cables/wiring in concealed or surface mounted PVC conduits or in

covered channel shall be single core PVC insulated of specified grade
and size, unless specifically shown on the drawings or given in BOQ.
4.3 Cables on surface/concrete trenches
 8212-3

Cables for distribution system to be installed on surface, in cable ducts, in

concrete trenches or on trays shall be single or multi-core PVC insulated
and PVC sheathed of specified voltage grade and size, unless
specifically shown on the drawings or given in BOQ.

4.4 Underground Cables

Cables for laying directly underground shall be PVC insulated, PVC

sheathed and armoured with galvanized steel/ aluminium wire. Cables
fully installed in underground ducts/pipes and mechanically protected
from end to end shall be PVC insulated and PVC sheathed unless
specifically shown on the drawings or given in BOQ.

4.5 Cable Markers

Above ground cable markers made of Grade-25 reinforced concrete shall

be erected at a maximum interval of 100 metres along the straight trench,
at each bend and joint box for indicating the presence of underground
cables. Where the trench changes its direction two number of markers
shall be installed one in each direction to indicate the two directions of the
trench. At the joint box, additionally a symbol shall be engraved just
beneath the letters LV to indicate the presence of the joint box. The cable
markers shall be finished in grey paint. The letters and symbols for
indication shall be engraved in concrete on both sides. Letters shall be
LV for low voltage cable. The colour of the engraved letters and symbol
shall be red. The dimensions of the markers shall be as shown on the
drawing and shall be installed in the ground as shown.

4.6 Cable Accessories

All cable accessories shall be provided for the complete cabling and
wiring system without any additional cost unless specifically mentioned in
BOQ. These shall include but not limited to the items such as saddles,
clamps, fixing channels, connectors, cable joints (where necessary and
as approved by the Engineer), clips, lugs, colour sleeves, identification
tags, bushes, glands, etc.

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 General

All installation material, labour, tools, cable rollers and accessories for
cable installation shall be furnished by the Contractor. The cable and
accessories shall be installed as described in accordance with these
Specifications, drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

The Contractor shall confirm the exact cut lengths for cable by actual
measurements at site prior to the ordering. The cable lengths where
shown on the drawings or in BOQ are tentative and only for general
guidance. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for furnishing
correct lengths of cable to avoid joints in cable length except where
necessary, after obtaining approval of the Engineer.

No separate payment for such joints is admissible.

 8212-4

Necessary precautions for safety of cables shall be taken during the

laying of cables to avoid scratches/ cuts to the cable surface. Pulling
force on cable at all times shall remain well within the manufacturer’s
recommended limits.

Prior to installation of jointing and termination kits, the cable lengths shall
be checked and tested to ensure that the cables are in sound condition,
and no damage has been done during handling and installation. After
installation, these shall again be tested prior to commissioning as per
recommendations of the standards according to which the cable is
manufactured.

5.2 Conduit or Channel Wiring

The wiring through conduit shall be started only after the conduit and
channel system is completely installed and all outlet boxes, junction
boxes, etc., are fixed in position.

The wires shall be pulled in conduit or channel with care, preferably

without the use of any lubricant. Where necessary and if approved by the
Engineer, the cable manufacturer's recommended lubricant may be used.
Where several wires are to be installed in the same conduit, they shall be
pulled together along with the earth conductor. All wires of same circuit
shall be run in one conduit.

The wires shall not be bent to a radius less than ten times the overall
diameter of the wire, or more if otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer.

The wiring shall be continuous between terminations and looping-in

system shall be followed throughout. Any joint in wires shall not be
allowed. The use of connectors shall only be allowed at locations where
looping-in is rendered difficult. The consent of the Engineer shall be
required for using connectors. The connector shall be of suitable rating
having porcelain body with sunk-in screw terminals. The connector shall
be wrapped with PVC insulation tape after its installation. A minimum of
150 mm extra length of cable/wire shall be provided at each termination
to facilitate repairs in future.

5.3 Cables on Surface/Trenches

All cables for installation on surface of wall, column, ceiling, trenches,

etc., shall be fixed to the surface by means of galvanized steel clips
secured to a steel channel using suitable stud plate, nuts and washers.
The distance between each cable clip shall be such so as to support the
entire weight of the cable and that distance between the cable & surface
and also the vertical clearance between two adjacent cables at any point
is 50mm minimum. Common mounting channels are to be furnished for
cable along the same route. The Contractor can offer alternate cable
fixing arrangement, which shall be approved by the Engineer before
commencement of installation.
 8212-5

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Bidding
Drawing related to the item.

6.2 Light Circuit Wiring

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number

of light circuit wiring from LT distribution board to
point/switch/push button including wiring between switches/push
buttons on the same circuit, acceptably carried out by the
Contractor as a complete unit.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing,
connecting, testing, commissioning and completion of the circuit
wiring from the LT distribution board to point/switch/push button
including wiring between switches/push buttons on the same
circuit complete with specified type of surface mounted/concealed
conduit, (PVC or steel) required No. specified size single core
PVC insulated cable, earth continuity conductor, accessories, etc.

6.3 Wiring of Light/Fan Point (Point to Switch, Point to Point, Two Way
or Group Controlled Light Points)

6.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total no. of

wiring of light/fan points (point to switch, point to point, two way or
group controlled light point), acceptably carried out by the
Contractor as a complete unit.

6.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each, and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing,
connecting, testing, commissioning and completion of the wiring
between light point to switch, point to point and two way light
points, including required no. of specified size single core PVC
insulated cable, specified type of surface mounted/concealed
conduit (PVC or Steel), earth continuity conductor, flexible cable,
ceiling rose, one way or two way 10A light control switch, blank
face plate, sheet steel box and other accessories, etc.

6.4 Wiring of Power Circuits (Distributor to spur outlets, socket outlets

& between sockets)

6.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number

of each type of wiring acceptably carried out by the Contractor as
a complete unit.

6.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each and
 8212-6

shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing,

connecting, testing, commissioning and completion of wiring of
spur outlets, socket outlets etc. from distribution board to spur
outlets, sockets or between sockets with specified size and
number of single core PVC cables including specified type of
surface mounted / concealed conduit (PVC or Steel), ECC and all
other accessories etc.

6.5 LT Cables

6.5.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

meter for each size and type of LT cable acceptably supplied and
installed by the Contractor.

6.5.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running meter of
each size and type of LT cable measured, as provided above, at
the Contract unit price each and shall constitute full compensation
for supplying, installing, connecting, testing and commissioning of
the LT cables including all accessories such as cable joints, lugs,
colour sleeves, glands, bush, etc. complete with plugging of
protective pipe/ sleeve ends for water tightening.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8212.doc
 8220-1

SECTION - 8220

WIRING ACCESSORIES

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this Section consists of supplying, installing, and commissioning
of all material and services of the complete switches, switch sockets, etc., as
specified herein, as shown on the Bidding Drawings and explained in the Bill of
Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and
coordinate at Site with other services for exact location and position of all wiring
accessories.

The wiring accessories such as switch, switch socket outlet, socket outlets and
ceiling rose etc. shall also comply with the General Specifications for electrical
works, Section 8001 and with other relevant provisions of the Bidding
Documents.

2.0 GENERAL

The locations of the wiring accessories such as sockets, switches etc. are
tentatively shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall ensure the exact
positions and locations of wiring accessories in coordination with other services
drawings, as per site requirements and as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for proper functioning of wiring accessories after
installation and commissioning.

The description of switches, switch sockets, socket outlets etc. are given in the
Bill of Quantities, stated on drawings and in this section. The Contractor shall
submit sample of each and every item of wiring accessories for the approval of
the Engineer.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest edition of following standards & codes shall be applicable for the
materials specified within the scope of this section:

BS 3676 - Switches for domestic and similar purposes.

BS 4343 - Industrial plugs, socket outlets and couplers for AC

and DC supplies.

BS 2135 - Capacitors for radio interference suppression.

BS 67 - Ceiling roses.

BS 546 - 2-pole and earthing pin plugs, socket outlets and socket
outlet adaptors.

BS 1362 - Specification for general purpose fuse links for domestic

and similar purposes.
 8220-2

BS 1363
(Part 4-1995) - Specification for 13A fused connection units: switched and
unswitched.
BS 5733
(1995) - Specification for general requirements for electrical
accessories.
DIN EN
60669-1 - Switches for household and similar fixed electrical
installations.

4.0 MATERIAL
4.1 Switches / Blank Face Plate
Switches for controlling light and fan points shall be single pole, rated for
10 Amps, 250 volts AC. The body of the switches shall be of
thermoplastic with faceplate suitable for flush mounting and colour as
approved by the Engineer. The switches shall be gang type having silver
tipped contacts and shall operate with snap action.
Unless otherwise specified wherever switches control only the light
points, these shall be plate type gang switches installed on common
outlet boxes. Where only sheet steel back box is indicated on drawings,
blank face plates shall be provided of same make and model as that of
switches.
Where specified weather proof or metal front plates shall be used with
single grid type switches. The plate shall be finished in specified colour or
as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The bell push switches shall be spring loaded type with the identification
symbol embossed on it.
Two-way switches shall be used to control lights from two different
locations as shown on the drawings.

4.2 5A/15A Switch-Socket Outlets

Switch socket units shall be 3 pin, 5 Amps/3 pin, 15 Amps 250V, AC with
faceplate of colour as approved by Engineer. The outlets shall be heavy-
duty type suitable for mounting on sheet steel outlet box. The 15Amps
Switch sockets outlets shall have sheltered live contacts and designed
such that the earth pin of plug is engaged to socket earth before making
of live contacts.
Where metal plate switches are installed, the switch socket units shall
also be provided with front plate of similar design.

4.3 16 A Socket Outlets/Duplex 16A Socket Outlets

16 Amp Socket Outlets shall be 2 pin + earth German type (Schuko)
socket outlets with faceplate of colour as approved by the Engineer.
Duplex 16 Amps Schuko units shall consist of 2 Nos. Prewired 2 pin +
earth German Type (Schuko) socket outlets with face plate of colour as
approved by the Engineer. The outlets shall be heavy-duty type suitable
for mounting on sheet steel outlet box. The 16 Amp Schuko Socket
Outlet shall be designed such that the earth pin of plug is engaged to
socket earth prior to making contact to the live contacts.
 8220-3

4.4 Connection Unit

Connection Unit shall be used to supply to appliances where specified or

shown on drawings. (Fancoil units / Hand drier / Water heaters / Water
Cooler etc.).

It shall be rated for 20A/25A, 250V AC or as shown on drawings or stated

in BOQ. The body shall be of thermoplastic material. Installation shall be
surface/ concealed as required.

Face plate and colour to be as per approval of Engineer.

Connectors shall be of best quality (for Phase, Neutral and Earth) and
suitable for the size of wiring.

The connection unit shall have the following features as per requirement
in B.O.Q or as shown on drawing.

- 20 A Double Pole Switch

- Fuse – Rating as per requirement of appliance

- Neon Indication light

- Grommetted outlet on face plate suitable for flexible wiring

connection to appliance

4.5 Fan Dimmers

The fan regulator/dimmer shall be made of low voltage electronic

components with essential radio frequency compressor and shall be
designed for smooth speed control/variation of fans. The
regulators/dimmer and fan control switches shall be of same make and
colour as that of the approved wiring accessories. The regulator/dimmer
and fan-controlling switch shall preferably be mounted on same face
plate. They shall be suitable for flush mounting on a sheet steel outlet
back box.

4.6 Sheet Steel Back Boxes

The sheet steel boxes for installation of switches, fan dimmers, socket,
outlets and blank face plates shall be made of 16 SWG sheet steel having
appropriate dimensions. The box shall have suitable arrangement for
receiving the conduit(s). An earth terminal shall be provided for
connecting at least three earth wires of 4-sq.mm size. The outlet box shall
be finished in powder-coated paint. The sheet steel back box shall be as
approved by the Engineer.

4.7 Ceiling Rose

The ceiling rose shall be suitable for 5 amps 250 volts single-phase ac. It
shall have white plastic moulded base plate, copper or brass terminals for
connecting at least two wires of 2.5-sq.mm size. The ceiling rose shall
have a cover with cable inlet hole suitable for multicore PVC insulated
and PVC sheathed cable.
 8220-4

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 General

The mounting heights of all wiring accessories are stated on the

drawings. In case the mounting height is not mentioned, the instructions
of the Engineer shall be obtained before fixing.

5.2 Switches, Blank Face Plates, 5A/15A Switch Socket, 16A Socket
Outlet, Duplex 16 Amp Socket Outlet & Connection Units

All wiring accessories shall be installed on 1.63 mm (16 SWG) thick sheet
steel box recessed in wall/column/floor. The faceplate shall be fixed on
sheet steel box by means of flat head galvanized screws sunk in the
faceplate so as to finish flush with the surface. Matching screw caps shall
be installed on the opening for screw in faceplates.

The industrial type sockets in polycarbonate enclosure shall be installed

on wall as shown on drawing.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Bidding
Drawing related to the item.

6.2 Blank Face Plates, 5A/15A Switch Socket Outlets, 16A Socket
Outlets, Duplex 16 Amp Socket Outlet & Connection Units

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number

of each type of socket outlet, complete with sheet steel back
boxes/ polycarbonate enclosure and all accessories acceptably
supplied and installed by the Contractor as a complete unit.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing,
connecting, testing and completion of each type and rating of
switch socket outlet including screws, screw caps, sheet steel
box/polycarbonate enclosure, nuts, bolts and other accessories as
connection unit required.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8220.doc
 8230-1

SECTION - 8230

CONDUITS AND PIPES

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing and commissioning
of all material and services of the complete Conduits and Pipes as specified
herein and/or shown on Bidding Drawings and stated in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-
ordinate at Site with other services for exact route, location and position of the
conduits and pipes.

The Contactor shall make necessary provisions in existing installations to

properly lay the required number of conduits / pipes. This shall be done in
coordination with other services for which approval of Engineer shall be obtained
prior to commencement of the work.

The conduits and pipes with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Bidding Document.

2.0 GENERAL

The extent of works shown on the drawing does not indicate the exact position of
conduits and pipes. The Contractor shall ensure exact location and route of
conduit and pipes in coordination with other services drawings, as per site
requirements and as directed by the Engineer.

The conduit system shall be continuous with manufacturer’s recommended

accessories.

The quality and material for the accessories of conduits and pipes such as
sockets, end cap, elbows, bushings, bends, inspection/pull boxes, round boxes,
etc., necessary for the complete installation shall be similar to that of conduits or
pipes. All the accessories shall be supplied by the Contractor without any extra
cost and deemed to have been included in the price of conduits/pipes.

Pull wire shall be laid in all empty conduits.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARD/CODES

The latest edition of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for the
materials specified within the scope of this section:

BS EN 61386 - Conduit systems for cable management

IEC 60614 - Conduits for electrical installations

BS 3505 - uPVC Pipes

 8230-2

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Galvanized Iron (G.I) Conduits and Accessories

G.I. conduits shall be used on surface for lighting and power circuits
wherever specified and required, as shown on drawings or given in BOQ.

The G.I. conduit shall be made of medium gauge mild steel, galvanized
inside and outside by hot dip galvanized process. The conduit shall be
free from stains, burrs or any other defects. The accessories for G.I.
conduit such as sockets, bends etc. shall also be galvanized inside and
outside and of the same quality and specification as the conduit. Each
length of conduit shall be furnished with threaded ends.

The round junction boxes for ceiling light points shall have minimum
dimensions of 64mm diameter and 64mm depth. The junction boxes for
wall light points shall have minimum dimensions of 64mm diameter and
40mm deep. Round junction boxes shall be provided with one piece cover
plate fixed to the box by means of brass screws.

4.2 PVC Conduit and Accessories

The PVC conduits and accessories for lighting and power circuits shall be
furnished by the Contractor as shown on the drawings or given in BOQ.
The PVC bends shall have enlarged ends to receive conduit without any
reduction in the internal diameter at joint. Manufactured smooth bends
shall be used where conduit changes direction. Bending of conduits by
heating or otherwise will be allowed in special situations only for which
the consent of the Engineer shall be required. The use of sharp 90
degree bends and tees will not be allowed for concealed wiring.

The round PVC junction boxes for ceiling light or fan points shall have
minimum dimensions of 63 mm diameter and depth. The junction boxes
for wall light points shall have minimum dimensions of 63 mm diameter
and 38 mm deep. Round junction boxes shall be provided with one piece
PVC cover plate fixed to the box by means of brass screws.

4.3 Inspection/Pull and Adaptable Boxes

Inspection/Pull boxes and adaptable boxes shall be provided in conduit

runs wherever required to facilitate pulling operation. The drawings are
diagrammatic and do not indicate the position and spacing of
inspection/pull boxes or adaptable boxes. However, these shall be as per
Engineer's approval.

4.4 uPVC Pipes and fittings

Unplasticised PVC pressure pipes and fittings shall conform to BS

3505:1968 and shall be of class-D (working pressure - 12 bars). The
buried uPVC pipes should be able to withstand the external load acting
upon it by continuous movements of heavy duty vehicles such as trucks,
cranes, forklift etc. where pipe changes direction, manufacturer smooth
bend shall be used.
 8230-3

Fittings and accessories for use with uPVC pressure pipes shall be of the
same class and manufacture as the pipe and shall have the required
shapes and dimensions of turned ends to fit the uPVC pressure pipes.
uPVC pipes and accessories shall be suitable for jointing with rubber
rings or solvent.

Bending of pipes by heating or otherwise will not be allowed. The use of

sharp 90 degree bends and tees will not be allowed. The bends shall
conform to same specifications as given for PVC conduits. For joining of
pipe all precautions and procedures recommended by manufacturer shall
be allowed.

Hard PVC or reinforced concrete pipe range spacers shall be used if

there is more than one pipe running in parallel. The distance between
pipe range spacers shall be maximum 2 meters. Pipe range spacers shall
be prefabricated/precast and decay resistant.

Flexible pipes shall be used as deemed essential or as approved by the

Engineer.

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 Galvanized Iron (G.I) Conduits and Accessories

The surface conduits shall be installed where shown on drawings/

mentioned in BOQ. The conduits shall be installed parallel or
perpendicular to the surface of wall, structural members, ceiling, etc., by
means of C.I. saddles and clamps of approved design. The conduits shall
be kept at least 150 mm away from any other services pipes.

The saddles shall be installed on surface by means of nylon or wooden

plugs and galvanized screws. Appropriate size of holes in structure shall
be made by drilling, the thickness of saddles shall not be less than 6mm
and clamps shall be of 16 SWG G.I. The surface conduits shall be
supported at a maximum of one metre spacing along horizontal and
vertical runs. All accessories for complete installation of conduit system
shall be provided by the Contractor. The pull boxes, etc. if required shall
be used for surface conduit system. The entire conduit system alongwith
the accessories shall be galvanized.

5.2 PVC Conduits and Accessories

5.2.1 Concealed Conduit

Where concealed conduit system is shown on drawings/

mentioned in BOQ, the conduit shall be installed concealed in
roof, wall, column, etc. Conduits shall be laid under floor only
where specifically stated. The entire conduit system shall be
installed and checked before wring is carried out. Any obstruction
found shall be cleared before the installation of cable.

When concealed, the conduit shall have a minimum of 32mm

cover of concrete measured from the top of conduit to finished
surface. In the reinforced cement concrete (RCC) work the conduit
shall be laid before pouring of concrete. Under no circumstances
 8230-4

shall chases be made in the RCC structure for concealing conduit

and accessories after pouring of concrete. The conduit shall be
supported on top of bottom reinforcement of slab. All outlet boxes
to be firmly supported and installed such that they finish flush with
the soffit of slab or beam.

Where conduits have to be concealed in cement concrete (CC)

work after concreting or in block masonry, chase shall be made
with appropriate tools and shall not be made deeper than
required. The conduit shall then be fixed firmly in the recess and
covered with cement concrete mixture. The work of cutting in the
cement concrete work or block masonry work shall be coordinated
with the civil work. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the
Engineer before starting chasing and cutting.

The termination of conduits at or near the equipment / switchboard

is shown diagrammatically on the drawings. The exact locations of
the termination shall be coordinated with the equipment /
switchboard to be installed. Any extension of conduit to suit the
site condition shall be made without any extra cost. Conduit ends
pointing upwards or downwards shall be properly plugged in order
to present the entry of foreign materials. All opening through which
concrete may leak shall be carefully plugged and boxes shall be
suitably protected against filling with concrete. At all terminations
of conduit, sharp edges of conduit ends shall be prevented to
avoid the cutting or damaging of wires or cables during pulling
through the conduits.

Under floor conduit shall be installed at a minimum depth of 2 inch

from the finished floor level or as shown on the drawings. The
conduits shall be installed empty, before finishing of floor or in
RCC work, with an 18 SWG steel wire drawn through the conduit
for pulling cable. No conduits shall be laid under floor in bathroom.

5.2.2 Surface Conduits

The surface conduits shall be installed where shown on drawings /

mentioned in BOQ. The conduits shall be installed parallel or
perpendicular to the surface of wall, structural members, ceiling,
etc., by means of PVC saddles and clamps of approved design.
The conduits shall be kept at least 150 mm away from parallel
runs of flues, steam pipes and hot water pipes.

The saddles shall be installed on surface by means of nylon or

wooden plugs and galvanized screws. Appropriate size of holes in
structure shall made by drilling, the thickness of saddles and
clamps shall be at appropriate thickness and prime quality. The
surface conduits shall be supported at maximum of one meter
spacing along horizontal and vertical runs. The Contractor shall
provide all accessories for complete installing of conduit system.
The pull boxes, etc. as stated for concealed conduits shall also be
applicable for surface conduit system.
 8230-5

5.3 uPVC Pipe and Fittings

uPVC pipes shall be installed as shown in the drawings. The depth of the
pipe shall vary according to the conditions at site, and approval of
Engineer shall be obtained prior to installation. In general the pipes shall
be installed underground at the following depths measured from the top of
the pipe.
- Under roads/pavement : 900 mm below finished surface.
- When crossing other services: 250/500 mm vertical/horizontal.

The trench of required dimensions shall be excavated and the bottom of

trench cleaned and leveled. A 100 mm bed of fine sand shall be provided
over which the PVC pipes installed after proper alignment. Where two or
more pipes are installed in the same trench the clearance between pipes
shall not less than 50 mm. This shall be done by the provision of pipe
range spacers as per Engineers approval. After laying of pipe the trench
shall be backfilled with clean screened sand at least 100 mm above the
top most pipes. The remaining portion of trench shall be backfilled with
selected earth in layers well compacted.

After installation, the ends of the pipe shall be plugged with manufactured
end cap impervious to water and chemicals. All joints shall be sealed
adequately not only to prevent entry of foreign elements but water
tightness shall be ensured.

The installation of pipes shall be completed in all respects including its

fixing at terminations, before cabling work is started. All sharp edges and
burrs shall be removed by using reamer or any approved device. The
pipe shall be through cleaned of dirt and dust from inside, the pipes shall
be installed in proper co-ordination with other works. All the necessary
arrangement in existing installation shall be made to properly lay the
required number of pipes or conduits.

The protective PVC pipe for cable entering building shall be installed so
as to lead cable into the cable trench. The required number of pipes shall
be fixed before completing the work in the plinth. If an opening is provided
to the cable trench from outside, the required number of pipes shall be
installed and part of the opening remained unutilized shall be properly
packed and sealed using suitable packing material impervious to water
and chemical to make it completely water-tight.

Spare pipes shall be provided with 5 mm dia nylon rope pulled from end
to end and plugged with manufactured end cap.

Flexible pipes of compatible material and size shall be used wherever

deemed essential.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractors bid amount against each item of Bill of Quantities as

given below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Bidding
Drawings related to the item.
 8230-6

6.2 Conduits (G.I. and PVC) / Pipes (PVC/uPVC) and Accessories

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

meter of each type and size of conduits / pipes and accessories
acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor according to
specification and as shown on drawings.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running meter of
each type and size of conduits / pipes measured as provided
above at the contract unit price each and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing and completion of the laying
of the conduits and pipes including all accessories related to the
item.

No separate payments shall be made for the under mentioned

specified work related to the supply and installation of conduit and
pipe. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in
the quoted rates of above work.

- Excavation and backfilling.

- Dewatering during excavation and backfilling.

- Providing and filling of fine sand in trenches.

- Providing pipe range spacers.

- Providing flexible pipes and accessories, jointing material/

compound, saddles, sockets, elbows, bend, junction boxes
reducers, 16SWG GI pull wire for empty conduit, and 5 mm
nylon rope for empty pipe, soft metal bush, making threads
and plugging of pipe with manufactured end cap etc.
whether used or left spare.

- Compacted backfilling of trenches with specified material

and disposal of surplus and rejected material.

- Watertight sealing of any unutilized opening to the

buildings after installing the protective pipes entering the
buildings.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8230.doc
 8240-1

SECTION - 8240

EARTHING

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and services of the complete Earthing system as
specified herein, as shown on the Bidding Drawings and given in the Bill of
Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-
ordinate at Site with other services for exact route, location and position of the
earth electrode and ECC etc.

The Earthing system shall also comply with the General Specifications for
Electrical Works Section - 8001 and with other relevant provisions of the Bidding
Documents.

2.0 GENERAL

The earthing system consists of earth electrodes, earthing leads, earth

connecting points, earth continuity conductors and all accessories necessary for
the satisfactory operation of the associated electrical system.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest editions of following standards / codes shall be applicable for the
materials specified within the scope of this section:

BS 951 - Earthing clamps

CP 1013 - Earthing

BS 2874 - Nuts, bolts, washers, screws and rivets fixing for use on copper

BS 6346 - PVC insulated cables

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Earth Electrodes

4.1.1 Plate Type

The plate type earth electrode shall comprise a 600 x 600 x 3mm
electrolytic copper plate. The surface of the plate shall be tinned
for protection. The plate shall have four terminals for connecting
the earthing leads. Nuts bolts and washers, shall be either of
brass or tinned copper. A 50 mm dia. G.I. pipe shall be provided
from inspection chamber to earth plate for watering purpose. This
pipe shall have 10 mm dia. holes at 500 mm centre to centre all
along the length.
 8240-2

At the ground level an inspection chamber with cast iron cover

shall be constructed having dimensions as shown on the
drawings. The inspection chamber shall have a cover supported
on angle iron frame. The cover shall be hinged type, as approved
by the Engineer and shall finish flush with the ground level.

4.1.2 Rod Type

This type of earth electrode shall comprise a 3 metre long, 20 mm

dia. copper clad steel rod having flat head at drive end and
pointed conical tip at the driven end. The tip shall be hardened to
facilitate driving. At the top of the rod, a brass clamp for bolted
connections shall be provided suitable for connection to the down
conductor or earthing lead as required.

The inspection chamber with C.I. cover shall be provided as

instructed by the Engineer.

4.2 Earthing Leads

The earthing leads shall connect the earth electrode to earth connecting
point or equipment in the building. It shall be of stranded electrolytic
copper. It can be bare or PVC insulated (green or green/yellow) of sizes
shown on the drawings. The cost of earthing leads deemed to have been
included in the price of earth electrode and no separate payment shall be
made for it.

4.3 Earth Continuity Conductors (ECCs)

Earth continuity conductors (ECC) shall be stranded bare copper wire or

single core PVC insulated (green or green/yellow), copper conductor
cable of sizes indicated on the drawings. All thimbles, lugs, sockets, nuts,
washers & other accessories necessary for the complete installation of
ECC shall be provided by the Contractor without any extra cost.

The specifications for single core PVC insulated cables used as ECC
shall be same as those given in section "LT Cables" of the technical
specifications. PVC insulated cables when used as ECC shall be green
or green/yellow.

4.4 Earth Connecting Points (ECPs)

Earth connecting points shall comprise tinned copper bar, rectangular

in shape, having dimensions of at least 50 x 6 mm and 300 mm long. At
least six terminals for connection shall be arranged on the bar, which can
be increased or decreased as required by the Engineer. The length of
earth connecting points shall be suitably increased, if more than six earth
wires are required to be terminated on the same ECP.

The terminals shall have brass or tinned copper bolts, nuts and washers
for protection against corrosion. Two holes shall be provided off centre of
the copper bar for fixing to the wall by means of 10 mm dia. nut and bolt
and shall be insulated by means of rubber gaskets/washers, porcelain
insulators, etc.
 8240-3

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 General

Complete earthing systems as shown on the drawing shall be installed by

the Contractor. The earthing system shall give earth resistance, including
the resistance of soil, earth leads and ECC equal to or less than one
ohm.

At all connections of earth continuity conductors to Generators,

Transformers, LT Switch Boards, LT Distribution Boards, or any other
metallic body, proper size copper or brass sockets, thimbles or lugs shall
be used to which the copper wire shall be connected by copper brazing.
The soldering of copper wire at joints or terminations shall not be allowed.
All tee-off connections shall be by copper brazing using suitable socket
and clamps. After brazing, the jointed surface shall be protected by oxide
inhibiting compound of low electrical resistance. For connections to
metallic body, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned before bolting the
lug or socket.

The earth continuity conductor shall in general run in cable trench or in

conduits/pipes as shown on the drawings. For under floor runs, these
shall be installed in pipe/conduit of appropriate sizes. Where laid along
underground cables, these shall be laid directly underground in unpaved
areas and in pipes under paved areas.

The earthing system shall be tested after complete installation of earth

electrodes.

5.2 Earth Electrodes

5.2.1 Plate Type

The electrode plate shall be installed at a minimum depth of 5

metres from finished ground level or 1 metre below permanent
water level whichever is less. The minimum horizontal distance
between earth electrodes shall be 3 metres. Proper mixture of
lime and charcoal shall be made and buried alongwith the copper
plate in the ground to increase the soil conductivity. The electrode
shall be installed as per details shown on the drawings. The
inspection chambers shall be constructed at locations approved
by the Engineer.

5.2.2 Rod Type

In case the soil conditions at site permit and approved by the

Engineer, this type of earth electrode may be installed by
hammering the electrode in soil, until the top of the rod is about
300 mm below the proposed finished ground level. If hammering
down of rod is not possible due to site conditions, a pit shall be
first excavated in bare ground upto the required depth and
electrode shall be installed upright in the pit. The excavated pit
shall be backfilled in layers of 500 mm, each layer tamped and
compacted.
 8240-4

5.3 Earth Continuity Conductors

The earth continuity conductors of sizes shown on the drawings shall be

installed all along the cable runs and connected to the earthing
bar/terminals provided in equipment. The bodies of generators,
transformers and all switchboards shall also be connected to earth by
specified size of ECC. All other metal work shall also be connected to
earth by specified size of ECC.

At any joint or terminations, the ECC shall be connected using proper

accessories. No connection shall be made by twisting of earth
conductors.

5.4 Earth Connecting Points

The earth connecting points shall be installed at locations shown on the

drawings. These shall be fixed on wall surface by means of brass screws
with nuts, washers, porcelain insulators and other insulating material as
instructed by the Engineer.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supplying, installation, testing, and commissioning of
all work specified herein, as shown on the Bidding drawing related to the
item.

6.2 Earth Electrodes

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total no. of

each type of earth electrode acceptably supplied and installed by
the Contractor as a complete unit.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units

measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each, and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, testing,
commissioning and completion of earth electrodes including
copper plate or copper clad steel rod, earthing leads, excavation,
backfilling, lime and charcoal, inspection chamber with cover, GI
pipes for earthing leads/watering, nuts, bolts, washers, lugs,
brazing and all related civil works.

6.3 Earth Continuity Conductors (ECC)

6.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

feet of each size and type of earth continuity conductor (ECC)
acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor.

6.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running feet of
each size and type of ECC measured, as provided above, at the
Contract unit price and shall constitute full compensation for
supplying, installing, connecting, testing and completing of ECC
including all accessories such as sockets, thimbles, lugs, bolts,
nuts, washers, brazing, etc.
 8240-5

6.4 Earth Connecting Points

6.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total no. of

earth connecting points acceptably supplied and installed by the
Contractor as a complete unit.

6.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing and
completion of earth connecting point and all other associated
accessories such as nuts, bolts, washers, lugs, porcelain
insulators, etc.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8240.doc
 8250 - 1

SECTION - 8250

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all materials and accessories of the complete Lightning Protection
System as specified herein, as shown on the Tender Drawings and given in the Bill
of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-ordinate
at Site with other services for exact route, location and position of the lightning
protection system.

The lightning protection system with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications for Electrical Works Section - 8001 and with other relevant provisions
of the Tender Documents.

2.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall install the system as specified herein and in accordance with
the referred standard. The extent of work specified or shown on the drawings is
schematic and does not indicate the exact position of testing terminals, conductor
connections, etc. However, the Contractor shall ensure that the system is complete
in all respect as intended by the specifications. The earthing resistance of lightning
protection system at any point in the system shall not exceed THREE OHMS.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest editions of following standards / codes shall be applicable for the
materials specified within the scope of this section:

BS 6651 - Protection of structures against lightning.

CP 326 - Protection of structures against lightning (code of practice)

BS 2873 - Copper and copper alloys

BS 2874 - Copper and copper alloys - Rods and section (other than forging stock)

BS 1433 - Hard drawn bare copper conductor for earthing

 8250 - 2

4.0 MATERIAL

The installation of lightning protection system shall comprise;

- Air terminal
- Down/Roof conductors.
- Testing terminals.
- Earth electrode (Copper Clad Steel Rod Type)

4.1 Air Terminal

The air terminal for lightning protection system shall be of solid copper 1.5
metre long, 10 mm dia with appropriate base suitable for connection of
required number of roof/down conductors.

The structural design shall be submitted by the contractor for review in

accordance with wind & seismic loads given in the relevant sections.

4.2 Down/Roof Conductors

The down/roof conductors for lightning protection system shall be 8 mm dia

bare tinned copper conductor. All connections between metal work on the
roof shall be with the same conductor sizes and material as for roof
conductor. All accessories for fixing of copper conductor to concrete surface
shall be of copper or brass as approved by the Engineer.

4.3 Testing Terminals

For each down conductor, a testing terminal shall be provided. It shall be

installed 1.5 metres above the finished floor level or as convenient for testing
purposes and as directed by the Engineer. The testing terminals shall have
removable connections.

4.4 Earth Electrode (Copper Clad Steel Rod Type)

This type of earth electrode shall comprise a 2 metre long, 20 mm dia.

copper clad steel rod having flat head at drive end and pointed conical tip at
the driven end. The tip shall be hardened to facilitate driving. At the top of the
rod, a brass clamp for bolted connections shall be provided suitable for
connection to the down conductor or earthing lead as required.

The inspection chamber with C.I. cover shall be provided as specified for
plate type earth electrode.
 8250 - 3

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 Air Terminal

The base of the air terminal shall be properly fixed to roof of the building and
all roof/down conductors properly bolted. The threaded air terminal shall than
be placed. The entire assembly shall be installed in compliance to wind
loading / structural calculations.

5.2 Roof Conductor

The horizontal air terminations or roof conductors shall be installed on the

roof as shown on the drawings. the copper conductor shall be firmly secured
to the concrete surface by means of copper or brass clamps of approved
design at a maximum interval of 500 mm.

The roof conductor shall be connected to the copper rod by means of copper
clamps. The clamp to be tightly fixed to the rod and brazed to ensure low
resistance path to earth. The contact surface between copper clamp and
conductor shall be cleaned, silver painted, brazed after bolting and provided
with a coat of anti corrosive paint after installation.

5.3 Down Conductor

The down conductor shall be installed along the shortest possible route from
roof to earth electrode. It shall be secured on the surface of wall by means of
clamps at a maximum interval of 300 mm.

In general, bends shall be avoided along the routes of down conductor and
maximum possible bending radius will be provided at turns. All joints
between conductors shall be electrically and mechanically strong and
effective. Straight joints in the down conductor shall be bolted. The joint shall
be given a coat of anti corrosive paint after connection. All accessories such
as nuts, bolts, washers, solder, paint etc. shall be furnished by the
Contractor.

For each down conductor a removable terminal shall be provided for testing
purpose at approximately 1.5 metre height. The location of testing terminals
are not shown on the drawings. The Contractor must ensure that testing
terminals are installed so as to facilitate testing. The testing terminals shall
be bolted type and made in accordance with the specifications for straight
bolted joints. The connecting earth lead from testing terminals to earth
electrodes shall be continuous without any joint. All metal work, pipes etc., at
the roof and within 2 metres along the route of Down conductor shall be
bonded to the lightning protection system. The bonding shall be effective and
approval of the Engineer shall be obtained for the bonding method.
 8250 - 4

5.4 Earth Electrode (Copper Clad Steel Rod Type)

In case the soil conditions at site permit, this type of earth electrode may be
installed by hammering the electrode in soil, until the top of the rod is about
300 mm below the proposed finished ground level. If hammering down of rod
is not possible due to site conditions, a pit shall be first excavated in bare
ground upto the required depth and electrode shall be installed upright in the
pit. The excavated pit shall be backfilled in layers of 500 mm, each layer
tamped and compacted.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supplying, installation, testing, and commissioning and
completion of all work specified herein, as shown on the Tender drawing
related to the item.

6.2 Air Terminal

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number of

air terminal acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of air terminal
measured, as provided above, at the Contract unit price each, and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, testing,
commissioning and completion of the air terminal including all
accessories, such as sockets, thimbles, lugs, bolts nuts, brazing, etc.

6.3 Down/Roof Conductors

6.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

metre of down/roof conductors acceptably supplied and installed by
the Contractor.

6.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running metre of
down/roof conductors measured, as provided above, at the Contract
unit price each, and shall constitute full compensation for supplying,
installing, testing, commissioning and completion of the down/roof
conductors including all accessories, such as sockets, thimbles, lugs,
bolts nuts, brazing, etc.
 8250 - 5

6.4 Earth Electrode (Copper Clad Steel Rod Type)

6.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number of

copper clad steel rod type earth electrode acceptably supplied,
installed and tested by the Contractor as a complete unit.

6.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units measured,
as provided above at the Contract Unit Price each, and shall
constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, testing,
commissioning and completion of the copper clad steel rod type earth
electrode including testing terminal, earthing lead from testing
terminals to earth electrodes, excavation, backfilling, civil works for
inspection chamber, cast iron cover, G.I. pipe for earthing lead etc.
and all accessories, such as sockets, thimbles, lugs, bolts nuts,
brazing, etc.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8250(muq)
 8290-1

SECTION - 8290

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and accessories for Miscellaneous Items as
specified herein and/or shown on the drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and
coordinate at site with other services for exact locations and positions of the
Miscellaneous Items.

The Miscellaneous Items with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications for Electrical Works Section - 8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Bidding Document.

2.0 GENERAL

The Miscellaneous Items as described in this section shall comply with other
sections of these specifications as applicable. The Contractor shall ensure that
all the miscellaneous items be supplied/fabricated from the reputable
manufacturers, who have already supplied/fabricated similar items.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be applicable to the

material specified within the scope of this section:

IEC 60947-2 - Low Voltage Switch Gear and Control Gear.

BS 729 - Hot dip galvanization
BS 4934 - Safety requirements for electric fans and regulators.
BS 5060 - Performance of circulating fans and their regulators.
BS 5649 - Lighting Columns
BS EN 50085 - Cable trunking and cable ducting systems for electrical
installations.
BS EN 61537 - Cable tray systems and cable ladder systems for cable
management
BS EN 62040 - Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 MCCB / MCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box

The single / double pole 250 volts miniature circuit breaker (MCB) and
triple pole 500 volts moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) are used for
supplying single phase and three phase power respectively to the
equipment shown on the drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.
 8290-2

The MCCB/MCB shall conform to the same specifications as given in

section LT switchboards and LT distribution boards of these
specifications. It shall be installed in a 16 SWG sheet steel box of such a
size, which can easily accommodate the MCCB/MCB and incoming/
outgoing wires or cables. Sufficient numbers of PVC connectors shall also
be provided inside the sheet steel box for terminating the earth continuity
conductors and neutral wires. The front plate fixed on the sheet steel box
shall be of white plastic fixed with G.I. screws having an opening for
operating the ON-OFF lever of MCCB / MCB.
4.2 Load Break Switch Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box
Single pole 250 volts and triple pole 500 volts load break switch are used
for supplying single phase and three phase power respectively to the
equipment shown on the drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.
The load break switch shall conform to the same Specifications as given
in section LT switchboard and LT distribution boards of these
Specifications. It shall be housed in a, manufacturer’s standard and in
such a size of box which can easily accommodate the load break switch
and incoming / outgoing wires alongwith the earth continuity conductor
and neutral wires terminals.
4.3 Ceiling Fan
Ceiling fan shall be capacitor type, suitable for 250V AC. The air
displacement shall be 12,000 cfm for 56” (1422 mm) sweep and 10,000
cfm for 48” (1219 mm) sweep at maximum speed. The fan motor shall be
capacitor type and bearing shall be groove type to give noiseless
operation. The fan regulator / dimmer shall be made of low voltage
electronic components, and shall be suitable for the speed control of fans.
The body of the regulators shall be matching with the switching
accessories, suitable for flush mounting on a sheet steel outlet box.
Where the regulators are to be mounted with switches they shall match
with the dimensions of switches and shall be fixed on plastic outlet by
means of flat headcounter sunk galvanized screws, with the head of the
screws finish flush with the surface of the plate. The complete fan with
blades and canopy shall be finished in white colour, or as approved by
the Engineer.
The fan hook shall be made of 16 mm diameter mild steel rod. It should
be in the form of a loop about 75 mm long and about 50 mm wide. The
rod should be bent to have atleast 200 mm extension on both sides for
tying to reinforcement steel of slab.
4.4 Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fans shall be three blade or multi blade type of metal / PVC
construction as approved by the Engineer.
Fans shall be direct driven and supplied complete with electric motor,
back draft dampers and anti-vermin screen.
The bearings shall be ball roller or sleeves type of permanently lubricated
and sealed type.
Wheels shall be heavily and rigidly constructed and accurately balanced
both statically and dynamically and be free from objectionable vibration or
noises.
 8290-3

4.5 Cable Trays / Trunking

Where specified, the cables shall run on cable trays/trunking supported to
the wall and/or ceiling. The tray shall be of appropriate dimensions to
ensure minimum clearance of 50mm between the cables. Tray and
trunking shall be provided with complete accessories such as straight
through joint, flexible expansion coupler, tee, cross, internal and external
bend, cover etc. complete with proper support and fixing accessories, GI
nuts, bolts washer etc.
The cable tray/ trunking length shall be fabricated in sections not
exceeding 3.0 metres.
4.5.1 M.S. (Mild Steel) Cable Trunking
The M.S. cable trunking (with cover) shall be 16 SWG M.S.
sheets. Suitable trunking design shall be provided for bends,
crossings, etc., keeping in view allowable bending radius of
cables.
Arrangement shall be provided to secure the cables in position on
the trunking. After fabrication of each trunking and cover section,
the metalwork shall be cleaned down to bare shining metal
phosphated and the surface chemically prepared for powder
coating. Then these shall be coated with powder of RAL colour as
approved by the Engineer and then baked in oven. The thickness
of powder coating shall not be less than 100 microns.
4.5.2 G.I. (Galvanized Iron) Trays/Cable Trunking
The G.I. trays/cable trunking shall comprise of 16 SWG perforated
G.I. Sheets bend to shape and having required dimensions and
all accessories shall be compatible with the tray to make a smooth
medium.
Cables laid on tray or trunking shall be properly fixed or clamped,
with smooth finished split pieces with bore diameter to suit the
cable. Supports shall be arranged as far as practicable for easy
removal of any cable without disturbing other cables.
Copper braid connections shall be provided at every joint, fixing
accessories of cable tray to ensure continuity.

4.6 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System

The ON-LINE uninterruptible power supply system shall be as per EN

50091. The UPS system shall be designed to supply uninterrupted,
conditioned electrical power to the electrical systems.

The system shall consist of complete UPS units, each comprising a

rectifier / charger and inverter, a bypass unit with a static bypass switch, a
maintenance bypass switch and battery panel.

The UPS system shall supply continuous, ON-LINE electrical power

within specified tolerance limits to the connected load, upon failure or
deterioration of the normal mains supply, ensuring uninterrupted clean
electrical power to the load in accordance with the specified battery
autonomy.
 8290-4

4.6.1 UPS System Operation

The UPS system shall operate in the following modes:

4.6.1.1 Normal Operation

The rectifier / charger shall draw AC power from the mains

and supply DC power to the inverter while simultaneously
float charging the battery. The inverter shall supply clean
uninterrupted AC power to the load.

4.6.1.2 Emergency Operation

On failure or deterioration of the mains supply beyond

specified tolerances, the inverter shall continue to supply
the load from battery source without interruption or
disturbance.

4.6.1.3 Battery Recharge

When mains power is restored, the rectifier/charger shall

again supply power to the inverters without interruption or
disturbance to the load, at the same time recharge the
battery.

4.6.1.4 Automatic Bypass Operation

The UPS unit shall include automatically operated static

bypass system. In the event of overloads exceeding
system capabilities or inverter shutdown for maintenance
or due to internal faults, the static bypass transfer switch
shall instantaneously transfer the load to the bypass
source without interruption.

4.6.1.5 Manual Bypass Operation

The UPS shall include a manually operated mechanical

bypass system for maintenance purposes. The system
shall be designed to isolate the inverter and the static
switch while maintaining load power via the bypass source.

Transfer to the maintenance bypass shall take place

without interruption to the load. An isolating device shall
also be provided to isolate the rectifier / charger from the
mains power supply.

4.6.1.6 Operation Without Batteries

It shall be possible to isolate the battery from the rectifier/

charger and the inverter by means of a circuit breaker for
maintenance purposes.

In such a case the UPS shall continue to supply the load

except in the events of mains power outage.
 8290-5

4.6.2 Electrical Characteristics

4.6.2.1 Input Power

The UPS shall be designed to receive power from the

mains with the following characteristics:

Voltage = 380/400/415 volts AC + 10%/ - 15%

Wiring = 3 phase, 4 wire + earth

Frequency = 50 Hz + 5%

Power Factor = 0.8

4.6.2.2 Rectifier / Charger

i) Starting Currents

In order to limit inrush currents on starting a “soft

start” power walk-in circuit shall be provided in the
rectifier / charger input. The soft start shall be
accomplished in 10 seconds.

ii) Charging Current

The charging current shall be automatically limited

by an electronic device to the maximum value as
specified by the battery manufacturer. A device
shall also limit the power drawn by the
rectifier/charger to the rated KVA.

iii) Charging Voltage

The DC voltage shall be set in to the charge/

floating value specified by the lead-acid battery
manufacturer.

DC output voltage fluctuations shall be regulated to

less than 1% irrespective of load and mains supply
voltage variations.

iv) Input Filter

The rectifier / charger shall be equipped with a filter
limiting the DC ripple voltage to a value less than
1% of the DC voltage.

v) Surge-Arrester
A surge-arrester of adequate capacity shall be fitted
at the power input. The surge arrester must be able
to protect the UPS and all downstream equipment
under all modes of operation.
 8290-6

4.6.2.3 Battery Panel

The batteries shall be lead acid type, maintenance-free,

housed in matching enclosures. The battery size shall be
adequate to supply power to the inverter for specified time
in the event of an outage on the normal mains supply, with
the UPS system operating at rated load and power factor.
Battery ratings shall be based on an operating temperature
range upto 40 oC. A circuit breaker shall be provided in the
battery circuit. All connection cables shall be provided for
battery panel.

4.6.2.4 Inverter

The inverter shall be of adequate size to ensure that the

UPS system can supply rated load at rated p.f., as per the
following requirements:

i) Voltage Characteristics
a) Rated voltage = 380/400/415V (pre-set on
commissioning) 3 phase + neutral.
b) Steady state voltage regulation = + 1% for a load
between 0 and 100% of full rated value irrespective
of normal mains supply and DC voltage levels
(within the limits specified above).
c) Transient voltage regulation = + 5% of rated
voltage for a 100% load step change. The voltage
shall return to within steady state tolerances in less
than 10 milli seconds.
d) Voltage distortion with linear load < 1%
e) Voltage distortion with 100% non-linear load < 3%
phase to phase, < 5% phase to neutral.
f) Voltage phase shift with 100% unbalanced load =
120o + 1o
g) Output filter: the inverter shall be provided with an
output filter to limit single harmonic distortion to 3%
and total harmonic distortion to less than 5%
irrespective of load and normal mains supply
(within the limits specified above).

ii) Frequency Characteristics:

a) Rated frequency = 50 Hz

b) The output frequency of the inverter shall be

synchronised to that of the bypass power supply
within the limits of + 0.5 Hz.
c) For mains frequency variations exceeding the
above limits, the inverter shall switch over to a free-
running mode, with regulation providing an output
frequency to within + 0.1% of the rated value.
 8290-7

iii) Overload Capacity

The UPS shall be able to supply 110% load for 60

minutes, 125% load for 10 minutes, 150% load for
1 minute, on 3-phase and 200% load for 30
seconds on 1-phase.

4.6.2.5 Static Bypass

The UPS system shall be provided with static bypass

switch to initiate instantaneous load transfer from the
inverter to the mains power supply and vice-versa without
interruption.

The static bypass shall be completely independent of other

components. It shall provide the load with uninterruptible
supply in the following situations:

- Overloading of inverter
- Inverter fault
- Short circuit in load
- During manual switchover from inverter to bypass
operation.

Synchronised transfer to bypass shall take place in zero

millisecond.

Unsynchronised transfer to bypass shall take place in 20

millisecond.

4.6.3 Mechanical Features

The UPS enclosure shall be of sheet steel construction, protected

against corrosion, derusted, degreased, phosphated and powder
coated or equivalent.

The enclosure shall be space saving modular, rigid framework

construction with easily removable panels. The front panel shall
be detachable and shall have a safety lock. Access to
components shall be from the front or from above via removable
cover. The rear panel shall be removable. The enclosure shall
have height adjustable feet to ensure stable installation and
levelling facilities. Each UPS system unit shall be housed in an
integral enclosure. The battery shall be housed in a separate
enclosure. Connection terminals shall be provided. Bus bars shall
be made of electrolytic copper. Cable entry shall be from bottom/
rear. Ventilation fans with low noise generation shall be provided.
Standby fans shall be provided and annunciation for fan failure
shall be included.

The maximum sound level of the UPS shall be 56 db(A) at one

meter. All live parts shall be adequately insulated/shielded.
 8290-8

4.6.4 Controls, Indications, Protection

The Control and Indicator Panel shall be mounted on the front

side. It shall provide information to the operator to monitor the
status and facilitate operation of the UPS system.

4.6.4.1 Controls

The following main controls shall be provided:

i) Switching from UPS operation to BYPASS

operation.
ii) Rectifier / Charger ON/OFF
iii) Inverter ON/OFF
iv) Self-test
v) Remote control and monitoring facility on remote
control unit or PC.

4.6.4.2 Indications / Alarms

The following indications/alarms shall be provided:

i) Status of mains supply.

ii) Status of battery.
iii) Rectifier / Charger ON.
iv) Load on inverter.
v) Load on bypass.
vi) Charger fault.
vii) Inverter overheating.
viii) Fan fault.
ix) Bttery autonomy.
x) Bypass defect.
xi) Overload.

4.6.4.3 Protection

The UPS shall include protection against the following:

i) Input over voltage.

ii) Load short circuits.
iii) Over temperature.
iv) Emergency stop in event of fire on receiving signal
from building fire alarm control panel.
v) DC voltage low.

4.6.4.4 Metering

The following measurements shall be indicated:

i) Mains input voltage.
ii) Rectifier / charger current.
iii) Battery voltage.
iv) Battery current (Normal / Charge).
v) Inverter output voltage.
vi) Inverter output frequency.
vii) Inverter output current.
 8290-9

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 General

The mounting heights, depths and other dimensions of all the

Miscellaneous Items are stated on the drawings or in general notes. In
case of any discrepancy, the instructions of the Engineer shall be
obtained before fixing the item.

5.2 MCCB / MCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box

The triple pole moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) single/double pole
miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be installed on 1.63 mm (16 SWG)
thick sheet steel box with screws or some suitable arrangements as
approved by Engineer. White faceplate for sheet steel box shall be fixed
by means of flat head galvanized screws sunk in the plastic plate so as to
finish flush with the wall surface. The edges of the plate shall be
champhered.

5.3 Load Break Switch enclosed in Sheet Steel Box

The load break switch shall be installed as per manufacturer’s

recommendation and site conditions following good engineering practice.

5.4 Ceiling Fans

Fan hooks shall be installed in the RCC ceiling and to the reinforcement
before pouring of concrete.

The installation of fans shall include fixing of blades, down rod, clamp,
canopy, including testing and commissioning. The down rod shall be of
required length having long threads and shall be provided with check nuts
to secure it firmly with the clamp and with the body of the fan. A split pin
shall be provided both at the fan body end and at the clamp for safety.
Any scratches on the body of the fan or fan rod appearing during
installation shall be cleaned and painted properly with the same quality
paint as provided by the manufacturer.

Wiring between the ceiling rose and the fan terminals shall be carried out
with atleast three core 1.0 sq.mm PVC insulated PVC sheathed flexible
cables.

5.5 Exhaust Fan

The propeller exhaust fan shall be installed in the opening already made
in the wall and shall be firmly fixed by means of flat and head galvanized
screws.

Wiring between the ceiling rose and the fan terminals shall be with atleast
three core 2.5 sq.mm PVC insulated PVC sheathed flexible cables.

5.6 Cable Trays/Trunking

The cable trays/trunking shall be installed on supports fixed to the wall

and/or ceilings/trusses. The supports shall be fixed to civil works by
means of Rawl bolts. The additional hangers and other metalwork
required for the installation of the trays/trunking shall be painted and
finished by method as specified for the cable tray/trunking.
 8290-10

The distance between alternate supports (span) in straight runs shall be

finalized as per loading and in no case shall exceed 1.2 metres. In
addition to these, supports shall be provided near each bend or change in
direction, end of trunking/ tray.

The straight jointing, bends and other accessories shall be fixed with
cable tray/ trunking in such a manner that they are in one line with no
sharp edges/ protruded surfaces. Rivet head nuts shall be installed on
inner side of tray/ trunking.

On straight lengths (Over 20 meters) and at every building expansion joint

suitable flexible expansion couplers shall be provided.

At each joint, bend earth continuity shall be ensured by using copper

earth braid and copper lugs in electro-tinned finish.

5.7 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System

UPS installation shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with

the recommendations/instructions of the manufacturer. The installation
work shall be carried out under the supervision of Contractor’s trained
engineer to the satisfaction of the Owner/Consultant/Engineer, Installation
work shall include all earthing to the UPS system from the existing
distribution boards as per requirements and all power and control cable,
conduit, trunking etc. shall be provided by the Contractor. The work shall
include all cable terminations and labelling. The work shall also include
angle iron supports at the base for UPS and stabilizer.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor’s bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein, as shown on the Bidding
Drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities related to the item.

6.2 MCCB / MCB / Load Break Switch Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the number of

each item acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor as a
complete unit.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units

measured as provided above at the contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing,
connecting, testing and completion of each item including sheet
steel outlet box, plate and accessories as required.

6.3 Ceiling Fan / Exhaust Fan

6.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for each type of fan

& Accessories acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor
as a complete unit.
 8290-11

6.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units

measured as provided above at the contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing,
connecting, testing and commissioning of each type of fans
including mounting, accessories such as down rod, clamp,
canopy, dimmer, nuts, bolts, etc. and wiring between ceiling rose
and fan terminals complete in all respects.

6.4 Cable Trays/Cable Trunking

6.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made of the total running

meter of each size of cable tray/cable trunking with all accessories
acceptably supplied and installed by the contractor.

6.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running meter as
provided above at the contract unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing, and completion of each
size of cable tray/cable trunking for cables complete with all
installation material and accessories such as mounting brackets,
bend, elbow, nuts and bolts etc.

6.6 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System

6.5.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number

of each type of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System with
all accessories acceptably supplied and installed by the contractor
as complete unit.

6.5.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured as provided above at the contract unit price each and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, and
completion of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System
complete with all installation material and accessories.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8290.doc
 8312 - 1

SECTION – 8312

STRUCTURED CABLING

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and services for Structured Cabling specified herein,
as shown on Tender Drawings and stated in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the structured cabling layout with the Engineer and co-
ordinate at site with other services for exact route, location and position of the
system.

The Structured Cabling work with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications, Section – 8001 and with other relevant provisions of the Tender
Document.

2.0 GENERAL

Specification of Structured Cabling are included to understand requirement / type of

system already installed at ground floor of Passenger Terminal Building. All
equipment for first floor shall be of same type / make as provided / installed at
ground floor.

The Structured Cabling System shall comprise the following components:

a) Fibre optic Backbone Cable.

b) Fibre optic Patch Panels VF-45 type.

c) Fibre optic Patch Cords, VF-45 type.

d) Cat-6 STP Modular/Configurable RJ45 data patch panel.

e) Cat-6 STP 4 pair data patch cord with RJ45/RJ45 plugs.

f) Cat-6 STP 4-Pair Data Drop Cords with RJ 45/RJ 45 plugs.

g) Front cable management.

h) Rear cable management.

i) Cat-6 STP RJ45 outlets.

The LAN Cabling System shall support the following systems, but not be limited to
these systems.

Data Processing

Mainframe access, Client Server, Enterprise Server, Messaging Systems and

Electronic Mail, common document utilization, Client Database, Voice and Video,
etc.
 8312 - 2

Data Communications

EIA-232-D, RS-422, RS-423, ISDN, Ethernet (10 Base-T, 100 Base-T and 1000
Base-T), 100 Base VG Any LAN, Token Ring, Fibre Distributed Data Interface
(FDDI), Twisted Pair-Physical Medium Dependant (TP-PMD) and ATM (155 Mbs
and 622 Mbs), etc.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES

The following standards and all “normative addendums” shall be applicable to this
document and must be adhered to for any installation work performed.

EIA/TIA 568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.

EIA/TIA 569-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

Pathways and Spaces.

TSB 67 Transmission Performance Specifications for Field-Testing of

Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems.
IEEE 802.3 Wire Speed Performance

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

4.0 MATERIALS

4.1 Optical Fibre Cable

Fibre Optic Cable – Indoor Applications

The construction of the cable shall consist of a polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

coated central strength member, surrounded by tight buffer coated optical
fibres with additional strength members made up of Aramid yarn. All this
construction shall be encased in a flame-retardant Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
outer jacket.

The fibre optic able shall be a compact flexible cable. Tight buffered cables,
specifically designed for indoor applications, shall be suitable for riser
backbone cabling.

The cable jacketing system shall be constructed of flame retardant material

and shall be riser rated in accordance with NEC Article 770, UL Subject
1666.

Cable Buffered fibres surrounded by outer jacket

Outer Jacket Flame retardant Polyvinyl chloride PVC
Outer Jacket Colour Orange
Flammability Meet the requirements of NEC Article 770 for
type OFNR.
 8312 - 3

Fibre Type Multi-mode Meets FDDI ANSI X3T9.5 Spec.

Core Diameter 62.5µm +2.5µm
Cladding Diameter 125µm +2.5µm
Attenuation <3.5bB/km @ 850nm/km @ 1300nm
Bandwidth >160Mhz/km @ 850nm/>500Mhz/km 1300nm.
Strength member
Aramid yarn

4.2 Racks and Cable Management

All racks, in the Data Center shall be 19 inch racking products. In all cases
the backbone cabling sub-system shall be terminated into rack mounted
panels and presented as MTRJ fibre connectors.

Cable management shall be provided with manageable patching facility.

Horizontal management side rings shall provide an environment for ongoing
maintenance of all future patching and enable move and changes to be
handled easily.

The Contractor shall be responsible for fire-stopping all floor penetrations

after installation.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all records and labeling of the rack
mounted panels, both fibre and STP, to the convention provided by the
Client.

4.3 Optical Fibre Management System (OFMS)

The OFMS shall provide a facility to efficiently terminate, protect, manage

and present optical fibres to the user for utilization.

The OFMS shall be 19 inch rack mountable, 1U in height, fabricated in mild

steel and power coat finished.

The OFMS shall facilitate up to 24 fibre outlets in the one unit and shall be
fully self contained to securely terminate and manage the incoming fibre,
providing the following features;

• Grommetted rear and side cable entry

• Cable strain relief posts.
• Internal fibre looping
• Fibre splice tray accommodation
• Slide off lid to facilitate access to splice tray
• Caution label affixed to warn of laser radiation.
• Integral labeling to identify ports, and configured according to EIA/TIA
568-A standard (AB/BA sequencing).
• Mechanical protection of patch lead attachment to OFMS.

The incoming optical fibre shall be directly terminated onto an MTRJ/VF-45

connector.
 8312 - 4

4.4 STP Cable Termination

The STP cable termination panels shall provide a facility to efficiently

terminate all incoming STP cable, and present them to the user in a
structured, manageable format on industry standard RJ 45 connectors.

Both horizontal an vertical STP cables shall be terminated onto RJ 45 patch

panels to provide a uniform cross-connect field.

4.5 STP Patch Panels

The modular / configurable patch panels shall be 19 inch rack mountable

fabricated in steel powder coated and provide RJ 45 outlets at the front for
patching and Insulation Displacement Contacts (IDC) at the rear for STP
cable termination. The IDC shall be universal in configuration to accept all
popular IDC punch down tools for rapid termination of cables.

All patch panels shall be UL verified to Category 6 STP criteria, and exhibit
the following performance characteristics:

Electrical Specification

• DC Resistance - 20 milli ohms

• DC Resistance Imbalance - 2.9 milli ohms
• Insulation Resistance - >100 Mega ohms
• Delay Skew - <45 nanoseconds

Mechanical

• Jack Contact - material phosphor bronze

- plating 1.25µm gold over 2.5µm nickel
- force 100g minimal
- plug retention 13.5 kg
- operating life 750 cycles (min)

• IDC Block - material phosphor bronze

- wire accommodation 2x0.4 to 0.65mm solid
- tool accommodation KATT, 110 & LSA+
- operation life 200 terminations (min)
- gas tight IDC Cable termination

The STP patch panels shall be configured and terminated in the EIA
preferred 568-B wiring sequence.

The STP patch panels shall have a high density RJ 45 outlets for efficient
utilization of space in the rack, but shall not be so closely spaced to make
termination and patching cumbersome and unmanageable. The STP patch
panels shall have a minimum density of 16 RJ 45 ports per Rack Unit and a
maximum density of 24 RJ 45 ports per Rack Unit.
 8312 - 5

The STP patch panels shall provide integrated rear cable management for
guiding STP cable to the IDC block. This management facility shall provide
cable bend radius guides to ensure EIA/TIA 568-B minimum cable bend
radius criteria (>8 times cable diameter) is not exceeded during installation:
and hook and loop fastening tape to secure incoming STP cables without
over compressing the cables, which could compromise the cable
performance.

The STP patch panels shall provide flexible labeling facilities to uniquely
identify each part. The labeling shall be removable to facilitate future
reconfiguration of the identification scheme, if necessary. The labeling shall
comprise of pre-printed cards or customised 13mm printed labels. The
identification scheme shall be outlined in the Scope of Works.

4.6 Cable Management

Cable management facilities within each rack at the Wiring Closet Sub-
system is a mandatory requirement.

The MDF and IDFs shall be arranged such that discrete horizontal and
vertical channels are provided on the rack to route patch leads from source
to destination.

The cable management channels shall be made up of power coated mild

steel 19 inch rack mount panels with integrated “fingers” in which to route the
patch leads. The horizontal channel formed by these fingers shall be
enclosed by a snap-on ABS plastic cover at both ends of panel separate
ABS plastic rings shall be mounted using the rack mount bolts of the panel to
create a vertical ring run up the rack. These rings shall be sufficiently large
enough to comfortably accommodate in excess of 50 patch leads, yet narrow
enough not to overhang the width of the rack or obscure the horizontal ring
run segment.

The cable management panels should be mounted on the patching facility

between every two rows of RJ 45 ports. In this way, patch leads from every
RJ 45 patch panels port are directed to the cable management panels above
or below the outlet, so that at no time even when fully populated, outlets are
obscured by patch leads. Such a layout shall ensure the patching facility,
when cable management is properly utilized, does not go out of control and
can be efficiently utilized for adds, moves and changes over the life of the
Structured Cabling System.

The plastic rings shall be sufficiently large enough to comfortably

accommodate in excess of fifty (50) patch leads at any time.

In view of the dynamic nature of the patching facility, the “fingers” of the
cable management panels shall be made of mild steel and integral to the
metal panel, so that excessive force on the patch leads do not deform the
channel formed within the “fingers”. The cable management panel shall be
supplied with a snap on cover to discretely conceal the patch leads when the
patching facility is static.
 8312 - 6

To facilitate effective patching during the life of the Structured Cabling

System, the rack shall be laid out for minimal clutter and the shortest
reasonable route for patch cords.

In a single rack installation, the patch panels terminating the horizontal

cabling should be centrally located on the rack. Active equipment such as
LAN hubs/switches accommodated in the rack should, be mounted above
the horizontal cable patch panels. System patch panels or terminal based
systems if utilized, should be mounted above the active equipment. The
Optical Fibre management system shall be mounted above the system patch
panels, which keeps the fibre patch leads separate from the STP patch
leads.

Optical fibre patch leads shall be routed through the cable management
facility, taking care not to mix these excessively with patch leads.

4.7 Optical Fibre Patch Leads

All optical fibre patch leads shall comprise multimode 62.5/125µm FDDI
performance graded index optical fibre with MTRJ/VF-45 fibre connectors
terminated at each end.

The optical fibre patch leads shall comply with the following specifications:

• Connector - zirconia ceramic ferrule

- per-radiussed and pre-polished ferrule
- epoxy type fibre encapsulation
- built-in strength member retention
- colour coded connector boots fitted to
connectors on duplex patch leads. One
connector shall be fitted with a red boot,
designated as the “transmit” fibre and a
corresponding red boot at the other end of the
assembly. The other boot shall be black in
colour, similarly black at the corresponding
other end.

- Dust caps shall be fitted on each connector at

the assembly.

Cable - Simplex or duplex multimode FDDI

Performance graded index 62.5/12.5µm
optical fibre.

- Strength member – aramid yam

- 900µm tight buffer diameter

- Orange PVC UL listed overall jacket

(designating multimode fibre).
 8312 - 7

Transmission Specifications

• Insertion loss (connector) 0.3dB (mean)

• Attenuation (cable) 3.75 dB/km @ 850nm
1.50 dB/km @ 1300nm
Labeling

• Port No. unique serial number and assembly length shall be printed on
label, affixed at one end of the cable assembly, no more than 450mm
from the end.

4.8 STP Patch Leads

STP patch leads shall provide the interconnection between horizontal and
vertical cabling and active devices at the cross connect facilities. In view of
the dynamic nature of patching over the life of the Structured Cabling
System, only products with highest quality and reliability shall be supplied.
No patch lead shall be manufactured, assembled or fabricated on site. All
patch leads shall be factory terminated and tested, under controlled
conditions.

The STP patch leads shall be supplied in the quantities, lengths and sheath
colours outlined in the BOQ.

The STP patch leads shall be manufactured from Category 6 STP

(350 MHz), 4 pair stranded STP cable and terminated with Enhanced
Category 6 RJ 45 plugs.

The STP patch leads shall comply to the following performance

characteristics:

8-wire non-keyed RJ 45 socket.

Mechanical

• Jack Contact - material phosphor bronze

- plating 1.25um gold over 2.5um
nickel
- force 100g minimal
- plug retention 13.5 kg
- operating life 750 cycles (min)

• IDC Block - material phosphor bronze

- wire
accommodation 0.4 to 0.65mm
- tool accommodation KATT, 110 & LSA+
- operation life 200 terminations (min)
- gas tight IDC Cable termination
 8312 - 8

Electrical

• DC Resistance - 69 milli ohms

• DC Resistance Imbalance - 20 milli ohms
• Insulation Resistance - >100 Mega ohms
• Wiring Sequence - EIA preferred (568 A)

4.9 Category-6 STP Cable

The horizontal cabling shall be Category 6-STP (350 MHz minimum) STP
4 pair cable, delivered in 305m or 500m pull boxes and comply to the
following specifications.

The cable shall be UL verified and Listed.

Specifications
• No. Pairs 4
• Conductor 23/24 AWG solid copper
• Insulation polyolefin
• Insulation Thickness 0.21mm
• External Sheath Flame Retardant PVC
• Sheath Colour Blue for Data / Grey for Voice
• Sheathed Cable diameter 5.0mm
• Operational Temperature range -20oC to 70oC

Transmission Characteristics for Cat-6 STP Cables

Maximum
Frequency ACR in dB NEXT
Attenuation
(MHz) db @ 100m
dB/100m
1 98.2 2.1 66
10 94.7 6.0 59.3
16 93.2 7.6 56.2
20 92.4 8.5 54.8
31.25 90.4 10.8 51.9
62.5 82.4 15.5 47.4
100 77.7 19.9 44.3
250 62.3 33.00 38.3

All STP cabling shall be installed in already laid cable trunking/conduit. The
Contractor shall make every effort to install the horizontal cabling sub-system
in a concealed manner, but where that path is obstructed written prior
approval shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to using surface ducting or
conduit.

The horizontal cable shall be continuous run from the wiring closet to the
work area outlet, free from taps, joints and splices.
 8312 - 9

4.10 Category-6 Outlets

The horizontal cabling shall be terminated on RJ 45 outlets on British

Standard flush mounting white plastic wall plate at the work areas of each
floor. The outlets shall be Category-6.

These outlets shall be configured as discrete units for each individual work
area mounted on already installed flush steel back boxes. Surface mount
wall plates are not permitted unless approved by the Engineer.

The RJ 45 outlet shall comply with the following specifications:

The RJ 45 outlets shall be mounted in a configurable multimedia outlet

system to facilitate future upgrades to the configuration of the workstation.
Where the wall plate is not populated, removable blanking modules shall be
inserted.

The RJ 45 outlets shall be protected by a spring-loaded shutter, which will

cover the outlet when not in use.

The RJ 45 outlet modules shall provide a labelling facility to identify each

individual outlet. The label shall be printed with a high-contract, high-visibility
icon as listed in the specification and in the colour specified. All labelling shall
be integral to the manufacturers wall plate system. Third party labelling
systems will not be accepted.

Mechanical
• 8 wire non keyed RJ 45 socket

• Jack Contact - Material phosphor bronze

- plating 1.25 um gold over 2.5 um
nickel
- force 100g minimal
- plug retention 13.5 kg.
- operating life 750 cycles (min)
• IDC Block - material phosphor bronze
- wire accommodation 0.4mm to 0.65mm
- tool accommodation KATT, 110 & LSA+
- operating life 200 terminations (min)
- gas tight IDC Cable termination
Electrical
• DC Resistance 69 milli ohms
• DC Resistance Imbalance 20 milli ohms
• Insulation Resistance >100 Mega ohms
• Wiring Sequence EIA preferred (568 B)

Approvals
• UL Listed and verified to Category-6 (350 MHz)
 8312 - 10

4.11 Disconnection Module

Disconnection module shall have a two piece contacts normally closed,

incorporating a disconnection facility. It shall have provision for test and
monitoring access and over voltage protection.

4.12 Multimedia Outlet System

Multimedia Outlet System shall be provided to install STP and Fibre media,
allowing upto 3 ports to be installed. At each multimedia outlet provision shall
be provided to install Fibre media in future. The modular multimedia shall
consist of fascia, bezel and module. Bezel shall be provided with mounting
screws, clear label holder and colour matched screw covers. Wall plates
shall be provided with telecom icons (phone, data, fax, etc.).

4.13 Cabinet and Frame

Cabinet and Frame shall accommodate 19” patch panel and glass or active
equipment side panels ventilation slots and cable management. Frame shall
have cable management arms.

5.0 INSTALLATION

All cable installations shall be completed according to the local regulatory board and
conform to EIA/TIA 568-A and shall comply with the following criteria:

5.1 Optical Fibre Cable

Cables shall be installed in powder coated steel trunking with over including
all accessories, supports, etc. as per site requirements, care shall be taken to
ensure minimum bending radius requirements as per manufacturer’s
recommendations for optic fibre cable are maintained.

5.2 STP Cable Installation

Cables shall be installed in already laid conduit/steel cable trunking (within

suspended ceilings) suitably anchored to the building structure, and in
conduit in floor and partitions (concealed). Cables shall be secured every
600mm using hook and loop fastening ties. Due care shall be taken to not
over tighten ties and place undue strain on the cabling infrastructure.

Cables shall be bundled to a maximum of 24 cables and each bundle

individually supported within the cable trunking.

Bend radius shall be limited to 10 times the cable diameter.

During the installation of a cable (maximum 90 metres) the pull distance

should not exceed 30 metres at any one time.
 8312 - 11

6.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The following tests shall be carried out and the results shall be documented and
maintained to from part of the “AS BUILT” drawings.

1. Test all of the STP copper cable installation for termination and twisted pair
integrity, including continuity, polarity, pin-assignment and colour codes

2. Perform visual inspections to ensure that each pair of wires remain twisted
as close as possible to the termination point, to maintain the impedance and
minimize attenuation losses.

3. Test that the STP cable pairs comply with the Specification using measuring
device for Near End Cross-talk and Signal Attenuation complying with
EIA/TIA 568-A.

4. Test each termination Optical Fibre in both directions, recording all results of
the calibrated optical power. Make sure in all cases that measurements are
within those provided in the specification.

The documentation required at the completion of the installation phases shall

contain all of the following information, together with any other information the
installer has acquired during the installation.

1. “As-Built” documentation, showing total cabling and connection installed,

utilizing floor space plans and cable record sheets. This documentation shall
show all cables and outlets incorporating the full numbering and marking
convention supplied.

2. All test results and certification information, identified by cable, connection

and numbering convention, necessary for all Optical Fibre and copper
cables.

All components of the LAN Cabling System should be sourced from one
manufacturer to ensure minimal impedance mismatch and best possible NEXT
performance and to guarantee the Category-5/Category-6 performance from end to
end.

The Structured Cabling System should operate without introducing or being affected
by electromagnetic radiation from other sources. Maintaining segregation from other
services or screening are to be ensured to achieve acceptable immunity.

7.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7.1 General
The Contractor’s bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Tender
Drawings related to the item.
 8312 - 12

7.2 Conduits

7.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the number of

running foot for conduits acceptably supplied and installed by the
Contractor.

7.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of running foot of
conduit measured as provided above at the Contract unit price and
shall constitute full compensation for supplying, installing and
completion of the laying of the conduits including jointing materials
and accessories, cutting chasing of civil works, excavation and
backfilling of ground for under ground PVC conduits, painting,
tagging, etc., as applicable for each type of work.

7.3 Backbone Cabling

7.3.1 Measurement: Measurement will be made for backbone cabling as a

complete job acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor.

7.3.2 Payment: Payment will be made for the complete job of backbone
cabling at the Contract unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supply, installing, testing and commissioning of the
optical fibre cable including fibre management system and all
accessories.

7.4 RJ 45 Outlet

7.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for each RJ 45 outlet

acceptably supplied and installed outlet box by the Contractor as a
complete unit.

7.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for number of units measured as

provided above at the contract unit price each and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing and completion of the RJ 45
outlet including all civil works and other accessories.

7.5 Patch Panels

7.5.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for each patch panel

acceptably supplied and installed by the Contractor as a complete
unit.

7.5.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for number of unit measured as

provided above at the contract unit prices each and shall constitute
full compensation for supplying, installing and completion of the patch
panel box including all civil works and other accessories.
 8312 - 13

7.6 Cabling of RJ 45 Outlets

7.6.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the cabling of each

RJ-45 outlet upto IDF/MDF relevant rack acceptably supplied and
installed by the contractor as complete unit..

7.6.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total no. of units measured,
as provided above at the Contract unit prices each and shall
constitute for supplying, installing connecting, testing, commissioning
and completion of the cabling between RJ 45 outlet, and patch panel.

7.7 Cabinet and Frames

7.7.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the each Cabinet and
Frame, acceptably supplied and installed by the contractor as a
Complete Unit.

7.7.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of unit measured
as provided above at the Contract Unit Price and shall constitute full
compensation for supply, installing and commissioning of the Cabinet
and Frames including all accessories.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8312.doc
 8331 - 1

SECTION - 8331

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and services of complete Fire Alarm System as stated
herein, as shown on Tender drawings and as given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor will discuss the Fire Alarm System layout with the Engineer and
coordinate at site with other services for exact route, location and position of
electrical lines and equipments.

The Fire Alarm System with accessories shall also comply with the general
specifications for Electrical Works Section 8001 and with other relevant provisions of
the Tender Documents.

2.0 GENERAL

Specification of Fire Alarm System are included to understand requirement / type of

system already installed at ground floor of Passenger Terminal Building. All
equipment for first floor shall be of same type / make as provided / installed at
ground floor.
- Fire Alarm Control Panel of each building shall be networked to the Main Fire
Alarm Control Panel of FCR building. The line between individual control
panel and main control panel of FCR building shall be supervised.

- The network facility shall provide alarm reporting, coordinated cause and
effect operation. System control and graphic display computer shall be
provided for the network. FCR Control Panel shall act as system master,
displaying complete system status, system control and graphic display
computer shall also show complete network status and allow control
functions to be operated separately. Remote diagnostics facility shall be
provided for both fault diagnosis and system configuration off site.

- Required number of interface, as shown on the drawings, shall be provided

for interfacing with HVAC.

- Automatic FM200 system, if installed shall function on dual detector principal

with dual progressive alarm warning prior to flooding. Flooded rooms shall
remain in the alarm state till reset at the FACP.

- In the event of fire the lifts shall automatically remain at their position or stop
at the next floor. Restarting shall only be possible from the control panel.

- Activation of any fire alarm detector including manual call point of terminal
building shall result in all alarms delay for the period of either of two
programmable timers “T1” and “T2”. During this delay, only a local alarm
shall be given (stage-1). If the local alarm is not acknowledged before timer
“T1” expires, this shall result in all alarms being operated continuously
 8331 - 2

(stage-2). If the local is acknowledged while “T1” is still running, “T1” shall
reset and the general alarm is delayed for the reminder of timer “T2”, so
providing time for human investigation of the alarm cause. If no reset action
takes place before “T2” runs out, a general alarm (stage-2) results. In other
buildings panels shall be programmed to give an immediate general alarm.

- The power to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel, printer, mimic panel of FCR
building shall be supplied by UPS, which shall have an autonomy of
six hours.

- Mimic panel shall display alarm and fault indication of each fire alarm control
panel.

- The FCR main fire alarm control panel shall facilitate communication with two
other fighting stations so that additional help can be obtained in case of
emergency.

- A printer shall give a hard copy of all alarms, detector number, location and
time. The printer pages shall be numbered and page number resetting shall
be password protected.

- All outlet boxes shall be considered part of the devices installed on them and
shall be supplied alongwith the devices.

- The system shall operate on 24 VDC from a battery charger with standby
batteries. The incoming supply shall be 220 VAC from emergency circuit.

- The Addressable Fire Alarm System shall be used for early detection,
warning and control function in case of fire. The system shall monitor and
report the status of manual call points and automatic fire detectors. All the
Intelligent Sensors detailed above shall incorporate the following facilities:-

- The Sensors shall be ceiling - mount and shall include a twist-lock base.

- The Sensors shall provide a means of test whereby they will simulate an
alarm condition and report that condition to the Control & Indicating
Equipment (C.I.E.) Such a test may be initiated at the Sensor itself (by
activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the
C.I.E.

- The Sensor sensitivity shall be set through the C.I.E., and shall be adjustable
in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be
automatically adjusted by the C.I.E. on a time-of-day basis.

- Using software in the C.I.E. the Sensors may automatically compensate for
dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect
their performance.

- The Contractor shall provide wall chart for operation and maintenance of Fire
Alarm System. The wall chart shall contain following minimum information in
both English and Urdu languages.
 8331 - 3

- Complete layout of Fire Detection & Alarm system showing locations

of all fire zones, and bells zones in two different colours.

- Standby battery specification, including ampere-hour capacity Voltage

per Cell, number of Cells, and the battery type.

- Operating and maintenance instruction in BLACK colour.

- Emergency instructions in RED colour.

- Name, address & telephone number of the servicing contractor.

The characters of written instructions shall be minimum 6 mm high.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The following standards & codes shall be applicable for the materials covered
within the scope of this section:

NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code

NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

The system shall have ability to perform satisfactory under conditions of electrical
surges and transients, and shall comply fully with the requirement of the following
standards as required by EN54 :

IEC 801 – 2 Electrostatic discharges

IEC 801 – 3 Radiated Electro magnetic interference
IEC 801 – 4 Voltage transients – Fast transient bursts.

Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a single
fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by under writers
laboratories (UL) & shall bear the UL label. Equivalent DIN or British standard shall
also be acceptable.

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Manual Call Points (Addressable)

Manual Call Points shall be constructed of flame retardant plastic with clearly
visible operating instructions provided on the glass or resetable plastic
element. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the Call Points.

Manual Call Points shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting as required.

4.2 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors (Addressable)

The Sensors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to

measure smoke density. Photo Electric Smoke Sensor shall have following
minimum technical specifications:
- Operating Voltage : 16 – 26 V DC
 8331 - 4

- Monitoring : Open and short circuit fault,

sensor removal and device type.
- Area Coverage : 100 m2

4.3 Multi Sensors (Addressable)

The multi sensors shall incorporate photo electronic optical smoke sensor
and high sensitivity thermal sensor and provide early warning from all types
of smoldering and thermal fires. The smoke element shall be of the light
scattering type using be of the light scattering type using a pulsed internal
LED light source and a photocell sensor. The thermal element shall utilize
high sensitivity, high speed thermistors optimized to measure small changes
in temperature and rate of change. The detector shall be capable of
protecting an area up to 100 m2 at a height of up to 12 m.

4.4 Heat Sensors (Addressable)

The Sensors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions

caused by a fire. Heat sensor shall have following minimum technical
specifications.
- Operating Voltage : 16 – 26 V DC
- Monitoring : Open and short circuit fault,
sensor removal and device type.
- Area Coverage : 80 m2

4.5 Sounder (Addressable)

Sounder shall be addressable devices and shall connect to one of the C.I.E.
loops / sounder circuits. Multiple tones shall be provided with automatic tone
synchronization of all sounders connected to the loop. Dual sound path shall
allow a wide angle of sound distribution with a constant sound level. Self test
facility shall allow all sounders to be tested from the control panel by one
person. Sounder shall provide high output 90 dBA to 112 dBA at 1 m.

4.6 Audio Visual Alarm Device

Audio Visual Alarm device shall be addressable / conventional and shall

connect to the C.I.E. loop/sounder circuits.

Audio Visual alarm device shall provide following minimum features:

Operating Voltage : 24 VDC
Strobe output rating : 110 Cd
Strobe flash rate : Once every two seconds
Sound output : 75 dB @ 3 m
Housing colour : Red with white “FIRE” lettering
Mounting : Semi flesh
4.7 Wiring and Cabling
 8331 - 5

Wiring and cabling of Fire and alarm system shall be carried out in conduits.
Twisted pair 0.8 mm dia untinned annealed copper cable with PVC insulation
and LSF sheath shall be installed for Fire Alarm System or as recommended
by manufacturer for addressable detectors. However two core, 1.5 sq.mm
cable meeting c, w and z categories of BS6387 shall be used for
conventional detectors.

All wires and cables shall be color-coded, tagged and checked for open,
short or ground faults. No transposition of colours will be permitted. All wiring
shall be made on terminal blocks of proper size and type for the services
involved. Cable joints shall only be allowed on the detector bases.

4.8 Conduits, Pipes and Accessories

Conduits, pipes and accessories for Fire alarm system shall have same
specifications as given in section 'Conduits and Pipes' of these
specifications.

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 Fire Alarm System Equipment

The installation of Fire Alarm system equipment shall be in strict accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions/recommendations and these
specifications.

The testing of Fire Alarm equipment shall be in compliance with the relevant
standards and regulations. During testing of equipment, emphasis shall be
laid on the following:

- Operational Safety
- Regular functioning of the system and devices
- Protection against false alarms

Various detectors like smoke, heat, manual call point etc. shall be
subjected to the basic tests and sensivity tests. The automatic detectors shall
be tested in various ways to check real and false alarm behaviors.

5.2 Wiring and Cabling

Wiring and cabling of fire alarm system shall be carried out as per
instructions given in Section 8212 'Low Tension Cables' of these
specifications.

5.3 Conduits and Accessories

Conduits and accessories for FA system shall be installed as per

instructions given in section 'Conduits and Pipes’, of these specifications.

8.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

 8331 - 6

8.1 General
The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion of all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Tender
Drawing related to the item.
8.2 Loop Card
8.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for loop card acceptably
supplied and installed in existing fire alarm control panel by the
Contractor as complete job.
8.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the complete job measured as
provided above at the contract unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing, testing and commissioning of
loop card in existing fire alarm control panel alongwith all accessories.
8.3 Automatic Detectors and Manual Call Points
8.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number of
each type of automatic detectors and manual call points acceptably
supplied and installed by the Contractor as complete unit.
8.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units measured
as provided above at the contract unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing, testing and commissioning of
each type of the automatic detectors with base and manual call points
including mounting accessories.
8.4 Sounder / Alarm Devices
8.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the number of
Sounder/alarm devices acceptably supplied and installed by the
Contractor as complete unit.
8.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units measured
as provided above at the Contract unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing, testing and commissioning of
all the Sounder/alarm devices including all mounting accessories like
outlet boxes etc.
8.5 Wiring of Fire Alarm Loops
8.5.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the running meter
wiring of fire alarm devices acceptably supplied and installed by the
Contractor as a complete unit.
8.5.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units measured
as provided above at the contract unit price each and shall constitute
full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting testing and
commissioning fire alarm wiring including all accessories.
\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8331.doc
 8335 - 1

SECTION - 8335

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing, connecting and
commissioning of all materials and services of the complete CCTV system as
specified herein, or as given in the Tender Drawings and stated in the Bill of
Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the CCTV layout with the Engineer and co-ordinate at
the site with other services for exact route, location and position of the electrical lines
and equipment.

The CCTV system with accessories shall also comply with the General
specifications for Electrical Works, Section - 8001 and with other relevant provisions
of the Tender Documents.

2.0 GENERAL

Specification of CCTV System are included to understand requirement / type of

system already installed at ground floor of Passenger Terminal Building. All
equipment for first floor shall be of same type / make as provided / installed at
ground floor.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES

The following standards and codes shall be applicable for the material covered
within the scope of the section.

IEC 801 – 2 Electrostatic discharge

IEC 801 – 3 Radiated Electro magnetic interference
IEC 801 – 4 Voltage transients

Install all the signal transmission components in accordance with the relevant
standard ANSI Locate all surge protection within are metre of building entrance:

- Dust and rain resistance IP66 for outdoor cameras.

- Salt mist According to IEC 68-2-11 (for outdoor cameras)
- Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6
- Bump test According to IEC 68-3

4.0 EQUIPMENT

4.1 Camera

Color CCD camera having 1/3 inch image shall provide fine tuning functions
such as automatic sensitivity adjustment and auto iris lens output. 7.6 mm
focal length format varifocal lens shall also be provided with camera. The
camera shall have following technical specifications:
 8335 - 2

Horizontal Resolution : 470 TV Lines

Video output : 1 Vp-p, 75 Ohms
S/N Ratio : 50 dB (AGC)

The fixed mounts shall be supplied according to the location of each camera
and conform to the docor of area. The CCTV cameras shall be of compact
design and housed in a sturdy die cast aluminium frame. The outdoor
cameras in weather proof enclosure with washer/wiper arrangement to clean
the faceplate of the lens. The washer shall comprise high pressure pump and
long life check valve. The cleaning liquid shall be contained in a bottle made
of unbreakable material. It shall have sufficient capacity for at least 70
washes. The bottle for cleaning shall be conveniently located for easy
refilling. The power supply for the washer/wiper shall be derived from the
same source as the power supply for the camera. The washer/wiper
arrangement shall be remote controlled from the monitor console.

Operating temperature for indoor camera is 00C to +50oC and for outdoor
camera is –5oC to +70oC.

The camera shall be able to give satisfactory performance in an EMI field

with strength of IV/m (100 KHz) without noticeable disturbance in the picture.

Mains peak of 350V shall give no noticeable disturbance in the picture.

Peaks of 800V shall not cause any defects.

High resolution low light sensitive colour dome camera in high speed P/T/Z
assemblies shall be suitable for indoor/outdoor installation as required,
minimum 18 x optical zoom and 4 x digital zoom shall provide recognition at
extreme long range. Dome system shall be suitable for flush ceiling, wall and
pendent installation. The dome camera shall have following minimum
technical specifications:

- Imaging device : 1/3" CCD

- Resolution : PAL
- Signal to noise ratio : 50 dB
- Video output : IV P/P
- Lens : 4.1 – 73 mm
- Focus and Iris : Auto/Manual override
- Variable pan speed : 0.1o – 200o per second
- Tilt coverage : 90o
- Programmable preset positions : 128
- Programmable town : 4
- IP rating : IP66 for outdoor

Focal length shall be 4mm/12.5mm/16mm/25mm according to the field of

view requirement of specific area.

Cameras installed in car park/drive way are shall have electronic shuttering
techniques and advanced infrared lighting technology to read the car number
plate.
 8335 - 3

4.2 Monitor

17” Color video monitor shall provide clear and high quality images, Monitor
shall have following minimum technical specifications.
- Convenient front control.
- PAL compatible video standard.
- Multiple video and audio input and output connectors.
- LED beside the selector button indicate which video source is being
selected.
- 450 TV lines resolution
- PAL/NTSC video standard
- Built in metal cabinet to minimize the electrical and magnetic
interference from external sources.

4.3 Digital Video Recorder

Ethernet communication shall also be simultaneously available over a LAN or

WAN, without disturbance to local control. The software shall provide
network control as well as upload and download program settling capabilities.

16 video input DVR shall provide simultaneous viewing, recording, searching,

transmission and backup of videos. Recorder shall provide simultaneous
record and playback facility. DVR shall have following minimum technical
specifications.
- Records maximum 50 images / second on PAL standard
- Easy to use Gui
- Real time local DVR Status Display
- Password protected record lock
- Built-in multiplexer

4.4 Coaxial and Data Cable

The video transmission system of the CCTV signals shall be done on copper
conductor RG6 / RG11 / RG59 Coaxial Cable. The remote control orders
shall be transmitted to the camera by means of digital code on data cable.

4.5 Controller

Controller shall be capable for handling 200 cameras. Up to 3 slave controller

shall be added to the system for additional local and remote surveillance.
Video sequence shall be programmed for each monitor. An analogue joystick
shall give unrivalled control of variable speed cameras. The following
functions shall be remote controlled:
- Pan
- Tilt
- Lens Focus
- Washer/wiper

The pan/tilt control shall be provided by a joy stick on the controller, other
function shall be controlled by push buttons.
 8335 - 4

5.0 INSTALLATION

Installation of CCTV System shall be done in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations.

8.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

8.1 General

The Contractor bid amount, against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below, shall include design, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion for all work specified herein and / or as shown on the Tender
Drawings related to the item.

8.2 Cameras / Lenses and Monitors

8.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number of

cameras/lenses and monitors with accessories acceptably supplied
and installed by the Contractor as a complete unit.

8.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units measured
as provided above at the Contractor unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing connecting, testing and
commissioning of the monitors and cameras / lenses including all
mounting arrangement / racks, etc. and all accessories.

8.3 DVR

8.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the DVR acceptably

supplied and installed by the Contractor as a complete job.

8.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of job measured as
provided above at the contract unit price and shall constitute full
compensation for supplying, installing and completion of the DVR
including all control equipment for operation and control of system,
mounting racks and interconnections etc.

8.4 Coaxial Cable / Data Cable

8.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

meter of coaxial/data cabling for each camera acceptably supplied
and installed by the Contractor as complete unit.

8.4.2 Payment : Payment shall be made for the total number of units
measured as provided above at the contract unit price each and shall
constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all type of wiring including all accessories related to
the items.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8335.doc
 8341 - 1

SECTION – 8341

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and services of Public Address System as stated
herein, as shown on Tender Drawings and as given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor will discuss the P.A System layout with the Engineer and
coordinate at site with other services for exact route, location and position of
electrical / telecommunication lines and equipment.

The Public Address System with accessories shall also comply with the General
Specifications for Electrical Works Section - 8001 and with other relevant
provisions of the Tender Documents.

2.0 GENERAL

Specification of Public Address System are included to understand requirement /

type of system already installed at ground floor of Passenger Terminal Building.
All equipment for first floor shall be of same type / make as provided / installed at
ground floor.

The Public Address System (PA-system) for the Terminal Building shall be used
for transmission of following:

- flight announcements
- boarding announcements
- passenger paging
- general announcements
- audible warning signals
- background music

Selection of area to which selected information shall be broadcast is to be

possible from various points in the terminal.

The system shall make use of modular design to enable future enhancements.
Loudspeaker circuits shall be designed for a maximum of 10% voltage drop.

A feedback circuit arrangement shall be provided to keep sound pressure levels

at least 10 db above background noise.

In areas, within the terminal, which have autonomous music systems or areas
where a facility exists to lower background music levels, an automatic override
facility shall be installed.

A supervisory system shall monitor loudspeaker loop for open circuits, short
circuit and earth leakage conditions.

Announcement facility shall be provided at following location.

• Operator room
• Gate counter of departure hall
 8341 - 2

Configuration of the system for microphone control and priority setting shall be as
follows:

- The first priority input shall be used for normal public announcements
from a P.A. announcer console.

- The second priority shall be provided for microphone of gate counter to

give boarding information to the passengers.

- The lowest priority shall be accorded to the music input.

Each large zone shall be splitted into two sub zones so that a fault in any one
sub zone does not completely quieten parts of the overall zone. Arrival hall,
departure hall and concourse area zones shall be fitted with noise sensing
microphones, the output of which shall be fed back to system and used to adjust
the announcement levels relative to the background noise level.

Power amplifier outputs shall be of the 100 V type. Cabling to the loudspeakers
shall be a size limiting voltage losses to 10% max.

Zonal Selection: The entire terminal building shall be divided into the following
zones:

• arrival halls
• departure halls/check-in halls/shops
• airside corridor
• CIP lounge
• Concourse

It shall be possible to combine the following zones into a group for simultaneous
broad casting:

• Arrival/concourse
• Departure/Check-in halls/shops/CIP lounges/concourse

- The equipment shall be connected to the UPS.

- Chime signals of 1,2,3 or 4 tone variety shall be used to call the attention
of passengers.

- The announcer’s position shall be fitted with all facilities to select the
required zones.

Microphone cable shall be kept minimum 300 mm away from

loudspeakers and power circuits. Contractor is free to offer addressable
PA-System as an alternative offer.

The Contractor is free to offer any design of equipment which in his

opinion will be equal to or better than the requirement in this
specifications whereas alternative offer is proposed, the Contractor shall
furnish details of such alternatives to enable their merits to be assessed.
Architectural drawing shall be referred for the frequency dependency of
finishing materials. Contractor shall submit to Engineer detailed
calculations and layout drawings for approval.
 8341 - 3

All equipment, cables and wires shall be numbered in accordance with

the standardization procedures laid down in IEC 750.

Contractor shall point by point confirm in writing their compliance with the
items of this specifications in the form of a qualified statement of
compliance.

Materials furnished under this specifications shall be standard product of

manufacturers, regularly engaged in the production of such equipment
and shall have at least ten (10) installations of similar equipment in
Pakistan. Manufacturer shall also have authorized representative in
Pakistan for maintenance of the equipment.

All the material and equipment shall be new and manufactured quality
control shall be in accordance with the ISO 9000.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES

Din 4002, din 45573 and din 45589 shall be applicable for the material covered
within the scope of this section.

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Amplifier System

The amplifier system shall be of modular construction with built in

monitoring circuitry and comprise a rack mounting main-frame with
integral mains power supply with input for external 24 volt DC power
supply, capable of accepting up to four amplifier modules. Amplifier
modules shall each be capable of providing a power output of 60W into a
load impedance of 166 Ohms, 100 volt. They may be used to provide
individual 60 watt amplifier channels, in which case they shall input/driver
circuitry, they may be connected in parallel to provide amplifier channels
of 120, 180 or 240 watts using 2, 3, or 4 modules, one of which shall be
master and the remainder shall be slave output power modules only. It
shall be possible to configure modules in different combination with the
mainframe. The modular amplifier shall have following Specifications:

- Power bandwidth (-3dB) 100 Hz to 15 kHz

- Distortion Less than 1% at rated power
- Noise -80 dB max
- Input Sensitivity OdB

Speaker in the rack shall be provided for monitoring of amplifier system.

4.2 Ceiling Loudspeaker

Loudspeaker suitable for flush mounting in different false ceiling systems,

with round, square or rectangular covers plate as required shall be
following minimum technical specifications:

- Rated output power: 6W

- Sound pressure level: 91 dB at 1 metre distance
at 1,000 Hz.
 8341 - 4

- Frequency response: 220 – 20,000 Hz.

- 100 V-transformer: easily adjustable in three solder less
steps to 1/1, ½, and ¼ nominal output

Colour of the front grille as desired by the Architects.

4.3 Wall Mounted / Column Loudspeaker

Column Loudspeaker suitable for mounting on wall brackets (supplied

with the speaker) with square or rectangular front plate shall be used in
Halls for sound reinforcement alongwith ceiling loudspeaker. These shall
be supplied complete with 100V matching transformer adjustable in three
steps of 1/1, ½ and ¼.

- Rated out power: 20 W

- Sound Pressure level: 113 dB at 1 meter distance at
nominal output/1,000 Hz.
- Frequency response: 180-15,000 Hz.

Colour of the cabinet and front grills as desired by the Architects.

4.4 Loudspeaker Cable

Twisted pair cable / manufacturer’s recommended cable shall be installed

for loudspeaker circuit.

4.5 Microphone Cable

Cat-6 STP cable shall be provided for microphone.

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 Amplifier

The installation of Amplifier in existing Public Address System Equipment

Rack shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions /
recommendations and these specifications.

The testing of Public Address equipment shall be in compliance with the

relevant standards and regulations. During testing of equipment,
emphasis shall be laid on the following:

- Zone wise and group wise microphone live broadcast routing

- Microphone priority testing
- Background music test
- Noise sensing system fault detection.

5.2 Wiring and Cabling

Wiring and cabling of Public Address System shall be carried out as per
instructions given in Section 8212 ‘Low Tension Cables’ of these
specifications.
 8341 - 5

5.3 Conduits and Accessories

Conduits and accessories for PA System shall be installed as per

instructions given in section ‘Conduits and Pipes’, of these specifications.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor’s bid amount against each Bill of quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion of all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Tender
Drawing related to the item.

6.2 Amplifier

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for Amplifier installed

on existing PA equipment rack including all related equipment as
given in BOQ alongwith all accessories acceptably supplied and
installed by the Contractor as complete job.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the complete job measured
as provided above at the contract unit price and shall constitute
full compensation for supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of P.A. Main Equipment alongwith all accessories.

6.3 Loudspeaker

6.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number

of each type of Loudspeaker acceptably supplied and installed by
the Contractor as complete unit.

6.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the complete job as

provided above at the Contract unit Price each and shall constitute
full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting testing and
commissioning of each type of loudspeaker point including
mounting accessories.

6.4 Wiring of P.A. System

6.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

meter of loudspeaker / microphone cabling acceptably supplied
and installed by the Contractor as a complete unit.

6.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total number of unit as
provided above at the Contract unit Price each and shall constitute
full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting, testing and
commissioning P.A. System wiring including all accessories.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8341.doc
 8371-1

SECTION - 8371

CABLE ANTENNA TV SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of all material and services of Cable Antenna TV System as stated
herein, as shown on Tender drawings and as given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor will discuss the CATV layout with the Engineer and coordinate at site
with other services for exact route, location and position of electrical lines and
equipments.

The CATV System with accessories shall also comply with the general
Specifications for Electrical works Section 8001 and with other relevant provisions of
the Tender documents.

2.0 GENERAL

Specification of Cable Antenna TV System are included to understand requirement /

type of system already installed at ground floor of Passenger Terminal Building. All
equipment for first floor shall be of same type / make as provided / installed at
ground floor.

The CATV System under present contract covers following:

- Amplifiers
- RG6 and RG11 Cables
- Splitters
- TV Sockets
- Tapoffs
- Conduits

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

IEC-728 and relevant DIN Standards shall be applicable for the material covered
within the scope of this section.

4.0 MATERIAL

4.1 Splitters, tap-off and outlet sockets

All splitters, directional tap-off units and outlet sockets have to be strictly in
compliance with the specification mentioned under the Clause “General”.
Only directional taps and outlet sockets will be accepted. The frequency
range for the items must be 4-862 Mhz. The min. screening factor for the
components must be as follows:

- 4 - 450 Mhz > 75 dB.

- 862 Mhz. > 65 dB.
 8371-2

4.2 Coaxial Cable

RG6 and RG11 Coaxial Cable shall have following minimum technical
Specifications:

Inner Conductor : Cu-core, bare

Dielectric Coating : PE foamed / PIB
Outer Conductor : Cu-braid + Al - foil
Outer sheath : PVC, white

5.0 INSTALLATION

Installation of the CATV System shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

instruction and recommendations.

6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

6.1 General

The Contractor's bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as given
below shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
completion of all work specified herein and/or as shown on the Tender
Drawing related to the item.

6.2 Passive Devices

6.2.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total number of

each type of passive device such as splitters, directional couplers,
tap-offs and sockets acceptably supplied and installed by the
Contractor as a complete unit.

6.2.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the number of units measured
as provided above at the contract unit price each and shall
constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, testing and
commissioning of each type of the passive device such as splitters,
directional couplers, tap-offs and sockets including all accessories.

6.3 Coaxial Cable

6.3.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running

meter for each type of coaxial cable acceptably supplied and installed
by the Contractor.

6.3.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running meter
measured as provided above at the contract unit price each and shall
constitute full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting,
testing and commissioning of the each type of coaxial cables
including all accessories.
 8371-3

6.4 Conduits / Pipes

6.4.1 Measurement: Measurement shall be made for the total running feet
of each size and type of conduits / pipes acceptably supplied and
installed by the Contractor.

6.4.2 Payment: Payment shall be made for the total running feet
measured as provided above, at the contract unit price each and shall
constitute full compensation for supplying, installing and completion
of the laying of each type of the conduits or pipes including jointing
materials and accessories, cutting and chasing of civil works,
(excavation and underground pipes painting, plugging, tagging, etc.,
as applicable for each type of work.

\\Nespak-es\muqeem\Sial_TDBCH\Spc-8371.doc
 J-1

APPENDIX “J-1” TO THE BID

LIST OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
AND RELEVANT TECHNICAL DATA
ON WHICH THE BID IS BASED

(To be filled in and signed by the Bidder)

The Material and Equipment required in the Bid shall be selected from the reputed
manufacturers/suppliers with proven experience in the relevant field subject to approval of
the Engineer.

The Bidder shall fill name of only one manufacturer for each equipment/material on which
the Bid is based. He shall be bound to supply the equipment from the same manufacturer. In
case, the Bidder gives names of more than one manufacturer against any equipment, the
Engineer is authorized to ask the Bidder to supply the equipment from any one of them.

The names of the Manufacturer for each equipment/material filled in this Appendix by each
Bidder shall be reviewed at the evaluation stage and if it is noted that any of the
equipment/material offered by the Bidder does not meet the specification requirements or it
is of unacceptable quality, the Engineer reserves the right to ask the Bidder before signing
of the Contract to replace the manufacturer meeting the quality and specification
requirements.

The Bidder must fill the following list of Equipment/Material.

SR. COUNTRY OF
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL NAME OF MANUFACTURER
NO. ORIGIN

1. LT Switchboard &
Submain Distribution Boards
2. LT Distribution Boards
3. Light Fixtures
4. Single & Multi Core LT Cables
5. Light Control Switch & Socket Outlet
6. PVC Conduits & Accessories
7. PVC Pipes & Accessories
8. Earthing
9. Lightning Protection System
10. G.I. Cable tray, Trunking
11. Structured Cabling
12. Fire Alarm System
13. Public Address System
14. CCTV System
15. CATV System

Bidder’s Seal and Signature

*** Additional sheets to be attached if necessary. Each sheet to be signed and sealed ***
 J-2

APPENDIX “J-2” TO THE BID

DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL WORKS
(To be filled in by the Bidder)

The Bid submitted contains the following deviations from the Specification of Electrical
works. State specifically if the Bid does not contain any deviation.

SR. REF. OF BOQ

DESCRIPTION OF DEVIATION(s) REASON(s)
NO ITEM NO.(s)

__________________________
Bidder’s Seal and Signature

*** Additional sheets to be attached if necessary. Each sheet to be signed and sealed ***
HVAC
CONTENTS

Special Provisions

1.0 HVAC System Concept 8810-1

2.0 Work by Contractor 8810-2
3.0 Work not included in this Contract 8810-2
4.0 Design Conditions 8810-3
5.0 Samples 8810-3
6.0 Approval of Materials and Equipment 8810-4
7.0 Time for Delivery 8810-4
8.0 Standards and Code Requirements 8810-5
9.0 Standards other than those specified 8810-6
10.0 Permits 8810-6
11.0 Inspection, Testing, Damages and Material Orders 8810-6
12.0 Name Plates 8810-7
13.0 Sequence of Erection 8810-7
14.0 Materials and Equipment to be imported 8810-7
15.0 Power Supply 8810-8
16.0 Spare Parts 8810-8
17.0 Maintenance Period 8810-8
18.0 Approval from Government 8810-9
19.0 Performance Guarantee 8810-9
Technical Specifications

Section 1 General Requirements 8965-1 to 8965-4

Section 2 Equipment 8965-5 to 8965-8

Section 3 Foundations, Supports and Vibration Isolation 8965-9 - 8965-10

Section 4 Piping, Fittings, Valves and Specialties 8965-11 - 8965-12

Section 5 Insulation 8965-13 to 8965-15

Section 6 Electrical Equipment and Controls 8965-16 to 8965-19

Section 7 Measurement and Payment Conditions 8965-20 to 8965-20

 8810-1

SECTION 8810

SPECIAL PROVISIONS
HVAC WORKS

1.0 HVAC SYSTEM CONCEPT

Air-conditioning is provided for cooling in summer and heating in winter.

Baggage Claim Hall is provided with Floor Standing Reversible Split unit for
cooling in summer and heating in winter.

1.02 Service Conditions for Auxiliaries

a) Power Supply

For equipment ratings, 3-phase: 400 volts.

1-phase: 230 volts.

Fluctuation in voltage applied (+/-) 10%

to equipment of equipment
rated voltage.

Frequency: 50 Hz + 2%

b) Water Disposal:

Floor drains are connected to waste system of the Buildings.

1.03 Units

The units used in these specifications are as under:

Unit System : S.I.

Gauge : U.S Gauges as per ASTM

TR : Ton of refrigeration
equivalent to 3.52 kW (12000 BTU/hr.)

2.0 WORK BY CONTRACTOR

2.01 Scope of Work

The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools,

appurtenances, services, temporary work and storage necessary to
completely supply, install, test, commission, and maintain the ventilating and
 8810-2

air-conditioning system all in perfect operating condition in accordance with

these Specifications and Drawings. The Contractor shall also adjust, balance,
readjust all the air. The Contractor shall commission, operate and maintain all
the systems for a period specified in clause SP-22 "Maintenance Period".

Specifications are only general guidelines and by no means cover details of

equipment. These only spell out the intent of the requirement. The details
have to be provided by the Bidders along with details of performance,
construction and technical literature with the Tender. The specifications are to
be read in conjunction with Drawings.

All equipment and materials shall be brand-new bearing stamped ratings as

required and must be approved by the Engineer prior to their use. Any
doubts about the practicability and implementation of Specifications and
details shown on Drawings must be expressed and clarification sought before
submission of Tender. Inability of the Contractor to implement these
specifications after the acceptance of the contract shall be considered breach
of contract.

2.02 Related Works

The Contractor shall provide all works related to HVAC system, whether
specifically mentioned or not, except those specifically stated in exclusion
Clause SP-03, "Work Not Included in this Contract". These related works
shall include, but not limited to:

a) Electrical Works as specified in technical provisions.

b) All works related to coil condensate disposal from HVAC system up to

points shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.

c) Cutting, patching and repairing of civil works in accordance with

Clause 1-06 of Section 1 of Technical specifications.

d) Coordinating HVAC installation with other trades' work, by way of

study of other trades' drawings and pointing out the areas of conflict to
the Engineer before installing items of HVAC system.

2.03 Completion Time

Time for completion shall be as specified in the General Conditions of the

tender documents.

3.0 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT

Works listed hereunder which may be required for satisfactory completion of

the Project are not included in this Contract and will be provided by the
Employer or other contractors appointed by the Employer:
 8810-3

a) Door Louvers

b) Protective fencing around HVAC equipment, if required.

c) Chases in walls and roof/floor slab openings.

d) All concrete foundations, including thickened structural slabs, house

keeping pads and concrete for inertia pads.

4.0 DESIGN CONDITIONS

HVAC System has been designed for the conditions listed hereunder. These
conditions are being given for the information of the Contractor to enable him
to perform specified tests under these conditions.

4.01 Outside Design Conditions

a) Summer

Dry Bulb Temperature 44oC (111.2oF)

Wet Bulb Temperature 27oC ( 80.6oF)
Daily range: 15oC ( 27.0oF)

b) Winter Dry Bulb Temp: 0oC ( 32.0oF)

c) Latitude: (32.5o) North.

4.02 Inside Design Conditions (air-conditioned areas)

a) Summer

All air-conditioned areas 24oC +1oC (75oF +2oF)

50% + 10% RH
b) Winter

All heated areas 22oC +1oC (72oF +2oF)

4.03 Noise Criteria:

All HVAC equipment and air inlets/Outlets shall be selected by the Contractor
to obtain the following noise criteria:

- All air-conditioned area NC 35

5.0 SAMPLES

Contractor shall provide at his cost, samples of materials, instruments,

accessories, electrical items, etc. for approval by the Engineer before order is
placed for the same. These samples shall include, but not limited to:
 8810-4

i) Pipes and Fittings, each size to be used.

ii) Pipe insulation, canvas cloth.

iii) Insulation adhesive and tapes.

iv) Power and Control Cables.

v) Electrical items like push buttons, HOA and toggle switches, pilot
lamp, contactors, relays, circuit breakers, isolating switches.

vi) Electrical conduits and fittings.

vii) Anchor bolts, studs, etc. for hanging arrangements.

viii) Any other item required by the Engineer.

Samples of imported items, literature of which has been approved will not be
required.

5.01 Sound Ratings

The Contractor shall provide certified sound ratings for HVAC machinery, air
terminals, etc. to ensure conformance to specifications.

6.0 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

As soon as practicable after award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit for
the approval of the Engineer, specifications, drawings, original catalogues,
diagrams and other descriptive data for all materials, components and
equipment which the Contractor proposes to use under this Contract. For
certain materials and equipment, data may be required to be submitted in
accordance with a detailed form furnished by the Engineer. Items submitted
shall be properly labeled to indicate the BOQ number, relevant specification
clause, project, manufacturer, source of supply, and other data required by
the Specifications. All items shall be submitted in sufficient time to permit
proper consideration and action thereon without delaying the construction
schedule. Data regarding each BOQ item shall be submitted bound in
separate covers for each item and labeled accordingly. These data shall
include original copies of Performa invoices for placing orders, a type written
specification sheet of each BOQ item, and manufacturer’s published technical
literature/ catalogues with relevant portions highlighted by a marker.

Accessories to be included shall clearly be marked in catalogue and indicated

in specification sheet.

7.0 TIME FOR DELIVERY

All imported equipment, plant and machinery shall be ready for shipment at
Site on such dates so as to ensure adherence to the work programme agreed
 8810-5

with the Engineer later after award of the Contract. The Contractor shall
keep the Engineer informed of the progress of manufacturing and notify
approximately 3 weeks in advance in writing, as to when the equipment will
be ready for inspection by the Engineer/Employer’s representative and shall
supply lists covering each consignment in sufficient detail to enable Engineer
to check the contents of the packages, if he so desires.

8.0 STANDARDS AND CODE REQUIREMENTS

8.01 All equipment and materials under HVAC Scope of Works shall be furnished
in conformity with latest edition of applicable Standards of ASME, ASHRAE,
ARI, SMACNA, TIMA, AMCA etc. and applicable Government and Local
Codes governing the same. In case of conflict, the stricter requirements
shown/specified shall govern. All equipment shall be rated and tested as per
standards listed in ASHRAE Handbook (Latest Edition).

8.02 Abbreviations for Codes and Standards referred in the Contract are as under:

1. ASME - American Society of Mechanical

Engineers, USA

2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials,

USA

3. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refriger-

ating and Air-conditioning Engineers,
USA

4. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association,

USA

5. ARI - Airconditioning and Refrigeration

Institute, USA

6. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Airconditioning

Contractors National Association, USA

7. GOVERNMENT Government of Pakistan

8. LOCAL - Local authorities of the city where

Project is located

9. I.E.E. - Institute of Electrical Engineers,

London.

10. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers

Association, USA

11. AMCA - Air Moving and Control Association

Inc. USA.
 8810-6

12. P.S. - Pakistan Standards

13. B.S. - British Standards

14. TIMA - Thermal Insulation Manufacturer's

Association, USA.

9.0 STANDARDS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED

Where the specifications provide requirements for material or equipment by

specifying a standard such as for example, one of the American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers, which has its origin in
one country, it is not the intention to restrict the requirements solely to that
standard and that country. Other standard, including standards of other
countries, will be accepted provided the requirements thereof, in the sole
opinion of the Engineer are at least equal to the requirements of the
standards specified. The Contractor may propose to the Engineer an
equivalent standard other than that specified, in which case he shall submit
the proposed standards and all other information to demonstrate and prove
his proposed standard is equivalent in all significant respects to the standard
specified. All submissions must be made in the English language.

10.0 PERMITS

The Contractor shall secure and pay for any necessary approvals, permits
and inspections from Government or other controlling agencies where
applicable as required by law, before commencing any work so as to avoid all
delays during erection and turn over the official records of granting of permits
to the Engineer. No reimbursements shall be made for such payments.

11.0 INSPECTION, TESTING, DAMAGES AND MATERIAL ORDERS

11.01 Inspection and Testing at Manufacturer's Shop

All major equipment to be supplied under this Contract shall be subject to

inspection and testing by two representatives of Employer at its point of
original manufacture or final shop assembly before its dispatch to site. The
Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide all the facilities
required for the representatives of Employer for conducting such inspection,
at Contractor’s cost. The cost of travel including overseas travel, obtaining of
Visas, boarding and lodging of Employer's representatives, etc shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.

11.02 Inspection at Site of Works

The Engineer shall inspect all equipment/materials supplied by the Contractor

after delivery of the same at site to assess any damage or short of quantities
and any other requirements of the specifications. The Engineer will issue an
 8810-7

inspection certificate if the supplied items of equipment and material are

found to be satisfactory.

11.03 Damages, During Transportation, Storage & Installation

The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage of the Equipment/

material during transportation to site, storage and installation until satisfactory
handling over the works to the Employer. The Contractor shall replace any
damaged equipment/ materials at his own cost.

11.04 Material Orders

Triplicate copies of material or equipment orders and lists of stock required in

this Contract shall be furnished to the Engineer. All orders and stock lists shall
state the specification designation under which the material is to be furnished
and shall bear reference to the drawing and part number, if any, pertinent
thereto. Orders shall also state that material is subjected to testing and shall
show the required date of delivery of the material to destination.

11.05 Acceptance of Materials

The acceptance of any material or equipment prior to shipment shall in no

way relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities for meeting all of the
requirements of the specifications and shall not prevent subsequent rejection
if such material or equipment is later found to be defective.

12.0 NAMEPLATES

Each piece of equipment shall bear a metal nameplate giving the name and
address of the manufacturer, date of manufacturer and rating data. All ratings
shall be in the unit system adopted for the Project, unless otherwise
authorized by the Engineer.

13.0 SEQUENCE OF ERECTION

The sequence of erection of the Equipment shall conform to the requirements

of the civil construction and of the Erection Instructions. The Engineer upon
request will furnish such information to the Contractor. Contractor’s Work
Programme shall confirm to Construction Schedule shown on Drawings, or as
directed by the Engineer.

14.0 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE IMPORTED

All major equipment and materials listed as under shall be of imported origin
from approved manufacturers:

(1) Floor standing reversible split units.

(2) Air curtains
(3) Testing & maintenance Instruments
(4) Vibration Isolators for Fans and other equipment procured locally.
 8810-8

(5) Piping Insulation, Insulation Tape, sealing tape, and adhesives.

(6) Electrical Circuit breakers, contactors, relays, indication and
measuring instruments, etc.
(7) Rawl bolts, Foundation bolts, etc.
(8) Testing and Balancing Instruments

All rates and amounts filled in the BOQ and Appendices by the Contractor for
equipment/material whether locally procured or imported under his own
import license shall be according to clause SP-26.

15.0 POWER SUPPLY

15.01 For Erection and Preliminary Testing

Power for erection and preliminary testing shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be provided at his own cost.

15.02 For Commissioning and Final Testing

The Employer will provide Power Supply for commissioning and final testing.

16.0 SPARE PARTS

The Contractor shall furnish spare parts as per list given in the Appendix to
BOQ. The Contractor shall also furnish in the Appendix to BOQ, a priced list
of additional spare parts recommended by manufacturers of equipment to
enable the Employer to select any of these additional spares and order them
along with the equipment.

These spare parts shall not be used during Maintenance Period, or earlier,
unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer/ Employer, in which case these
shall be replenished by the Contractor at his cost before issue of final
completion certificate.

The Contractor shall supply, free of cost any spare parts required during the
Maintenance and Guarantee Period.

17.0 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

The Contractor shall operate, service and maintain complete HVAC System
for a period of 365 days after date of issuance of Certificate of Completion.
This service shall be in accordance with provisions of Clause SP-02.2 (b),
SP-17.3 and as specified herein, and shall include supply of operating staff,
all necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling and cleaning and the furnishing of
necessary tools, instruments, supplies and spare parts to keep the system in
perfect operating condition. All costs incidental to Operating, Servicing and
Maintenance shall be deemed to be included in the relevant item of
“Maintenance during maintenance Period” in the Bill of quantities. The
Contractor may withdraw his maintenance tools and instruments on the
completion of Maintenance Period.
 8810-9

18.0 APPROVAL FROM GOVERNMENT

The Contractor shall arrange and be responsible for all tests, test reports and
approvals regarding electrical works and other works under this Contract
requiring tests/Government approvals. All the requirements for this purpose,
whether specified or not shall be completed by the Contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor shall handover all test results and approval certificates to the
Engineer within one week of obtaining such approval.

19.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The Contractor shall guarantee performance as specified of HVAC equipment

in conformity with the Provisions of the Contract.

2184-SIAL-TDBCH-SP-01
 8965-1

SECTION 8965

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

HVAC WORKS

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.01 MATERIALS

All materials shall be of the highest grade, free from defects and
imperfections, of recent manufacture and unused, and the
classification and grades designated, conforming to the requirements
of the latest issue of the appropriate specifications cited herein. All
materials, supplies, and articles forming part of major equipment and
not fabricated by the manufacturer of the equipment shall be the
products of the recognized reputable manufacturers.

1.02 WORKMANSHIP

Workmanship and general finish shall be of the highest grade, in

accordance with the requirements specified herein, and the best
latest standard practice.

1.03 EQUIPMENT

a) All equipment shall be manufactured by companies which have

had at least ten years of previous experience in the design and
manufacture of equipment of comparable type, capacity and
operating conditions, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

b) All equipment and materials supplied shall be from approved

manufacturers who are adequately represented in Pakistan by
an Agent capable of providing installation commissioning and
after sales service. All major equipment shall be imported
directly from the manufacturers through their local agents.
Import of these equipment through warehouses/Export Houses
will not be accepted.

c) All equipment shall be of latest manufacture, not older than the

year in which this contract is awarded and shall bear year of
manufacture stamped on the manufacturer’s name plate duly
certified by the manufacturer.

d) When a manufacturer's product is specified by name, or

equivalent, it shall be in the sole judgment of the Engineer
as to acceptability of any product which is offered as equal to
that specified.
 8965-2

e) Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are

furnished, product of the same manufacturer shall be used;
component parts of entire system need not be product of same
manufacturer.

1.04 CHASES AND OPENINGS

The Contractor shall provide templates or details for chases and

openings to be left in walls and partitions to accommodate work under
HVAC scope of works.

1.05 PROTECTION

The Contractor shall keep pipe, duct and other openings closed to
prevent entry of foreign matter. All fixtures, equipment and apparatus
shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or
mechanical damage, before and during the construction period. All
fixtures, apparatus, or equipment damaged including damaged
shop coats of paint shall be restored to original conditions prior to
Commissioning and also again prior to Final Acceptance. All bright
finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items shall be protected
until in service. No rust will be permitted.

1.06 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING

Required (other than listed in clause 1-04) for proper installation

and completion of HVAC works, including masonry work, concrete
work, carpentry work, painting and re-painting shall be performed by
skilled craftsmen in respective trades, at expense of the Contractor,
Construction shall be cut only after obtaining written permission from
the Engineer.

1.07 LINES, LEVELS AND SPACES

The Contractor shall check dimensions at the building site and

establish lines and levels for work specified in Specifications.
The Contractor shall check with work of other trades to ensure proper
clearance of piping, ductwork, conduit and other items. Any deviations
observed between drawings and actual construction shall be brought
to the notice of the Engineer. The erection supervisor shall regularly
inspect, during progress of civil works, the areas allocated for
installation of HVAC equipment and any conflict observed shall
immediately be reported to the Engineer.

1.08 MACHINERY GUARDS

 8965-3

All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to

adequately protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of
equipment. Wherever possible, moving parts should be protected with
guards supplied by the equipment manufacturer. All guards must be
strongly attached to equipment and should be designed for easy
removal for access, servicing, adjustment & maintenance.

1.09 TOOLS

The Contractor shall supply in a toolbox, full set of tools suitable for
maintenance of all components of the plant furnished by him including
the electrical equipment, for use by the Employer after Final
Acceptance.

1.10 OIL AND GREASES

The Contractor shall supply in sealed containers, oils and greases of

suitable quality sufficient for the initial charge at his own cost. The
Engineer shall approve the grade of oils and greases and their
manufacturer. Another 100% extra oils and greases shall be provided
under BOQ Item for this purpose. The extra oils and greases shall be
reserved for use by the Employer after Final Acceptance.

1.11 SPARE PARTS

The spare parts for HVAC System shall be duplicates of the original
parts furnished and interchangeable therewith.

1.12 ACCOUSTIC TREATMENT

The noise criteria for different areas stated in Special Provisions is to

be obtained.

Sound measurements will be made at 1.5 m above floor level in the

area served and not more than 1.5 m from the grilles, diffusers or
other air devices being tested. The Contractor shall provide
instruments for sound measurement.

Provision is to be made to minimize noise and vibration. However,

different manufacturers’ equipment have varying sound and vibration
characteristics and it is, therefore, the responsibility of the Contractor
to ensure that the requirements in these specifications are fully met by
the equipment he is offering. If the Contractor has any requirements
for additional vibration or sound isolation, these must be incorporated
into the price quoted.

All equipment installed should not be audible inside the occupied

areas and the Contractor must ensure that the equipment he is
offering is quiet and supplied with all necessary silencers to ensure
 8965-4

satisfactory sound levels. Where silencers are required, these must be

incorporated into the price quoted for such equipment, if these are not
specified separately.
 8965-5

2.0 EQUIPMENT

2.01 GENERAL

All equipment shall be of such overall dimensions, operating weights,

service area requirements and configuration that it can be located
where shown on the plans without any adverse effect on its
performance and clearance requirements. Electrical input kW shall
not exceed kW listed in Schedules. The Contractor shall estimate any
change in other trades work, anticipated by offering alternate
equipment, and its cost shall be included in the quoted price for HVAC
Works.

Provision for clearance and service spaces shall be made around all
Mechanical equipment as recommended by manufacturers.

All equipment supplied under this section shall be brand new, factory
manufactured and factory assembled (unless otherwise specified) and
complete in all respects. The type, characteristics, capacity
ratings, component sections of all equipment shall be as scheduled.
All equipment shall be tested at factory for performance before
shipment. The manufacturer shall issue certificate along with test
results.

All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall include vibration

isolation mounting pads, anchor bolts, frames or any other mounting
or supporting accessories.

All power driven equipment shall include motor drives and adjustable
motor foundation bases and accessories.

All equipment shall be complete with all accessories necessary to

serve the intended purpose, whether specified or not.

Equipment installed on roof or intermediate floors shall include

suitable vibration isolators to prevent any vibration traveling to building
structure.

All equipment shall be rated and tested according to the applicable

standards listed in ASHRAE Handbooks (Latest Edition).

2.02 DX-SPLIT AIRCONDITIONERS

The units shall be self-contained floor standing reversible split type,

factory assembled wired and tested with air flow capacities and
characteristics as shown on the drawings.

Units shall be of such overall dimensions, weight and configuration,

so that these may be located where shown. All inter-connecting
 8965-6

refrigerant piping with insulation, refrigerant charge for unit and

piping and all safety controls shall be included.

2.02.1 Indoor Unit

The DX-type Indoor units shall be elegant, decorative type, floor

standing as specified or approved by the Engineer. All component
parts shall be selected, manufactured and assembled by the same
manufacturer as for outdoor Condensing unit.

Each unit shall be constructed so as to prevent drumming, distortion

and vibration and shall enable ease of handling and replacement of
sections.

The units shall include the following sections:

- Washable filters
- DX-type cooling coil
- Supply air fan and motor
- Thermostat microprocessor type (cordless with wall mounting plate)
- Automatic air swing mechanism
- Supply air plenum with adjustable grille
- Condensate drain pump (for cassette type only)

The casing frame shall comprise of galvanized sheet steel,

zincphosphated, with a stoved enamel finish and shall be provided
with decorative cover with supply and return air grilles. The decorative
cover and grille shall be of ABS thermoplastic polymer with smooth
finish in approved colour.

Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced centrifugal type

with backwardly included or airfoil blades to suit the pressure and
operating characteristics specified.

Fan housings shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheet. The

casing shall be constructed to a truly volute form.

Shafts shall be cold finished, turned, and polished steel. Bearings

shall be self aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings.

All parts of fans and motors liable to deterioration shall be protected

by paint or grease before delivery to site.

Filters with dust arrestance of 85% as per ASHRAE standards shall be

provided. The filter media shall be washable, cleanable, reusable,
chemical and moisture resistant, non-perishable, and flame resistant.

Cooling coils shall be manufactured from solid drawn seamless

copper tube staggered in the direction of airflow. Tube return bends
shall be copper and brazed to tube ends.
 8965-7

Fins shall be of continuous aluminium having extended collars for

spacing and bonding mechanically to the tube.

Coils shall be air pressure tested to 20.6 bar while immersing the coil
in a tank of water after completion.

Tubes shall be expanded onto the fin collar by hydraulic pressure

only.

No part of the coil tube ends or headers shall be external to the

section. Coils shall be suitably sealed with grommets where
connections pass through the unit casing.

The air-cooler shall incorporate a galvanized drain pan with intergral

insulation. The pan shall be fitted with galvanized drain socket
connections for attachment to drain points. A manometric trap should
be supplied and installed by the installing contractor.

The coil shall be easily removable from the unit for maintenance and
cleaning purposes.

The coil shall include a thermostatically controlled expansion valve.

Micro-processor based thermostat with integral 3 speed fan selector

shall be supplied as part of the unit and shall be mounted on walls at
appropriate location approved by the Engineer.

2.02.2 Outdoor Unit (CU)

Outdoor unit shall include (but not limited to) compressor, condenser,
refrigerant piping and other specialties, condenser fan with motor,
etc.

Compressor, shall be single speed, fully hermetic high-efficiency type,

with high and low pressure safety switches, motor overload protection,
crankcase heaters and oil pump. The compressor shall be mounted
on resilient mounting for vibration isolation. The refrigerant circuit
shall include adjustable thermostatic expansion valve, sight glass,
liquid line dryer and other safety and controls devices for complete
operation. The unit shall be of the air-cooled type with direct driven
propeller fan, safety guards and heavy-duty motor. Casing shall be
weather proof, of steel construction finished with corrosion resistant
paint, and shall be suitable for outdoor installation. The unit coil shall
be constructed of seamless copper tubes with mechanically bonded
aluminum fins.

2.03 AIR CURTAINS

 8965-8

Air Curtain shall be Industrial type manufactured as self-contained

one-piece housing, fire retardant and corrosion proof. Air curtain
shall have double extended shaft motor, direct drive double width
and double inlet blower wheels and fan housings.

Housing shall be of sufficient strength suitable for wall or ceiling

mounting from both ends without any intermediate support.

A washable air filter shall be provided at the air intake.

The continuous duty type motor shall be totally enclosed with sealed
lubricated ball bearings, resilient mounted. It shall be doubly
protected by an automatic thermal load switch and fuse,

Air curtain shall include control switch with selection of heat/off/fan

only. It shall also be provided with temperature selector switch for
heating and with 24volt remote control thermostat. The operation of
air-curtain shall be manual with provision for door operated switch.

The air curtain shall be provided with factory mounted heater of

adequate capacity divided into two heater banks to provide a
temperature of upto 38 oC. Heater wire shall be nickel – chrome
alloy. The heater shall include all safeties in accordance with UL
Safety Standard 1995. Heater construction shall comply with
UL 5306.

The air curtain shall be sized keeping in view the height and width of
the door.

Air curtain shall be designed as per AMCA standard and shall be

UL listed.
 8965-9

3.0 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND VIBRATION ISOLATION

3.01 GENERAL

All equipment piping and ductwork where used shall be mounted on or

suspended from foundations and supports, all as specified, as shown and as
required.

Contractor shall provide shop drawings, other information and templates for
all concrete foundations as per recommendations of the manufacturer of the
equipment. Information provided in equipment catalogue will not suffice and
the Contractor shall prepare and submit foundation shop drawings for all
equipment. Necessary integral steel framings, concrete-reinforcing rods
welded to frame, anchor bolts, spring mountings, and neoprene pads, shall be
provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate with those doing
the flooring work to ensure proper installation of all these elements.

Foundations and vibration isolation mountings for various equipment, piping

and ductwork where used shall be as per requirements specified. Vibration
isolators where used shall be of approved make.

Springs used for vibration isolation shall be single, open coil type and laterally
stable, having a ratio of loaded height to mean coil diameter not greater than
1.25. To preclude possibility of spring coils "shortening" when motor starts
or slows down, the springs shall be selected so that there remains when the
spring is design loaded, a reserve deflection of between 25 and 30% of
maximum deflection of free spring. When fully compressed, maximum stress
in steel should not exceed yield stress of spring material. Springs shall be
unhoused and held well clear of any part of suspended mass. Isolated
system if supported on a flat slab type base, shall be held clear of supporting
structure or pad by the minimum distance thought necessary for efficient
housekeeping or 25 mm. Lower end of each spring shall be supported on a
rigid, square steel base plate sufficiently thick to withstand the pressure
exerted. All reinforced concrete inertia pads shall have a minimum 200 mm
(8 inches) thickness. On all corners of inertia concrete pads and integral rigid
structural steel bases supporting mechanical equipment, install angles with
snubbers. These shall be built up from 3 thicknesses of neoprene waffle pad
bonded with suitable adhesive and fixed to angles.

All ceiling hung equipment having fans and motor as integral part of
equipment shall have adequate vibration isolators.

Flexible duct connections, as specified elsewhere, shall be fitted wherever

ducts cross building expansion joint, at suction and discharge end of each air
handling unit, packaged unit and fan and wherever shown on the drawings.
Supply grille of concealed ceiling-mounted fan coil unit shall also be
connected to Fan-coil with flexible connection.

Details of all vibration isolators, flexible connections and base shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3.02 MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT
 8965-10

3.02.1 Floor or Roof Mounted Equipment:

All floor or roof mounted equipment shall be placed on at least 100mm

concrete house keeping pads, unless otherwise indicated. The pads shall be
constructed on 25mm thick cork-sheet. Protective curbs shall be provided on
all sides of the pad to protect the cork sheet edges. Special attention shall be
given to the equipment at roof and intermediate floors and manufacturer's
recommendations for prevention of vibration and noise travel to the structure
shall be adopted. The foundation details shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.

3.02.2 Wall Mounted Equipment:

All equipment installed through wall shall have 20 gauge galvanized sheet
metal sleeve which shall remain in place permanently. Space between the
sleeves and duct shall be packed with non combustible glass fiber insulation
of minimum 24 kg/m3 density and sealed with sealant. Equipment installed
through walls shall have supporting wall brackets.

3-03 VIBRATION ISOLATION:

Vibration isolation bases shall be provided and installed for all pumps to
prevent the transmission of vibration to the building structure.

Where fans and motors are integral parts of factory assembled air handling
units and the fans and motors are not spring isolated from the air handling
unit, the entire unit shall be mounted on vibration isolators.

Floor mounted Fans with belt drives shall be mounted on continuous rails with
sliding base for motor adjustment and fan-rails shall be mounted on vibration
isolators as specified above. Where shown on Drawings, continuous rails
shall be mounted on Inertia pads and pads shall be mounted on vibration
isolators.
 8965-11

4.0 PIPING AND SPECIALITIES

4.01 GENERAL

The Tender Drawings indicate generally routes of all piping and the
Contractor shall provide all fittings and accessories necessary for satisfactory
installation and operation of the systems.

All piping shall be grouped wherever practicable and shall be erected to

present a neat appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and parallel
or at right angles to structural members of the building and shall give
maximum possible headroom.

All pipe drops shall be truly vertical. No joints shall be formed in the thickness
of walls, floors or ceilings. the Contractor shall be responsible for
ascertaining the thickness of plaster and other wall finishes, skirting heights,
cill lengths and floor finishes.

Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or windows and shall be generally
arranged so that its bottom is at least 75 mm (3 inches) above finished
floor level and at least 25 mm (1 inch) from finished wall faces. Sufficient
space shall be allowed for accessibility for servicing.

All drain piping shall pitch down in direction of flow. All drains from such
items as drip pans of air conditioners shall spill over and open sight drain,
floor drain or other acceptable discharge points and terminated 150 mm (6
inches) above the drainage.

Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending of pipes will not normally be
allowed.

All 900 elbows used shall be of long radius type, except where space
limitations restrict the use of long radius.

Piping shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under

electric light fixtures.

4.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALITIES

Refrigerant piping shall be copper tubing, type L, bright annealed, dehydrated

and sealed. Soft tempered tubing shall be used where bending is required
and where flare joints are used. Hard drawn tubing shall be used where no
bending is required and silver-brazed joints are used, and for all tubing larger
than 19 mm (3/4 inch.). Copper tube joint shall be brazed, except joints on
lines 19 mm (03/4 inch.) or smaller which may be flared. Fittings for flare
joints shall be standard SF’ forged brass flare-type with short shank flare
units. Fittings for brazed joints shall be wrought copper or forged brass seat
fittings. Cast seat type fittings will not be allowed for brazed joints.

Purge valves, 15mm, shall be packless diaphragm type refrigerant purging

valves, mounted on a branch from the suction line before it returns to the
 8965-12

condensing unit. Discharge from valve shall be provided with removable seal
cap. Valves shall be forged brass, 35 kg/cm2 working pressure.

Refrigerant charging valves, 15mm, shall be packless diaphragm type

refrigerant charging valves mounted on a branch from the liquid line leaving
the condensing unit valve inlet shall be forged brass, 35 kg/cm2. Valves shall
be rated at 35 kg/cm2 working pressure.

Refrigerant dehydrator shall consist of a Steel cylinder filled with a suitable

desiccant through which the refrigerant is passed. The desiccant shall be
such that it will not plug, cake, dust, channel or breakdown, and shall remove
both water and acids from the refrigerant. The dryer shall be so constructed
that none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines. The dryer
working pressure rating shall be 35 kg/cm2 . A dehydrator shall be provided in
the liquid line to each evaporator and shall be piped with a three-valve by
pass.

4.03 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

All condensate drain piping including fittings shall be of Polypropylene

Random (PPR) of PN-10 rating as manufactured by Dadex Eternit Ltd.
Pakistan or approved equal.
 8965-13

5.0 INSULATION

5.01 GENERAL

The Contractor shall provide insulation for the services and equipment specified
hereafter. Insulation shall be as per the following Insulation Schedule.

Insulation material shall be complete with vapor barrier, protection covering and
jacketing (where specified), adhesives, insulation tape, duct sealer and/or sealing
tape and fastening material.

5.02 INSULATION AND ACOUSTIC LINER SCHEDULE

5-02.1 Insulation Schedule

Thickness Insulation Vapor

Service (mm) type barrier Protection

a) Refrigerant Piping

i) Indoor 13 Elastomeric
(min.) extruded Nitrile - -
Rubber tubing to fit
standard of copper
tubing -

280 gm (10 oz) canvas

ii) Outdoor 13 - do – - with sealing adhesive
(min.) coat.

b) Condensate drain

i) Indoor 3 -do- - -
ii) Outdoor 3 -do- - 280 gm (10 oz) canvas
with sealing adhesive
coat.

5.03 INSULATION MATERIALS

5.03.1 Vapour Barrier Pipe Insulation

Vapour barrier when specified shall be factory applied flame retardant reinforced
aluminium foil, 0.02 mils thick with kraft paper.

5.03.2 Insulation Protection Material and Accessories

a. Canvas

140 or 280 gm per m2 (5 oz or 10 oz per sq.yd.) as specified in insulation

schedule.

The Canvas cloth shall be applied with atleast two sealing adhesive coats
of polymeric/elastomeric water proofing and fire resistant sealant in
approved color.
 8965-14

b. Jacket

26 gauge (US) galvanized steel sheet or aluminium sheet

c. Banding

12 mm x 26 gauge galvanized steel or aluminum bands. Joints to be

made by mechanical bender.

d. Insulation Tape

Insulation tape for joints shall be of aluminium foil type 50 mm (2 inch)

wide, of make ABRO, USA or approved equal.

e. Adhesive

Adhesive for thermal insulation shall comply with ASTM Standard C

916-79 or equivalent. Adhesive for acoustic liner shall comply TIMA
Standard AHC-101-1975 or equivalent.

f. Duct Sealer

Sealer for duct joints shall be butyl rubber caulking, weather proof and
water resistant, conforming to U.S. Federal Specification TT-S-001657
Type 1, as manufactured by Woodmont Products, INC, USA, or approved
equal.

5-04 INSULATION APPLICATION

5-04.1 General

All Thermal and acoustic insulating materials shall be applied as specified

hereinafter.

Insulation shall be applied in a smooth, clean, workmanlike manner and joints

shall be tight and finished smooth.

All surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free from loose scale, dirt, oil or
water when insulation is applied. Insulation shall be applied in such a manner
that there will be no air circulation within the insulation or between the insulation
and the surface to which it is applied.

Surface imperfections in the insulation such as clipped edges, small joints or

cracks and small voids, or holes not over 25 mm square shall be filled with like
insulating material or with insulating cement.

Where a vapor barrier is fixed on site it shall be fixed in such a manner as to

obviate the possibility of moisture penetration. It shall be fixed where required by
 8965-15

means of an approved type bituminous compound or approved equal for

tightness.

Insulation for all services shall only be applied until after testing and approval for
tightness obtained from the Engineer, unless otherwise instructed in writing by
the Engineer.

Insulation for all services shall be continued through sleeves. The insulation
on exposed risers shall extend through the floor.

Insulation is to be applied where indicated on the drawings or called for in these

specifications.

5.04.2 Insulation for Equipment Having Renewable Heads

Insulation that is applied to equipment having renewable heads and/or access

plates shall be applied in a manner, which will permit easy removal and
replacement of the insulation. In general this shall be accomplished by encasing
the insulation in sheet metal boxes, which shall be bolted together.

5.04.3 Condensate Drain Piping

Pre-formed rubber insulation shall be used with approved adhesive, and held by
Aluminum bands.
 8965-16

6.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

6.01 SCOPE

a) The Contractor shall supply all panel boards, starting equipment,

circuit breakers, busses, isolators, conducting cables, wiring, conduits,
etc, for the entire HVAC system except exclusions described in
Clause 7.03 "Distribution and Control Scheme".

b) The earthing system shall consist of supply and installation of earth

connecting points, earthing leads and earth continuity conductor and
running earth conductor all along the cable length. All material such
as earth continuity conductors, earth connecting points, earthing lead
and earth electrode including the installation material and
accessories shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor upto the
power cable terminating points provided by others.

6.02 GENERAL

All electrically operated equipment shall comply in all respects with the
relevant B.S Standards including dimensional standards where these exist,
except in so far as this Specification is at variance therewith.

All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue

to function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or
frequency vary within the following tolerances:

Voltage: plus or minus TEN percent.

Frequency: plus or minus TWO percent.

The entire installation shall be in accordance with the requirements and to the
entire approval of the Electricity Department of the Government and the
approval of the Engineer.

All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and

prolonged operation in an ambient temperature 122oF (50oC). This
temperature makes no allowance for local rises in air temperatures due to the
operation of the equipment itself or of heat produced in or by adjacent
equipment such as compressors, condensers or heaters. The maximum
operating temperature in standards specified shall be observed. Allowance
for local high ambient temperature shall be made by reducing the permitted
rises of temperature above ambient.
 8965-17

6.03 ELECTRICAL MOTORS

Unless otherwise indicated in these Specifications or in the Schedules, all

motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled, of squirrel cage construction and
of approved manufacturer.

Insulation on all motors shall be equal to Class F with IP Class 55. All motors
shall be designed for continuous operation in the ambient temperature of
122oF (50oC).

All motors and accessories like, protection and control devices etc. shall
comply in all respects with NEMA, current B.S. Standards and I.E.E.
Regulations. Single-phase motors shall be capacitor start induction run
construction, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

All motors shall be quiet operating guaranteed to fulfill specified requirements

without producing any sound audible outside of plant rooms. All belt driven
motors shall have adjustable bases and setscrews to maintain proper belt
tension, with proper belt guards. Motors installed in the building should be
super silent sleeve bearing type.

The starting current of all motors above 10 h.p shall not exceed twice its rated
full load current. For motor rating 10 h.p. and below the starting current shall
not exceed 7 times its rated full load current or one hundred amps per line,
which ever is less.

Motors used with Frequency converters for variable speed application shall
be suitable for use with the Frequency converter without any overheating at
all operating speeds.

6.04 MOTOR STARTERS AND ISOLATION

Each three-phase motor shall be provided with a protective automatic starter

to disconnect the supply in case of:

- Failure of the supply

- Serious drop in voltage
- Flow of excess current
- Failure of any phase (single phasing)

All starters shall be properly derated for operation in an ambient temperature

of 122oF (50oC).

Manual starters may be used for motors 1/2 HP rating and less and shall
include thermal overload protection and disconnect switch. These should
only be used when no automatic switching is intended.

DOL starters shall be used only on motors of 10 HP and less. Automatic

Star-Delta starters shall be used for motors above 10 HP rating.
 8965-18

All motors, control gear and ancillary equipment shall be protected by

H.R.C fuses or circuit breakers in addition to the protective starter
mentioned above. Such fuses shall be part of the control gear. The isolator
shall be integral with control gear.

Single phase motors shall be protected by circuit breakers with overload

protection. Where several starters are mounted in a panel rack or bank,
each starter shall have separate H.R.C fuses or circuit breaker isolator.

Where starter operating circuits and ancillary apparatus are energized by

an auxiliary supply other than the main power circuit to the motor the isolator
shall incorporate auxiliary contact to effectively isolate all poles of phases
of such auxiliary supplies. Where necessary, two isolators shall be used.

All starters not in a central panel shall have a sheet metal enclosure with a
removable lid and cover and necessary brackets for mounting on panel
or wall. A clear schematic diagram of the starter circuit shall be fixed inside
the cover of each starter.

All magnetic starters subject to manual start shall have momentary contact
start and stop buttons built into cover.

All magnetic starters subject to electrical interlock or automatic control shall

have hand-off automatic switches built into cover.

All coils, cores, insulation, contacts and trippers to starters and relays and
all parts subject to wear and arcing shall be renewable.

6.05 POWER & CONTROL WIRING

All power wiring from the point of supply as described in previous sections,
to each equipment shall be carried out by the HVAC contractor. All control
wiring from each equipment to Apparatus Control Panels shall also be in
scope of HVAC Contractor.

All power wiring shall be executed as per specifications given under

“Electrical Works”.

All control wiring shall be executed as per specifications given under

“Electrical Works” and as per instruction of the controls manufacturer.

6.06 LOCAL ISOLATING SWITCHES

The Contractor shall provide additional local isolating switches for all HVAC
equipment controlled through ACP/MCC/ECP when the equipment is
remotely located and not visible from the main control panel (ACP/ECP).

6.07 EARTHING
 8965-19

All HVAC equipment with electrical connection and all motor starting
equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all metal parts not
normally carrying current, effectively and continually connected to the general
mass of the earth. Each motor, starter, regulator and other components shall
be separately connected to a main earth conductor which shall be directly
connected at each end to the principal earth conductor. Not less than two
principal earth conductors shall be used. Earth conductor sizes shall be as
per I.E.E. regulations.
 8965-20

7.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7-01 GENERAL

The cost of all materials, labour, equipment and works required by

Special Provision and technical Provisions of Specification shall be
considered to be included in the prices quoted against each item in
the Bill of Quantities acceptably furnished, installed, tested, and
commissioned as per Drawings, Specifications and Engineer’s
Instructions, unless expressly excluded.

Price adjustments will be made for items with specific quantities as

given in BOQ, in case the finally measured quantities differ with those
given in the BOQ. These adjustments will be made at the basic rates
quoted in the BOQ. No such adjustments will be made for “LOT” and
“JOB” items.

7-02 BOQ ITEM No. 1H and 2H

Measurement:

Measurement of acceptably completed works of these items and

associated accessories will be made on the basis of actual number
provided and work acceptably furnished, installed, tested and
commissioned. No measurement will be made for fixing accessories,
nuts, bolts, gaskets, etc.

Payment:

Payment will be made for acceptable measured number of respective

items on the basis of rate per number quoted in the Bill of Quantities.
The unit rate shall include cost of all fixing accessories and shall
constitute full compensation for all the works related to these items.

7-04 BOQ ITEM No. 3H, 4H and 5H

Measurement:

Measurement of acceptably completed works of this item will be made

in the unit of LOT/JOB, acceptably furnished and where required
installed, tested and commissioned.

Payment:

Payment will be made for acceptable measured number of respective

items on the basis of lump sum price per LOT/JOB quoted against the
respective item in the Bill of Quantities, and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to these item.

2184-SIAL-TDBCH-TP-07 (10-8-10)
MECHNICAL
SECTION 8560 BAGGAGE HANDLING FACILITIES

01. General

02. Scope of Work

03. Applicable Standards

04. Quality Standards

05. Painting and Finishes

06. Spare Parts and Tools

07. Product Description

08. Product Design Data

09. Measurement and Payment

 8560-1

8560 BAGGAGE HANDLING FACILITIES

01 GENERAL

The baggage handling facilities shall basically consist of

- One (1) Baggage Arrival . System consisting of claim belt including all
necessary switch and control gear.

02. SCOPE OF WORK

This section shall covers but not necessarily be limited to the following:

A. Design, preparation of all relevant shop drawings, obtaining

government and/or Employer's required approvals and/or
certificates, fabrication, transportation to site installation, testing,
commissioning, training of Employer's staff, spares, tools and
maintenance thereafter for the stipulated period of the complete
and provision of Baggage Handling Facilities.

All other miscellaneous equipment and/or work required to render

the Baggage Handling Facilities ready for continuous, safe and
efficient operation.

All required operation and maintenance manuals, spares and tools

lists, drawings and diagrams and inspection and test certificates.

The Bidder is also required to provide baggage handling capacity

calculation(s) of the offered equipment with the Bid as per basic
parameters provided under these specifications.

03. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The summary of standards is by no means intended to be complete, but

has been merely prepared to establish the level of standards expected.
Furthermore, it must be understood that the latest current applicable
standards, specifications or codes must be complied with.

A. Document 950 lATA Airport Handling Manual

B. BS 5667 Continuous Mechanical Handling Equipment-Safety

requirements.

C. AWS B 3.0 American Welding Society “Standard Qualification

Procedure”.

D. NFPA 70 National Fire Protection Association “National Electrical

Code”.
 8560-2

E. ASTM A36 American Society for Testing and Materials “Structure

Steel”.

F. NEMA ICS6 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.

04. QUALITY STANDARD

To guarantee a high quality standard in the field of designing, fabricating,

installing and maintaining the said equipment, only makers with a proven
record of having completed successfully similar projects for at least ten
(10) years will be considered in bid evaluation. To certify the maker’s
experience, a reference list with completed projects should, therefore
accompany the bid documents.

05. PAINTING AND FINISHES

All equipment, machinery, gears, controls, exposed and unexposed steel

work shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from oil, grease and other foreign
substances detrimental to good finishing.

Apply approved primer, undercoats and finishing coats on a properly

prepared surface in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s
recommendation and in accordance with recognized international
standards. If field touchup of abraded and damaged surfaces necessary,
the same type of paint used in the factory shall be employed.

The type and shade of paints, particularly of the finishing coat shall be
subject to the Engineer’s approval.

Enamel shall also be applied according to the manufacturer’s

recommendation.

Stainless steel surfaces shall be smoothly ground to satin finish, class 2B,
180 coarse or approved equivalent standards.

06. SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. Spare Parts

The Contractor shall supply and deliver to site a complete set of the
essential spare parts required to be held on site for use in repairing
and maintaining the equipment supplied under this contract. The
spares supplied shall be supplied under this contract. The spares
supplied shall be sufficient to support the equipment for 3 years
and shall include all consumable items, overhaul kits, fast moving
 8560-3

spares e.g. fuses, bulbs, bulb covers, gaskets, etc. shall be

supplied 10 no. of each type.

Each spare part shall be carefully packed / protected to permit

storage for the maximum possible period without deterioration and
shall be clearly labeled with full identification and all other
necessary information, with cross-reference to the spare parts
manual.

B. Tools

The Contractor shall supply and deliver to site a complete set of the
essential tools required to be held on the site for use in the
maintenance, adjustment or repair of the equipment supplied under
this contract. The tools shall include special tools and instruments
which are necessary for maintenance, repairs and overhauls of the
equipment.

The tools shall be supplied in the form of complete kits and shall be
contained in well constructed and compartmented tool-boxes.

07. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

A. General

Please read the following in conjunction with following drawing:

Drawing No. 2184/50J/TD/2M001

This section shall cover the entire baggage handling system for
arrival. Any conflicts between the requirements in this specification
and the codes, drawings, standards and specifications noted herein
shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Engineer for
resolution.

The location of the equipment shown on above drawing is fixed.

The equipment Contractor shall install the equipment where shown
on the above drawings. Any changes to this or to other design
details due to particular circumstances or equipment shall be
brought to the attention of the Main Contractor in a timely manner
for resolution and possible incorporation in the civil works. The
equipment Contractor must coordinate the installation with the
other trades.

The baggage handling system shall consist of a U shaped flat top

baggage claim belt.

a) System Description: The arrival baggage system consists of

a racetrack claim belts located at passenger terminal
building. The racetrack penetrates the wall between the
 8560-4

baggage claim area and the apron covered area through

electrically operated doors.

Length of the claim belt as shown on above drawing

U-shaped racetrack 175m long.

b) Operating Conditions: the system shall be capable of

operating 24 hours per day seven days per week. There are
peaks during two to three hours a day.

c) Conveyor Belt: The minimum loading length of belt on the

apron side is shown on drawing. Inside the claim area, they
are shaped for maximum passenger access length. The
racetrack shall have flat, level, continuous running surfaces
as shown on drawing, the running surface to be provided
with protective sheet metal sides (3mm thick) extending at
least 50mm beyond the running surface both sides.

d) Belt Design: The preferred design is rubber coated,

interlocking crescent-shaped plates running on four
coasters, each driven by a central chain. Other designs will
only be considered if the bidder provides adequate proof of
safety and superiority with competitive prices with his offer.

The material of the running surface should be synthetic

rubber of durable, non-fraying quality, which when burned
does not release toxic or acidic fumes.

e) Drive Unit: The drive unit of the racetrack is to have totally

enclosed, low noise motors and gear boxes. Drive trains
using V-belts to the main chain are preferred. All bearings
shall be permanently lubricated. Preferable location for drive
is in the non-public area.

The drive activation shall be from the apron side and shall
be located in such a way that a visual contact (window etc.)
allows viewing of the passenger area. The drive shall be
interlocked with the two shutters (shutters must be open) so
that startup in a safe condition is assured. A 5-second time
delay with a sonic signal in the passenger area should
precede motion.

f) Race Track: The outer surface of the racetrack in the public

and non-public area is to be completely enclosed both sides
in stainless steel with a minimum 100mm high recessed kick
plate at floor level. The upper safety edge is to be a
continuous surface with the side surface. All screws are to
be countersunk and all joints smooth to the touch. The
cladding material and supporting structure is to withstand
 8560-5

heavy blows of baggage or baggage cart impact without

deforming or scratching. The racetrack surface or protective
cover must be able to withstand a concentrated load at any
point of 100 kg (person standing).

Full load is defined as the entire racetrack filled with

suitcases with a load of 100 kg per meter of length.

Operating speed of the racetrack is to be 0.4 meter per

second with smooth acceleration characteristics under full
load conditions.

The racetrack operates partly in an air-conditioned and

partly in an outdoor temperature environment. This must be
considered in the design.

The emergency push buttons for stopping the racetrack shall

be provided in the public area in an accessible, well marked
place (out of reach of children). The buttons shall be so
located that they are visible from either side of the
passenger standing area and shall be provided with in
matching finish.

At the wall openings stainless steel frame shall be provided

these shall be equipped with plastic strip curtains installed in
the path of the baggage. An electrically operated shutter
closer shall also be provided in the doorway. Closure shall
have fire ratings as required by fire zoning.

On the apron (loading) side of the racetrack, adequate

protective barriers (guard rail) are to be provided by the
Contractor to protect the racetrack and the personnel from
damage or injury from apron vehicle traffic.

g) Electrical Controls: The control cabinet for claim belt unit will
be located on the apron side as shown in drawing. This area
is outdoors, under roof so that the cabinets need to be
resistant to spray water and meet the requirement of IP54 or
an approved equivalent standard as well as the
environmental conditions noted earlier.

All electrical devices shall be of the highest quality and

safety standards, preferably solid state devices. The variety
of parts shall be kept to a minimum, for example, MCC
components and control items insofar as possible uniform
and interchangeable.
 8560-6

B. Performance and Special Requirements

- Fastenings: All supports, fastenings and securing of

baggage handling equipment to wall, floor, ceilings and
columns are to be provided by the supplier of the
system and are to be coordinated with and approved
by the Engineer. Fastenings shall consider all loading
conditions and building expansion joints and shall be
designed to prevent vibrations to be transferred to the
building. Fastening and support devices shall be
designed to prevent strength degradation due to rust or
other environmental factors.

- Environmental Conditions: All equipment must be

capable of operating continuously under the following
conditions:-

• Minimum temperature 5oC

• Maximum temperature 50oC
• Minimum relative humidity 20%
• Maximum relative humidity 90%

- Operating Conditions: The system shall be capable of

operating 24 hours per day seven days per week.
There are peaks during two to three hours a day.

- Equipment Data: With his proposal, the Bidder must

provide electrical power requirements, weight and
loading requirements of his equipment, in what
components the equipment will be subdivided, samples
of the belting material as well as information regarding
the electrical drive and control components.

- Equipment Quality: All equipment to be supplied shall

be of the highest standards, reliability and quality.
Expected service life for all components is to be 10
years minimum under normal operating conditions.
 8560-7

08. PRODUCT DESIGN DATA

• Number of bags per passenger 1.5

• Length of U-shaped claim belt, 175 m
• Belt surface above floor, 400 mm
• Operating speed, 0.4 m/s
• Clear belt width, 1000 – 1020 mm
• Load Bearing Capacity, 100 kg/meter
• Drive System, Central drive chain with V-Belt
Configuration.
• Kick Plate, 100 mm high stainless steel at floor
level all around baggage belt.
• Door opening & Curtain, Stainless Steel frame
with plastic strip curtain.
• Door Shutter, Electrically operated shutter of
stainless steel construction.
• Operating conditions 24 hr./day
• Service Life of equipment 10 years under
normal operating conditions.
• Electrical requirements 400V / 3Phase / 50Hz
and 230V / 1Phase/50Hz.

NOTES:
i) All leaflets properly signed/stamped in original to be submitted for the equipment
including drive, controls and safety devices etc. being offered.
 8560-8

09. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the

Contract Document, no separate measurement and
payment will be made for the under mentioned works related
to the relevant item of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof
shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unit
rates of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.

a) Designing and submission of manufacturer’s data,

specification, diagram and drawings, installation,
operation and maintenance manuals, etc.

b) Painting and finishes of equipment.

c) Supply of accessories including supports, brackets,

safety devices, controls, installation of equipments,
miscellaneous tools etc. required for proper
installation as recommended by the manufacturer.

d) Handling and proper storage of equipment prior to

installation.

e) Provision of necessary guidance and supervision for

the Civil Works to the Civil Contractor, which will be
carried out for equipment installation.

f) Provision of any hole cutting in slab / wall or chipping

of concrete surfaces required for proper installation /
erection of baggage handling system.

g) Rectification of any damage done to the Civil Works

for erection or other purposes.

h) Testing and commissioning after installation including

supply of requisite manpower and testing tools /
instruments and completion of documentation.

i) Training of Employer’s personnel for operation and

maintenance of equipment.

j) Maintenance of the work during defect liability period

including supply of necessary spares / other material
and maintenance personnel needed to keep the
equipment in perfect operating condition.
 8560-9

B. Measurement

No measurement shall be made for item supplied under this

contract.

C. Payment

Payment shall be made at the contract rate entered in the

Bill of Quantities for the items accepted by the Engineer.